802BT/802R Video Test
Generator
User Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Standard features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Optional features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Physical controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Format knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Image knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Image Step key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
R, G, B Video Gate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ACS, DCS, and DSS Sync Gate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Outputs Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Video interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
VGA interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
DVI-I interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LVDS interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Special Sync (S/S) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
S-Video interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Composite video BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Component video BNC interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Computer interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
GPIB interface (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PCMCIA interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Command interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Setting up a terminal connection with the generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Changing the baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sending commands interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sending commands from text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Special operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Summary of special modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Special key operations summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
About Video Generator Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
VGM features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installing VGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
General video display testing procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Making physical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Setting the video output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Selecting video formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Selecting formats automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Selecting formats manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Understanding the format library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Organization of format library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Viewing format parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selecting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Testing analog computer (IT) CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Testing digital computer (IT) FPDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Testing analog composite video SDTV (CE) CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Testing analog component video SDTV (CE) CRTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Testing digital component video HDTV (CE) flat panel displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Displaying system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Restoring factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Setting and restoring system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ii
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibrating the generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Calibrating frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Cloning generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Installing firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Memory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Format library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Format naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Composite television format names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Component television format names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Computer display format names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Aperture designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using legacy format names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Viewing the format library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Viewing format details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Creating custom formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Determining the signal specifications of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Creating a new format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Modifying existing formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Editing Format knob lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing format knob list using internal editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing format knob list using command line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Configuring DCS priority scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating format aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Viewing the image list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Creating custom images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Command file example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downloading bitmap images from a PCMCIA card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Looping through images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Editing Image knob list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Editing image knob list using internal editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Editing Image knob list using command line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Creating image aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Creating a test sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Creating a test sequence using command line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Viewing the test sequence list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Viewing the test sequence list using the command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Deleting a test sequence using the command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Viewing test sequence using internal sequence editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Running a sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Running a test sequence using the command line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cancelling the start-up sequence mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting the GPIB port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Queries and commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sending commands and queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Completion handshake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Input buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Status queries and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Requesting service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Bus commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
iv
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote/local operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
HDMI analyzer connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
DVI analyzer connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Enabling and disabling analyzer images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Measuring timing of video signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting up analyzer to measure timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Measuring basic timing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Measuring detailed timing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Testing cables and distribution systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Testing accuracy of analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Measuring pixel errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Setting delta error patch parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Measuring pixel errors in patch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Testing InfoFrames (HDMI only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Testing HDMI transmit device InfoFrame capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Testing audio (HDMI only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Testing HDMI transmit device audio capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Controlling analyzer using command-line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Signal timing analysis commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Viewing specific timing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Generating pseudo-random noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Pseudo-random noise analysis commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Testing the analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Analyzing pixel data (delta error patch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Generating pseudo-random noise from your device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
lfsr.h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
lfsl.cpp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Sending pseudo-random noise to external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Analyzing noise from an external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Setting pseudo-random noise parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
HDMI connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Setting up the generator for HDMI operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Testing HDMI video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Testing HDMI video formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Testing HDMI video pixel repetition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Testing HDMI audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Testing HDMI InfoFrames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Viewing InfoFrame contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Testing with Active Format Description (AFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
EDID testing for source devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Testing response of source to EDID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
EDID testing for sink devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Viewing EDID from a display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Writing EDID data to a display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Overview of HDMI compliance testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Visual verification of formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
vi
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing DVI or HDMI receiver with HDCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Testing HDCP with static images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Using command-line interface to control HDCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
HDCP? command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Troubleshooting HDCP errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Common problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Running HDCP test in step mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Running an HDCP self-test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Understanding the HDCP test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Operating special sync for probe pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Front panel controls and indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Probe coordinate numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Configuring the probe feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Setting sensitivity of knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Controlling probe using generator controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Controlling probe using command line interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Configuring special sync for FS, LS or CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Commands by name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Standard image descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
System errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Power-on self test messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Power fail message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Format errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Invalid data error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Corrupt data error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
2000-2999 Format errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
3000-3999 Image errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
4000-4999 Test sequence errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
5000-5999 Directory errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
6000-6999 Bitmap errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
7000-7999 LUT errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
8000-8999 Font errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
9000-9999 System errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
10000-10999 System errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
viii
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product overview
The generator enables you to test a broad range of video displays including composite or
component television video signals as well as computer video display terminals. The
generator enables you to quickly set the format appropriate for each display simply by
twisting a knob. The generator’s functions can be customized to support video display
testing in a variety of environments such as development, repair center, or production line.
Standard features
There are over 250 built-in video formats with the generator including VESA, ATSC,
EIA-770, SMPTE, NTSC, and PAL. The generator contains a library of over 250 test
images which enables comprehensive testing of color, size, linearity, convergence, focus,
persistence, and more. You can create custom formats and images, and create test
sequences to automatically progress through a list of formats and images for production
line environments. You can also configure the generator to continuously loop through the
test images.
The generator provides a hot sync feature through the VGA, DVI, or HDMI interface. This
feature simplifies format selection by filtering formats in accordance with the Extended
Display Identification Data (EDID) it receives and processes from the display.
A probe pulse feature is available on the Special Sync BNC connector. This enables you to
trigger an oscilloscope or to synchronize an inspection camera. You can position the
leading edge of the probe pulse anywhere within the video frame. This feature facilitates
troubleshooting by enabling you to focus on very specific video signal problems occurring
anywhere in the video signal. The probe BNC connector can also be configured to output
frame sync, line sync, composite sync, or a special probe pulse.
You can control the generator using the front panel knobs and keys, a command line
interface, or a Windows-based graphical application called Video Generator Manager
(VGM).
The generator supports custom data backup, automatic or on-demand calibration, and
downloadable firmware upgrades.
Optional features
Your generator may include one or more of the following options:
•
Digital Visual Interface (Single Link and Dual Link). The generator can be equipped
with a single link or dual link Digital Visual Interface (DVI) transmitter. The DVI
transmitter enables testing of DVI compliant video displays. The DVI option includes
EDID parsing and a hot-plug, EDID-driven format list.
2
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). Generates HDCP encrypted
content for testing DDCP-compliant displays.
DVI or HDMI Analyzer. Optional receiver, which measures pixel errors at different
frequencies, measures timing of external sources, and displays EDID from external
sources. Can also be used to test cables or distribution systems.
•
High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI). The HDMI feature helps manufacturers
increase the likelihood that their products will not only meet compliance standards, but
also flawlessly interoperate with other HDMI devices.
•
•
General Purpose Interface Bus (IEEE-488). Use to operate the generator in an
automated environment.
Component video BNC connectors. The generator can be equipped with R, G, B,
VS, and HS/CS BNC connectors.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the generator
This section describes basic operating procedures. There are four operational interfaces
for controlling the generator.
•
Physical controls. Most of the generator’s features and functions are supported using
the front panel using the knobs and keys. Functions which are not supported using the
front panel include upgrading the firmware, creating and editing formats, creating and
editing images and reconfiguring the format and image knob lists.
•
•
•
Command line. An ASCII command line interface, available through the RS-232 port,
allows you to send commands either interactively or as command files. All functions are
supported by the command line interface except upgrading firmware.
Video Generator Manager (VGM). VGM is a Windows-based application that supports
most generator functions using a graphical user interface. When upgrading the
generator firmware, VGM must be used.
GPIB Programmatic interface (optional). An IEEE-488 GPIB interface supports the
use of the 802 as a programmable video signal source in an automated test
evironment. All generator commands are supported through this interface.
Physical controls
The physical controls on the generator consists of the Format knob, Image knob, and eight
keys, arranged into four function groups: Image, Video Gate, Sync Gate, and Outputs. All
of the keys have built-in indicator lights. When illuminated, a key’s function is considered
on, or enabled.
Power switch
This rocker switch turns the power on and off. The power supply is auto switching and can
handle 110 or 220v.
Format knob
The Format knob is used to select a video signal format from a list of stored formats. A
format is a set of parameters that specifies the video and sync signal requirements of a
particular timing. Format parameters include timing, sync type, video type, display size,
and others. By turning the knob, you can scroll through a list of formats stored in
non-volatile memory. The list includes the factory default formats. The knob list can be
edited to add custom formats. If a format containing erroneous information is selected, the
generator turns off the outputs, and displays an error message.
4
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image knob
The Image knob is used to select a test image from a list of stored images. The exact
behavior of the knob depends upon the status of the Image key. Turning the knob when
the light on the Image key is extinguished scrolls through the main list of test images.
Not all images are supported by all signal formats. Some images in the main image list
may be skipped while certain formats are selected. For example, the ColorBar image will
be skipped whenever a monochrome format is selected.If the currently selected image
cannot be drawn given a newly selected format, the Outline image is automatically drawn
after the new format has finished loading.
Some of the image names in the main list may refer to a sub-set of two or more different
images. The images in the sub-sets are selected by first selecting the name of the desired
sub-set from the main image list. If the sub-set consists of just two images, pressing the
Image key will toggle between the two images. The key is illuminated when the second
image is showing.
Image Step key
The Image Step key determines the behavior of the Image knob in normal operating mode
where it is used to select alternate versions of a given test image. The Step key will
illuminate only when you have selected an image with multiple versions. The following
procedure describes how to select image versions.
To select image versions:
1. Using the Image knob, select an image that has multiple versions.
2. Press the Step key. The key illuminates.
3. Turn the Image knob to step through the image versions. As you turn the knob, the
image name on the LCD will not change.
4. Press the Step key again. The light on the key extinguishes, and the Image knob
returns to normal operation.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R, G, B Video Gate keys
The Video Gate keys activate (turn on) or deactivate (turn off) individual color elements
when the generator is in normal operating mode. They also control the addition of primary
color information to the NTSC / PAL video outputs on the generator. The following table
shows the function of the Video Gate keys, and commands for controlling the key function.
Key
Function
Command
R
Turns all of the red video outputs on and off.
G
Turns all of the green video outputs on and off.
When a 2-bit digital monochrome (MDA) signal is
being generated, the G key turns the I (intensity)
signal of the video pair on and off.
B
Turns all of the blue video outputs on and off.
When a 1 or 2- bit digital monochrome signal is
being generated, the B key turns the V (video) sig-
nal on and off.
The master Outputs key overrides the settings of these keys when turned off.
ACS, DCS, and DSS Sync Gate keys
The Sync Gate keys are used to activate (turn on) or deactivate (turn off) sync signals
when the generator is in normal operating mode. With some formats, more than one type
of sync can be selected by pressing two keys together.
Key
Function
Command
ACS
the analog video outputs.
DCS
DSS
Outputs digital composite sync signal.
SSST 2; ALLU
SSST 1; ALLU
Outputs separate digital horizontal and vertical
sync signals.
The generator selects a default sync type whenever you select a new format. Not all sync
types are available with all formats. For example, digital video formats will not allow analog
composite sync to be selected. If a key will not illuminate when pressed, then the
corresponding sync type is unavailable. Repeatedly pressing a sync gate key causes the
selected sync to be toggled on and off. When toggled off, no sync will be sent to the
display.
The master Outputs key overrides the settings of these keys when turned off.
6
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs Key
The Outputs key turns all signal outputs on or off when the generator is in normal
operating mode. This is the master output signal control. When the master output control
is turned off, all of the signal outputs (video and sync) of the generator are disabled.
Key
Function
Command
ON
Toggles on and off all video and sync.
LCD
The generator displays format and image information on the LCD in either of these modes:
•
Default display mode: This mode displays an index sequence number left of the
current format and current image. The image version number, which appears on the
display,represents a version of a image that has multiple versions associated with it.
Horizontal rate Format index
Format name
H32
V60
150=DMT0660
250=SMPTE133
Vertical rate Image index
Image name
•
Status Display mode: This mode replaces the index numbers with codes, which
provide additional information about the active format. This mode is useful when
working with multiple video signal outputs and color encoding methods.
Color space
Color depth
Video type
Format name
H31
V60
D8C=DMT0659
0=SMPTE133
Image version
Image name
Video types:
•
•
•
A for analog video
D for DVI video
H for HDMI video
Color depths:
•
•
4 for 4-bits per pixel depth
8 for 8-bits per pixel depth
Color space:
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
•
M for monochrome video
C for RGB color video
Y for YPrPb (analog) or YCrCb (digital) with 4:4:4 color sampling
y for YCrCb (digital) with 4:2:2 color sampling
To use Status Display mode:
1. Turn off the generator.
2. Hold down the Step, G, and B keys while starting the generator, until status display
displays.
Special:
keys
Status display
Alternatively, you can set the status display mode by entering the following command:
Determining if the active format has been modified
If the active format has not been modified from the factory setting, then the index number
and format name are separated by an equal (=) character. If the active format has been
modified, then the index number and format name are separated by a blank space. The
blank space indicates that the active format has been modified from the default format
definition.
8
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video interfaces
This section describes the video interfaces available on the generator.
VGA interface
Use to output analog video for testing analog video displays. The following table describes
the VGA connector pinouts.
Pi
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Analog Red Video
6
Analog Red Video Ground
11
No Connection
2
3
4
5
Analog Green Video
Analog Blue Video
No Connection
7
Analog Green Video Ground 12
Analog Blue Video Ground 13
DDC/EDID Serial Data
Horizontal Sync
8
9
DDC/EDID +5 Vdc Out
Digital Ground
14
15
Vertical Sync
Digital Ground
10
DDC/EDID Data Clock
DVI-I interface
Use to output digital video for testing DVI-compliant video displays. Note that the DVI-I
connector also provides an analog output which can be used to test analog formats with a
VGA to DVI adapter when the generator is in analog friendly mode.
The DVI connector pinouts are shown in the following table.
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TMDS D2-
9
TMDS D1-
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
TMDS D0-
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
Analog Red
TMDS D2+
D2/4 Shield
TMDS D4-
TMDS D4+
DDC Clock
DDC Data
10
11
12
13
14
15
TMDS D1+
D1/3 Shield
TMDS D3-
TMDS D3+
+5 Vdc
TMDS D0+
D0/5 Shield
TMDS D5-
Analog Green
Analog Blue
Horizontal Sync
Analog Ground
TMDS D5+
Clock Shield
TMDS Clock+
TMDS Clock-
Ground
No Connection 16
Hot Plug Detect 24
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LVDS interface
The LVDS connector is located on the front of the generator and is labeled “Digital.” It
emulates a digital host video source and is used for testing LVDS-compliant video
displays. The LVDS connector pinouts are shown in the following table.
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A0M
10
11
12
13
14
15
DDC Clock
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
A0P
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
DDC Data
A1M
DDC +5 Vdc
USB+
A1P
USB Ground
USB-
A2M
A2P
Clock 1M
A3M
USB +5 Vdc
A4M
Clock 1P
A3P
Shield Ground
A4P
Shield
A5M
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
DDC Ground
A5P
No Connection 16
No Connection 17
No Connection 18
A6M
A6P
A7M
A7P
Clock 2M
Clock 2P
HDMI interface
The HDMI connector is located on the front of the generator and is labeled “HDMI.” It
emulates an HDMI-compliant video display. The HDMI connector pinouts are shown in the
following table.
HDMI Type A Connector Pinouts (HDMI option only)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
TMDS Data 2+
7
TMDS Data0+
13
CEC
2
3
4
5
6
TMDS Data2 Shield
TMDS Data2-
8
TMDS Data0 Shield
TMDS Data0-
14
15
16
17
18
Reserved (N.C.)
SCL
9
TMDS Data1+
10
11
12
TMDS Clock+
SDA
TMDS Data1 Shield
TMDS Data1-
TMDS Clock Shield
TMDS Clock-
DDC/SEC Ground
+5 V Power
Special Sync (S/S) interface
Use the S/S connector to output frame sync, line sync, composite sync, or a special probe
S-Video interface
If you have chosen the TV option your generator will have an S-Video connector on the
right side labeled “SVIDEO.” This is a miniDIN connector that emulates an S-Video
compliant source for outputting composite TV signal.
10
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Composite video BNC
If your generator is equipped with the TV option, it will have a composite TV BNC
connector on the right side, labeled “TV.” This interface emulates an analog composite TV
source.
Component video BNC interface
Your generator can be optionally equipped with separate R. G, B, HS/CS, and VS BNC
connectors on the right side. These interfaces emulate component a analog video source.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Computer interfaces
This section describes the RS-232, GPIB, and USB interfaces.
RS-232 interface
Each generator has a standard RS-232 serial connector, labeled “Serial.” This is a 9-pin
D-Sub male connector which enables you to connect the generator with a computer. A null
modem cable is provided to support this interface. You can communicate with the
generator either through the command line interface from a telnet session or from the
Video Generator Manager (VGM) application. The pinouts for the RS-232 connector are
shown in the following table.
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Data Carrier Detect
4
Data Terminal Ready
7
Request to Send
2
3
Received Data
5
6
Signal Ground
8
9
Clear to Send
Ring Indicator
Transmitted Data
Data Set Ready
GPIB interface (optional)
The GBIP interface allows you to use the generator as a programmable video signal
source in a larger automated test system. Generators that have the GPIB interface option
have two rotary switches for setting the GPIB address. These switches are accessible
through the ventilation slots. The GPIB connector pinouts are listed in the following table.
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
DIO1
DIO2
DIO3
DIO4
EOI
7
NRFD
NDAC
IFC
13
14
15
16
17
18
DIO5
DIO6
DIO7
DIO8
REN
19
20
21
22
23
24
Shield
8
Shield
9
Shield
10
11
12
SRQ
ATN
Shield
Shield
DAV
Shield
Shield
Signal Ground
USB interface
Use the USB interface for downloading bitmap images from a computer. With VGM 4.0 or
later, the USB interface can be used in place of the serial interface.
12
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command interfaces
The common test applications can be accomplished through the physical controls or
through the command line interface. The generator supports an ASCII command and
query language that allows you to control the generator interactively or through batch
processing of command files. All generator functions are supported through this interface.
The command interface is available through two physical interfaces: the RS-232 interface
and the optional IEEE-488 GPIB interface.
The GPIB interface supports programmatic control in an automated test environment,
supports user interactive command sessions.
The procedures for using the RS-232 interface are explained in this section.
Setting up a terminal connection with the generator
The following procedures describe how to setup a terminal session with the generator
using the RS-232 interface.
To setup a terminal connection with the generator:
Whenever the generator is powered on, the baud rate returns to 2400 bps, no parity, 8
data bits, 1 stop bit, and no handshake.
1. Connect the RS-232 cable between your computer or terminal and the serial connector
on the generator.
2. Using a terminal emulator, such as HyperTerminal, establish a terminal connection with
the generator. Configure the terminal emulator to use the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
2400 baud rate
8 data bits
1 stop bit
no parity
no handshaking
full duplex
3. Press the Enter key until the R:> prompt appears.
14
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the baud rate
The RS-232 interface can be configured from the physical controls to support faster baud
rates and to supprort a remote keypad (optional accessory). The default configuration is
2400 baud. When the generator is powered on, the baud rate returns to the default
configuration.
To support file transfers, you can change the baud rate of the port to 38400 bps using the
command line interface or 9600 bps using the physical controls.
To increase the baud rate using the command line interface:
1. At the R:> prompt, enter the following command:
MODE 38400 n, 8, 1, h, n
After you press Enter, the terminal emulator will lose its connection with the generator,
which is now set at a different baud rate.
2. Close the terminal emulator session, change the baud rate to 38400, and then re-open
the session, specifying the baud rate as 38400.
To change the baud rate to 9600 using the front panel:
1. Turn off the generator.
2. Hold down the R and DCS keys while starting the generator. The serial port is now set
to 9600 bps. Restarting the generator again, without pressing any keys, will
Sending commands interactively
This procedure describes how to send commands through an interactive user session.
The generator parses command lines one at a time. Command lines must be terminated
with a carriage return (<cr>). The generator immediately echoes each character as it is
received and places it in a command line buffer. When sending multiple commands at
once, separate each command with a semi-colon. Commands are not case sensitive.
To send single commands to the generator:
2. At the R:> prompt, enter commands or queries and terminate with a carriage return.
Command examples
•
To display the name of the format currently in the format buffer, enter:
FMTL?
•
To load a format, enter:
FMTL format_name
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
To apply the format to the generator hardware, enter:
To load an image, enter:
IMGL image_name
To apply the image to the generator hardware, enter:
To send multiple queries and commands to the generator:
2. At the R:> prompt, enter the queries or commands, separating each with a semi-colon
and terminating the command line with a carriage return.
Command examples:
•
To query the current format and then load a new format enter the following:
The generator will return the following in response to this command and query string:
current_format; new_format
•
To change the format and image active in the generator enter:
This tells the generator to load the 480p59 format named “” into the format data buffer,
the image named “SMPTEbar” into the image data buffer, and then to “use” the
contents of both (“all”) buffers to drive the generator's output.
Sending commands from text files
When developing more complex, custom test sequences or formats, it is easiest to enter
commands in a text file, and then send the file to the generator. This approach allows you
to modify the file without entering the entire command script.
To send a text file to the generator:
1. Using a text editor, enter the commands that define a test sequence or format into a
text file, and save the text file using a *.txt extension.
16
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. At the R:> prompt, transfer the text file to the generator. For example, to transfer a file
using HyperTerminal, do the following:
a. On the Transfer menu, click Send Text File. The Send Text File dialog box
appears.
b. Select the text file you want to send, and then click Open. HyperTerminal displays
the commands as they are sent.
c. Press Enter once to ensure that the last command is sent.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special operating modes
You can set the generator to operate in various modes to accomplish specific functions.
When any special operational mode is set, it persists (until overridden) throughout
subsequent power cycles, which may be performed to set other modes.
You can view the operational settings and special functions of the generator on a video
display by viewing the GenOps image. This image provides key sequences and the status
of special operating modes in the generator.
To determine the status of operating modes:
1. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the video display.
2. Using the Format knob, select a format suitable for the display.
3. Turn the Image knob to select the GenOps image.
18
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Summary of special modes
The following table describes the special operating modes, and how to configure the
modes using the physical controls or the command line interface.
Special mode
Function
Physical control Command
Initialize with factory
defaults
Re-initializes generator to fac- ACS, DSS
tory defaults. Removes all spe-
cial modes, deletes all custom
objects.
Calibrate
Calibrates the generator.
R, G, B
SROP 32
Clone
Copies configuration settings
from one generator to other
generators using a PCMCIA
card.
Step, Outputs
Set: SROP 64
Old format library
Displays old format names on
LCD.
G
Set: SROP 1
Remove all modes
Set GPIB address
Removes all special modes.
Sets the GPIB address.
ACS, DCS, DSS Set: SROP 0
DCS
Rst: INIT
Set baud rate to 9600 Sets baud rate of RS-232 port R, DCS
to 9600 bps.
Set: SROP 256
Enable programmable
keypad
R, OUTPUT
Set: SROP 512
Enable numeric key-
pad
Enables remote operation
through remote keypad.
R
Set: SROP 128
Analog friendly mode
Causes all digital formats to
output analog video signal.
R, B
Set: SROP 4
Enable status display
Providesadditionalinformation Step, G, B
on LCD (analog/digital and
color depth).
Set: SROP 8
DCS priority scheme
Digital friendly mode
Changes priority scheme for
putting CS on separate VS and
HS sync outputs when any dig-
ital composite sync (DCS) type
is selected
Step, DCS
Set: SROP 4096
Causes all analog formats out- G, B
put digital signal
Set: SROP 2
Color difference
friendly
Outputs digital YCbCr for tele-
vision formats.
B
Set: SROP 2048
Reset HDCP Rx gating Resets the receiver, and gates Outputs
Set: SROP 16
clock
off transmitter clock and data.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special mode
Function
Physical control Command
G, ACS Set: SROP 8192
HDCP tester mode
Enables HDCP testing.
Hot plug formats
Auto-configures generator for- R, ACS
mat knob list based on EDID in
response to hot plug.
Set: SROP 16384
DVI mode (disable
HDMI)
Outputs DVI on HDMI connec- R, G
tor.
Set: SROP 32768
Hot plug bypass
Bypasses hot plug detection
and auto-configuration of the
generator.
Step, R, ACS
Set: SROP 65536
Special key operations summary
The following table describes modes that can be enabled while the generator is running,
and the physical controls and comands for using the modes.
Physical control
(hold 1st & press
Mode
Function
2nd)
Command
Toggle analog/digital
Outputs either digital or ana-
log.
G, B
Rotate video type
Outputs either RGB, color dif- R, B
ference, or monochrome.
DDC-based auto-con- Auto-configures generator for- R, ACS
figuration mat knob list based on EDID.
Toggle biLevel/triLevel Toggles between tri-level and
bi-level syncs for analog HDTV
B, ACS
TSPG x
formats with tri-level sync type.
20
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About Video Generator Manager
Video Generator Manager (VGM) is a Microsoft Windows-based program used to operate
the generator from a computer.
VGM features
VGM supports the following functions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creating custom test sequences.
Creating customized Image or Format knob lists.
Creating custom formats or modifying existing formats.
Creating custom images or modifying existing images.
Archiving custom data.
Upgrading the generator firmware.
Re-initializing a generator.
Calibrating a generator.
Downloading a bitmap image to a generator.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information about using VGM, see the VGM online help.
Installing VGM
VGM is available on the Resource CD included with the generator, and from
http://www.quantumdata.com/support/downloads/.
To install VGM:
1. Log onto Windows with Administrator privileges.
2. Do one of the following:
•
•
On the Resource CD, double-click the setup.exe file to begin the installation.
On the Quantum Data Web site, click the setup.exe file to begin the installation.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
22
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General video display testing procedure
This section provides an overview of the video testing process, which involves connecting
the generator to the display under test, selecting a format appropriate for the display, and
then selecting images to exercise the display to ensure proper functioning.
Making physical connections
Use the following table to connect the generator with display under test.
Display type
Signal type
Cable
Information
Technology
(IT)
Computer - VESA (DMT,
CVT)
Analog component RGB
VGA to VGA
Computer - VESA DDWG
Digital component RGB
Analog composite CVBS
DVI to DVI
Consumer
Equipment
(CE)
SDTV - ITU-470-6 base-
band
BNC to RCA 75 Ohm
SDTV - ITU-470-6 base-
band
Analog composite S-Video S-Video (miniDin to
MiniDin)
1
SDTV - CEA-861B
HDTV - CEA-861B
Analog component YPbPr VGA to RCA
Digital component DVI
RGB
DVI to DVI, or HDMI to
DVI
HDTV - CEA-861B
Digital component HDMI
RGB and YCbCr
HDMI to HDMI
1. Optional cable available from Quantum Data.
Setting the video output mode
If the application involves testing similar displays with one type of video signal output for
extended periods of time (for example, in a production environment), use one of the
following modes:
•
Digital Friendly mode – Digital formats are output without change, while analog
formats are temporarily switched to digital. This mode is available only if the generator
has a digital option (DVI, LVDS, or HDMI) installed.
•
Analog Friendly mode – Analog formats are output without change, while the digital
formats are temporarily switched to analog.
When you need to test various video signal outputs and color encoding methods (for
example, in a repair center), disable all friendly modes, and enable the Status Display
24
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
hold down the G key while pressing and releasing the B key to switch between digital and
analog outputs. The table below shows the AVST and DVST command settings for analog
and digital outputs.
DVST
Video Signal Interface
AVST
Analog YYY Grayscale
1
0
Analog RGB Color
2
3
4
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
CVBS or S-Video Grayscale
CVBS or S-Video Color
Analog YPbPr SDTV Color
Analog YPbPr HDTV Color
Digital YYY Grayscale
Digital RGB Color
0
0
0
0
9
10
13
14
Digital YCbCr SDTVColor
Digital YCbCr HDTV Color
Selecting video formats
This section explains how to configure the generator to output video formats that are
supported by the device being tested.
Selecting formats automatically
When testing EDID-compatible displays, the generator can automatically update the
Format knob list (list of format names shown on the LCD) to include only formats
supported by the display under test. Depending on the output used, the generator can do
this on demand, or automatically when a display is connected.
To update the Format knob list on demand:
1. Connect the display you want to test with the generator.
2. Hold down the R key, and then press and release the ACS key. This puts the generator
into either Analog Friendly or Digital Friendly mode based on the EDID that the
generator receives.
3. Turn the Format knob to choose a format. Only formats supported by the display are
listed.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To update the Format knob list automatically when a display is connected:
1. Connect the display you want to test with the DVI or HDMI connector on the generator.
(Analog outputs do not support this feature.)
2. Turn the generator off.
3. Hold down the R and ACS keys while starting the generator, until hot plug formats
displays on the LCD.
Note: The generator is now in Digital Friendly mode.
4. Turn the Format knob to choose a format. Only formats supported by the display are
listed.
5. Connect a different device to automatically update the Format knob list again.
Selecting formats manually
When testing a display that is not EDID-compliant, you must manually choose formats
from the generator that are supported by the display.
To do this:
•
Identifing the type of display (composite television, component standard definition
television, component high definition television, computer equipment, or other specialty
display).
•
•
•
Check the specifications of your display for supported formats.
Learn how the format library is organized, and how formats are named (see below).
Turn the Format knob to try formats from the appropriate format category. Try the
DMT0660 (VGA) format if you are not sure of which formats to use.
Understanding the format library
After connecting the generator with the display under test, turn generator on, and select a
video format.
This section describes how to choose a video format, from the list of formats built into the
generator, for the display you are testing. A format defines a set of video, timing and sync
parameters for a specific device or standard.
A summary of the format naming convention is provided. For a detailed description of the
Organization of format library
The generator has several built-in formats to test a broad range of display types. These
formats are grouped in the following categories:
26
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Composite television formats
Component standard definition television formats
Component high definition television
Computer display formats
Military and medical display formats
Miscellaneous formats
When you turn the Format knob, the formats are listed in the order shown above.
Composite television formats
Composite television formats are named by the standards defining them. The first three to
five characters of the format name indicate the color coding scheme. The first set of
characters refers to the standard. The next characters are optional and indicate
adjustments to the format. Examples of these formats are:
•
•
•
•
•
NTSC (North American TV)
PAL (European TV)
NTSC-J - (where J refers to a Japan standard per NTSC without 7.5 IRE setup)
PAL-N (where N indicates 3.58205625 MHz color sub-carrier)
PAL# (where # indicates that the sampling rate is reduced to achieve square pixels)
Component standard definition television formats
Component SDTV formats are applicable in the case of RGB, YPbPr. These formats are
named by their vertical resolution, scanning method, and frame rate. The initial characters
indicating the resolution are followed by the scanning method. The two characters
following the scanning method indicate the frame rate. A typical example of component
standard or definition TV video format is:
•
480i2x30 (for a vertical resolution of 480 pixels with interlaced scanning and a 30 Hz
frame refresh rate; 2x indicates that the pixels are double-clocked for DVI compatibility).
Component high definition television formats
Component high definition television formats, like the standard definition television
formats, are named by their vertical resolution, scanning method, and frame rate. These
formats are applicable in the case of RGB, YPbPr, and YCbCr. These initial characters
indicating the resolution are followed by the scanning method. The two characters
following the scanning method indicate the frame rate. A typical example of component
high definition TV video format is:
•
1080i30 (for a vertical resolution of 1080 active vertical lines with interlaced scanning
and a 30 Hz frame refresh rate).
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Computer display formats
Computer display formats are assumed to use progressive scanning. Computer format
names consist of four blocks. The initial three characters indicate the vendor ID using the
EISA ID (for example, IBM, SUN, and VSC) or the standard body or acronym (for example,
SMT, DMT, GTF, CEA, and EIA). The next two characters provide the first two digits of the
horizontal resolution in pixels. Following the horizontal resolution are two characters which
indicate the frame rate. The final character indicates the aperture, which is used only if the
aperture is not 1.33 (A). The following are examples of computer display formats:
•
•
VSC1275 for Viewsonic 1280 by 1024 at 75 Hz
DMT0685 for Discrete Monitor Timing with 680 by 480 at 85 Hz
Viewing format parameters
You can use the Format image or VGM to view detailed information about formats in the
generator.
To view formats parameters using VGM:
•
•
Open each format in the Font Editor.
Generate a detailed format listing.
Refer to the VGM online help for instructions.
Selecting images
Once you have determined the format or formats appropriate for testing the display you
will apply a series of images suitable for evaluating the display. Of primary importance is
determining what type of display you are testing (for example, CRT or digital flat panel
display). You must also determine if you are testing composite TV and use images
appropriate for these formats and video types.
Each image in the generator’s library is intended to test one or more attributes of a
particular display type and video type.
28
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The table below provides a summary of display characteristics and the images used to
Display type
Display test
Recommended images
Analog CRT
Geometry (pin and barrel,
linearity)
Static images
Focus
Photometry (chrominance,
contrast, levels)
Flat, Flat07, Flat13, Flat20, Flat27, Flat33,
Flat40, Flat47, Flat53, Flat60, Flat67, Flat73,
Flat_02, Flat_03, Flat_04, Flat_05, Flat_06,
Flat_07, Flat_08, Flat_09, Flat_10, Flat_11,
Luminance
Gamma correction
Resolution
SMPTE133 (checkerbox)
Pulse (CE SDTV)
Centering
Voltage Regulation
Electromagnetic Interfer-
ence
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display type
Display test
Recommended images
Digital flat panel Pixel anomalies (stuck pix-
(fixed pixel dis-
play)
els, misc sampling)
Photometry (chrominance,
contrast, levels)
Flat, Flat07, Flat13, Flat20, Flat27, Flat33,
Flat40, Flat47, Flat53, Flat60, Flat67, Flat73,
Flat_02, Flat_03, Flat_04, Flat_05, Flat_06,
Flat_07, Flat_08, Flat_09, Flat_10, Flat_11,
Luminance
Centering
Resolution
Persistence
30
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing analog computer (IT) CRTs
This section describes how to test analog computer (IT) displays.
To test an analog computer CRT:
1. Use a standard VGA cable to connect the VGA connector on the generator with the
VGA connector on the display under test.
2. Calibrate the generator by holding down the R, G and B keys while starting the
You can also calibrate the generator by entering the following command:
When calibrating the generator, if you load the analog outputs (as they will be loaded
when conducting testing) then the calibrations will be slightly more accurate. This is not
required however. Also, loading the unused outputs with 75 ohms will optimize signal
damping.
will output an analog signal. The Status Display mode enables you to view the current
output characteristics on the LCD.
5. (Optional) To view the EDID on the display, use the Image knob to select the EdidData
image and follow the directions on the display. You may wish to view the EDID data to
verify that the formats required for testing are specified in the EDID.
Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:
6. Determine additional formats to test based on the resolution of the display. The VESA
formats are shown below:
Standard
Quantum Data format name
VGA
DMT06xx
SVGA
XGA
DMT08xx
DMT10xx
DMT12xx
DMT16xx
DMT20xx
DMT25xx
SXGA
UXGA
QXGA
QSXBA
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Determine the images to test:
For analog CRTs you typically want to select images to test for geometry, focusing,
photometry, resolution, cross talk, EMI, and regulation characteristics. For more details on
Verify the test set-up:
1. Using the Format knob, select one of the formats you have identified.
Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:
2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as ColorBar. Verify that the display
is presenting the image to ensure that the generator is sending a valid signal to the
display.
Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:
Test the display:
1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format identified.
Alternatively, use these commands to load the format:
2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.
Alternatively, you can also load an image with the following command:
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to
verify proper operation:
•
When testing geometry with the Hatch images (for example, Hatch20) look for
distortion with concave or convex lines near the periphery of the display. Look for
irregular spacing on the cross hatch patterns.
•
SMPTEbar images. Look for missing bars which may indicate a dead or
unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition between the bars; they should be
sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be uniform in color and intensity across its
entire width.
•
•
When testing focus with the Focus or Text images, the characters in all areas of the
display should be well-formed and in focus.
32
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual
and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions.
When testing for centering use the Outline images. For detailed methods for
outline at the edges of the image. They should stay in place and not pull away from
the area of the large white blinking patch (when it appears).
Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing digital computer (IT) FPDs
This section describes how to test digital computer (IT) displays.
To test a digital FPD:
1. Use a DVI-I cable to connect the DVI output on the generator with the DVI connector on
the display under test.
2. Place the generator in Digital Friendly mode by holding down the G and B keys while
starting the generator.
Alternatively, you can set the Digital Friendly mode by entering the following command:
The Digital Friendly mode ensures that the generator will output a digital signal on the
DVI connector, when selecting analog formats from the format library.
3. Determine the formats to test. Auto-select the formats to test by enabling the
page 25 for instructions.
4. (Optional) To view the EDID on the display, use the Image knob to select the EdidData
image and follow the directions on the display. Verify that the EDID specifies the formats
required for testing.
Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:
5. Determine which images to test. For digital flat panel displays, you typically want to
select images to test for pixel anomalies, persistence, photometry and resolution
Verify the test set-up:
1. Using the Format knob, select one of the formats you have identified.
Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:
2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as SMPTE133. Verify that the
display is presenting the image to ensure that the generator is sending a valid signal to
the display.
Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:
Test the display:
1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format identified.
34
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to
verify proper operation:
•
SMPTEbar images. Look for missing bars which may indicate a dead or
unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition between the bars; they should be
sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be uniform in color and intensity across its
entire width.
•
•
When testing for centering use the Outline images. The detailed methods for
•
•
When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual
and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions.
When testing for pixel anomalies use the Flat, Raster and Ramp images. Use the
Raster and Flat images to look for pixels that may be stuck On or Off, respectively.
The luminance should increase uniformly for the Ramp image. Also, look for
sparkles indicating problems with sampling.
•
Persist), look for bleeding or trails in the wake of the moving object.
Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing analog composite video SDTV (CE) CRTs
This section describes how to test CRT composite televisions with analog composite video
inputs.
To test analog composite video SDTV:
1. Use a standard coax cable to connect the TV BNC connector on the generator with the
display under test.
Or, use an S-video cable to connect the SVIDEO connector on the generator with the
S-Video input on the display under test.
2. (Optional) Place the generator in Analog Friendly mode by holding down the R and B
The Analog Friendly mode ensures that the generator will output an analog signal.
3. Determine which composite television standard you need, such as NTSC or PAL, and
then select the formats compatible with the standard. Typically, you would test all the
formats in the family of formats for a standard.
4. Determine the images to test. For analog CRTs you typically want to select images to
test for geometry, focusing, photometry, resolution, cross talk, EMI, and regulation
characteristics. For more details on what images test these specific display attributes,
Verify the test set-up:
1. Using the Format knob, select the first NTSC or PAL format.
Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:
2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as SMPTEBar. Verify that the
generator is sending a valid signal to the display and that the display is presenting it.
Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:
Test the display:
1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format.
2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.
Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to
verify proper operation:
36
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
When testing geometry with the Hatch images (for example, TVHatch and
Hatch20) look for distortion with concave or convex lines near the periphery of the
display. Look for irregular spacing on the cross hatch patterns.
When testing photometry such as chrominance, use the TVBar100 & TVBar_75
bars which may indicate a dead or unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition
between the bars; they should be sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be
uniform in color and intensity across its entire width.
•
•
When testing focus with the Focus images, the characters in all areas of the display
should be well-formed and in focus.
When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual
and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions. When testing
for resolution with the Burst image, the peak intensities of the all of the bursts
should match the white reference level. The darkest portions between the peaks
should match the black reference level.
•
•
methods for verifying centering with the Outline images (Outline0, Outline1,
outline at the edges of the image. They should stay in place and not pull away from
the area of the large, white blinking patch (when it appears).
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing analog component video SDTV (CE) CRTs
This section describes how to test CRT televisions with standard definition component
video inputs.
To test an analog component video SDTV display:
1. Use a VGA-to-RCA cable to connect the VGA connector on the generator with the
YPbPr inputs on the display under test.
Or, if your generator has optional component BNC connectors, use a BNC to RCA
cable to connect the BNCs on the generator with the RCA connectors on the display
under test.
2. Identify the component television formats to test. These formats are listed after the
composite television formats in the generator’s default Format knob list. Begin with the
first format in the range of standard definition component television formats (480i).
3. Determine additional formats to test based on the resolution of the television display.
The television specification sheet will provide information on what resolutions to test. It
is necessary to test only those resolutions with the supported scanning type (typically,
interlaced for a standard definition television).
4. Determine the images to test. For analog CRTs you typically want to select images to
test for geometry, focusing, photometry, resolution, cross talk, EMI, and regulation
characteristics. For more details on what images test these specific display attributes,
Verify the test set-up:
1. Using the Format knob, select the first component video format (480i).
Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:
2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as SMPTE133. Verify that the
generator is sending a valid signal to the display and that the display is presenting it.
Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:
Test the display:
1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format.
2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.
Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and
38
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to
verify proper operation:
•
When testing geometry with the Hatch images (for example, TVHatch and
Hatch20), look for distortion with concave or convex lines near the periphery of the
display. Look for irregular spacing on the cross hatch patterns.
•
When testing photometry such as chrominence, use the TVBar100 & TVBar_75
bars which may indicate a dead or unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition
between the bars; they should be sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be
uniform in color and intensity across its entire width.
•
•
•
•
When testing focus with the Focus or Text images, the characters in all areas of the
display should be well-formed and in focus.
When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual
and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions.
When testing for centering use the TVOutline and Outline images. The detailed
methods for verifying centering with the Outline images (Outline0, Outline1,
•
outline at the edges of the image. They should stay in place and not pull away from
the area of the large white blinking patch (when it appears).
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing digital component video HDTV (CE) flat panel
displays
This section describes how to test digital component video for HDTV flat panel displays.
To test a digital (DVI) component video HDTV display:
1. Use a standard DVI cable to the DVI connector on the generator and then to the DVI
connector on the television display under test.
Note: If the display under test has a DVI-D connector you will need a DVI-I to DVI-D
adaptor.
2. Place the generator in Digital Friendly mode by holding down the G and B keys while
This mode ensures that the generator outputs a digital signal on the DVI connector,
even when selecting analog formats from the format library.
3. Identify the high definition component television formats to test. These formats are
listed after the composite television formats in the generator’s default Format knob list.
Begin with the first format (720p) in the range of high definition component television
4. Determine additional formats to test based on the resolution of the television display.
The television product specification sheet will provide information on what resolutions
to test. It is necessary to test only those resolutions with the supported scanning type
(typically interlaced for a high definition television).
5. Determing which images to test. For digital television flat panel displays, you would
typically want to select images to test for pixel anomalies, persistence, photometry and
resolution related problems. For more details on which images test these specific
Verify the test set up:
1. Using the Format knob, select the first HDTV video format (720p50).
Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:
2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as the SMPTE133 image. Verify
that the generator is sending a valid signal to the display and that the display is
presenting it.
Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:
40
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test the display:
1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format.
2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.
Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to
verify proper operation:
•
SMPTEbar images. Look for missing bars which may indicate a dead or
unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition between the bars; they should be
sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be uniform in color and intensity across its
entire width.
•
•
When testing for centering, use the Outline images. The detailed methods for
•
•
When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual
and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions.
When testing for pixel anomalies, use the Flat, Raster, and Ramp images. Use the
Raster and Flat images to look for pixels that may be stuck On or Off, respectively.
The luminance should increase uniformly for the Ramp image. Also look for
sparkles indicating problems with sampling.
•
for bleeding or trails in the wake of the moving object.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Administrative Tasks
The chapter describes how to accomplish common administrative tasks. Most
administrative functions are supported through the front panel or command line interface.
However, upgrading firmware can only be achieved through VGM; it is not supported
through the front panel. Most administrative functions are supported through the VGM
application. See the VGM online help for information on performing these administrative
tasks through VGM.
Topics in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying system information
Use the GenStats image to display information about the generator, including revision
levels of FPGA software installed. This image also list installed options.
To display information about generator:
1. Connect the generator with a display.
2. Choose a format supported by the display.
3. Turn the Image knob to select the GenStats image.
44
Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restoring factory settings
This section describes how to set and restore the generator system parameters.
System Parameters
The following system parameters are stored in the 802’s non-volatile system memory:
•
•
•
The reference rate calibration factor. The 802 uses a crystal controlled oscillator as the
reference for all timing signals. The crystal frequency has a maximum error of 50 ppm.
The 802 hardware and firmware is capable of compensating for this small amount of
error by applying a user set calibration factor. The factory default setting is 1.000 for the
The maximum pixel clock rate used for error checking formats. All 802 generators will
operate, to some extent, at pixel rates beyond their spec sheet limits. The maximum
rate can be set to a higher limit if it is known that a particular unit will work reliably at
checking of analog formats.
The gamma correction flag. This flag determines whether individual formats can control
the application of gamma correction or if gamma correction is disabled regardless of a
format’s setting. The factory default setting is to allow gamma correction to be
gamma correction flag.
Setting and restoring system parameters
There are two ways of changing the settings of these parameters:
•
They can be restored to their default factory settings as part of a user initiated system
reset. This will also restore the entire format storage memory to its factory default
contents.
•
A suitably equipped computer or terminal connected to one of the communications
ports can be used to set the parameters to user defined settings.
When the generator is reinitialized, each format in the standard library is tested
(one-at-a-time), to determine if the format parameters are fully supported by the generator.
This algorithm is necessary because the standard format library is used across all
generators. If there are some limitation the generator applies a format justification
algorithm. In these cases the generator stores a modified version of the format under a
similar name. If the format is beyond what can be corrected the format is left out of the
generator’s list of formats.
WARNING: The initializing the generator permanently and irreversibly removes all
user-created formats, custom images, test sequences and directories from memory.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To re-initialize generator through system reset:
1. Hold down ACS and DSS while powering up the generator.
A confirmation message is displayed.
2. Press the Outputs key to continue, or press the Step key to cancel the operation.
To re-initialize and calibrate the generator using command interface:
2. Enter the following command:
The generator then goes through a complete self-test and self-calibration procedure.
To re-initialize without calibrating the generator using the command line:
2. Enter the following command:
The generator is re-intialized.
46
Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibrating the generator
The 802BT/R generator can calibrate itself. Once calibrated, the generator does not
require periodic calibration. There are no physical controls to adjust. All calibration is
electronic. Calibration factors are saved in non-volatile memory.
The calibration accuracy of the generator for analog video voltage swing is specified to be
14mV (or 2% for a nominal 700mV signal). Using a typical oscilloscope such as a
Tektronix VM700T, which might have a swing measurement accuracy of 14mV, we
should expect readings between 674mV to 726mV.
You can also set the analog output calibration factors to values other than those set by the
generator's own self-calibration function. Each channel is calibrated using two
independent zero calibration points, and two independent slope calibration points.
Interpolation equations for the different video types are used to set the caldac values that
controls the output sync and voltage levels to the correct values.
Follow the procedures below to calibrate the generator.
To self-calibrate the generator using the front panel:
1. It is not necessary to load the outputs of a generator during self-calibration. However,
attaching a nominal load may yield a slight increase in accuracy.
2. Simultaneously depress all three R, G and B video gate keys and power cycle the
generator.
The LCD will display a special message indicating that it is about to do a
self-calibration.
3. Release the R, G and B video gate keys and the generator will begin its self-calibration
routine.
You will see calibration factors flash on the display. Observe the display for any error
messages that might occur. If an error message appears, make a note of it and call your
technical support representative for further assistance.
To self-calibrate the generator using the command interface:
2. Enter the following command:
The generator then goes through a complete calibration procedure.
To view analog calibration factors:
1. Enter the following commands to view the analog video Red, Green, Blue calibration
factors:
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALF?
The generator presents the following in response:
1089, 2589, 1993, 3223, 1148, 2633, 2059, 3279, 1000, 2505, 1990,
3219, 793, 787, 3382, 3509
Calibrating frequency
All frequencies associated with the generator are derived from a common frequency
To reduce all frequency errors to zero:
1. Measure any convenient frequency from the generator using a very accurate frequency
counter.
For example, measure the horizontal TTL separate sync frequency with the DMT0660
format loaded and the horizontal rate temporarily set to 100KHz. Enter the following:
2. Measure the TTL horizontal sync frequency with the frequency counter.
3. Divide the frequency that you expect by the frequency that you measure on the
For example, if you measure 99.9955782499875 kHz, when you expect
100.000000000KHz, then divide 100.000000000KHz by 99.9950002499875kHz and
enter the following on the command line:
RATC 1.0000442194553987
This will raise all frequencies output by the generator and make them exact.
48
Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cloning generators
This section describes how to copy configuration settings from one generator to other
generators using a PCMCIA card. The entire block of battery backed user memory
(including video formats, custom test images and test sequences) is copied from one
generator to another using a suitable PCMCIA memory card.
The card you need is a Type 1, Battery Backed RAM PCMCIA card with at least 2 MB of
storage. These cards are available from synchrotech P/N PCM-SRW-AM002 2MB. Flash
or compact type memory cards will not work.
Note: See VGM online help for procedures for cloning generators using VGM.
To clone a generator using PCMCIA card:
1. Install the same firmware version on the source and target generators.
Note: This procedure can only be used when the firmware of the source and target
2. Insert PCMCIA card into the source generator.
3. Hold down the Step and Outputs keys while starting generator.
4. Choose WR (press Outputs key) to copy the generator configuration to the card.
The generator displays a Done message when it is done writing to the card.
5. Transfer the PCMCIA card to the second generator.
6. Hold down the Step and Output keys while starting generator.
7. Choose RD (press Step key) to copy the configuration data from the card to the
generator.
All user-created objects on the target generator will be deleted. To cancel the operation,
press the ACS key.
8. Hold down the ASC, DCS, and DSS keys while starting the generator to return the
generator to normal operating mode.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing firmware
Important: Always backup any custom objects (formats, images) stored on the generator
before installing an upgrade. The firmware installation re-initializes the generator, which
deletes any custom objects. After installing the firmware, you can restore custom objects.
Firmware upgrades require the use of VGM. Please refer to the VGM online help for
procedures on upgrading the generator.
50
Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory management
The generator includes commands to manage its internal memory resources. These
commands or useful if the generator exhibits degraded performance or other anomolies.
To verify and correct memory related anomolies:
1. Check the generator’s memory for corruption by running a memory self test:
MEMT // runs the memory self test
1
// returned value from the memory self test
A value of “0” indicates no memory corruption or inconsistency was found. A value of
“1” indicates that there is a memory anomoly.
2. If the memory self test reveals a memory corruption, re-initialize the generator:
BOIT // re-initializes the generator
3. If the memory self test does not reveal a memory corruption, check to see if there is
enough free memory and contiguous memory:
MEMF? // queries for the free memory
808320 // returns the amount of free memory
MEML? // queries for the largest contiguous block of free memory
816568 // returns the largest contiguous block of free memory
If the amount of memory is low or the amount of contiguous memory is low the memory
should be compacted.
4. Compact the generators memory:
// compacts the memory
MEML? // queries for the largest contiguous block of free memory
818280 // should show larger block of contiguous free memory
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
The generators enable you to create your own formats and edit the Format knob list
through the Video Generator Manager (VGM) application and the command line interface.
Please refer to the VGM online help for details on procedures for these functions
performed through VGM. This chapter provides procedures for customizing formats
through the command line interface.
The following functions are provided:
•
Creating formats. If the application environment requires constant switching between
video outputs, for example, you can build your own library of customized formats that
individually select which video output is driven via the proper setting of AVST and DVST
parameters.
•
•
Editing the Format knob list. You can edit the Format knob list to include any
combination of built-in and user-defined formats. The default operating mode of the 802
uses the Format knob to select formats from a list of built in formats.
Creating aliases. You can assign your own names to formats using aliases.
54
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format library
The generator has a built-in library of formats. The same format library is used for all 802
models. The formats are stored in read-only memory (ROM) along with the generator’s
operating code.
Compatibility
Some formats are for displays and graphics systems that may not be compatible with a
specific generator model. Attempting to load an incompatible format will give you an error
message. If a format has too high of a pixel rate, a modified version of the format can be
created with reduced horizontal timing parameters that bring the pixel clock rate below the
limit of the generator. The horizontal and vertical rates however are correct. This lets you
light-up a display and verify most of its operation. These modified formats can be created
the bandwidth of the generator.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format naming conventions
The names used in the built-in format library have been updated for the generator. Many
format names on previous versions of the 802 generators have been renamed to more
closely match the naming conventions used in the display industry or in the appropriate
standards. There are three sets of naming conventions described in this section: 1)
Composite television formats, 2) Component television formats, and 3) Computer display
formats. In addition, several miscellaneous naming conventions are also described.
Composite television format names
Composite television formats apply to RF, D2, CVBS, and S-VIDEO signal interfaces.
Composite television format names consist of a three to five character color coding
scheme indicator followed by optional characters that indicate format adjustments.
Example
Color coding schemes
•
•
•
NTSC
PAL
SECAM
Adjustments to the format
•
•
•
•
•
•
4x == sampling rate is four times the color sub-carrier frequency
44 == NTSC with color sub-carrier frequency of 4.43361875 MHz (as opposed to 3.58)
# == sampling rate is reduced in order to make pixels square
jp == NTSC-Japan (NTSC without 7.5 IRE setup)
-M == PAL with 3.57561149 MHz color sub-carrier and M timing (M/PAL Brazil)
-N == PAL with 3.58205625 MHz color sub-carrier (N/PAL Argentina, Paraguay,
Uruguay)
•
•
•
•
-N == NTSC color encoding with N timing (NTSC-N)
-60 == PAL format that allows NTSC tape playback on PAL TV (PAL-60)
plusKKKK == Enhanced wide-screen PALplus TV transmission system
p == progressive video game signal (for example, NTSCp or PALp)
56
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common composite TV formats with sub-carriers and their respective standards:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NTSC - ITU-R BT.470-6
NTSC# - SMPTE 170M
NTSC#KA - SMPTE 170M
PAL - ITU-R BT.470-6
PAL# - ITU-R BT.470-6
PAL#KA - ITU-R BT.470-6
SECAM
Component television format names
Component television formats are named by their vertical resolution and scanning
method. These formats apply to RGB, YPbPr, YcbCr and HD-SDI video. In component
television format naming, the first three or four characters indicate the active vertical lines
in the format, the next characters indicate the frame tracing method, and the last two
optional characters indicate the frame rate.
Example:
4 80 i 2x 2 9
Active
vertical
lines
Frame Double
tracing clocking
method
Frame
rate
Active vertical lines
•
•
480 (active lines with 525 total lines)
1035 (active lines with 1125 total lines)
Frame tracing methods
•
•
•
p = progressive
i = interlaced
s = segmented frame interlace (e.g. 1080s24, where a 24p frame is segmented into two
interlaced fields occurring at twice the frame rate - scene changes only between field
pairs – also known as “48sF”)
•
x = any – progressive, interlace, or segmented
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Double clocking
•
i2x = double-clocked interlace (scene may change between fields) pixels are
double-clocked for DVI compatibility)
Frame rate
Frame rate is optional. If no frame rate is given, then the frame rates are assumed.
•
•
24 = 24 Hz
60 = 60 Hz
Common component TV formats
•
•
480pLH Component SDTV signal containing letterboxed 16x9 high-definition content
480pSH Component SDTV signal containing anamorphically under-sampled 16x9
content
Computer display format names
Computer display formats are assumed to use progressive scanning. In computer format
naming, the first three characters indicate the vendor ID using the EISA ID (for example,
IBM, SUN, VSC) or the display type, the next two characters indicate the approximate
horizontal resolution, the next two digits indicate the frame rate (which will be half the field
rate with interlace scanning), and the final character designates the aperture (used only
when the aperture is not A).
Example
Vendor ID (EISA)
•
•
•
•
•
SMT for VESA (digital) Safe Mode Timing
DMT for VESA Standard Discrete Monitor Timing
GTF for VESA Generalized Timing Format standard
CEA for Consumer Electronics Association
EIA for Electronics Industries Association (CEA)
Approximate horizontal resolution examples
•
•
02 for 256 pixels
09 for 960 pixels
58
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
12 for 1200 pixels
30 for 3072 pixels
Frame rate examples (half the field rate with interlace scanning)
•
•
•
48 for 48Hz
60 for 60Hz
75 for 75Hz
Aperture (used only when the aperture is not A)
Common computer display formats
•
•
VSC1275 for Viewsonic 1280 by 1024 at 75 Hz
DMT0685 for Discrete Monitor Timing with 680 by 480 at 85 Hz
Aperture designators
Format names may include one or two characters that describe the aperture of the display.
These are listed below.
Aspect ratio
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Q = 1.00:1 Quadrate - MIL, Radiology (square, 512x512, 1024x1024)
G = 1.25:1 Graphics workstation (5x4, 1280x1024, 1600x1280)
A = 1.33:1 Academy (4x3, 640x480, 800x600, 1024x768, 1280x960, 1600x1200)
B = 1.44:1 Big (13x9, IMAX™)
T = 1.50:1 Three halves (3x2, 1152x768 Apple Computer)
V = 1.56:1 PALplus WWS case #2 (14x9, see ITU-R BT.1119)
D = 1.60:1 VESA CVT proposed (16x10, 1728x1080, 1280x800)
E = 1.67:1 European film (15x9 or 5x3, 1200x720, 1280x768, 1800x1080, a.k.a. “1.66”)
H = 1.78:1 High-definition image (16x9, 1280x720,1920x1080)
F = 1.85:1 US film (320x173, 1280x692, 1920x1038)
U = 2.00:1 Univisum™ (2x1, 1280x640, 1920x960)
C = 2.39:1 CinemaScope™ (160x67, 1280x536, 1920x804, a.k.a. “2.35”, was 2.35
before 1971)
Content fitting operators
N = Natural (do nothing)
•
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
L = Letterbox (linear scale to fit one axis, center w/black bars in other)
Z = Zoom (blow- up to fill destination aperture with cropping, or LI )
S = Scope (under-sample content horizontally)
W = Widescreen (over-sample content horizontally)
J = Justify (non- linear horizontal expand – more near edges)
K = Keep safe (shrink to avoid cropping – provide safe title)
P = Pan & Scan (truncate)
M = Mirror (horizontally – rear projection)
Other Modifiers
•
•
•
I = Inverse (undo operator; for example, S = Scope and SI = Inverse Scope)
O = Orthogonally (rotate operator effect or aperture 90 degrees)
X = Wildcard or special
Using legacy format names
You can configure the generator to display names using conventions from older generator
models.
Important: Configuring the generator to use legacy names will delete all user-defined
video formats currently stored in the generator. Therefore, it is important to back up the user
data files from the generator to disk and then restore them back to the generator. VGM can
be used to backup the generator.
To display legacy format names:
1. Turn the generator off.
2. Hold down the G key, and then power on the generator.
The following message appears on the front panel LCD.
3. Release the G key. This setting is retained throughout subsequent power cycles.
To re-assert the default format names you must reinitialize the generator:
1. Turn the generator off.
2. Hold down the ACS and DSS keys and then power on the generator.
60
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing the format library
You can view the list of formats available in the generator using VGM or the command line
interface. Please refer to the VGM online help for instructions on using VGM to view the
format list.
To display the format list:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Load the default format directory (fmt) or custom format directory by entering the
following command:
DIRL fmt
3. List the contents of the format directory by entering the following command:
NAMQ? 1 200 // lists the formats from the first format through 200
Viewing format details
You can view the format parameters of any standard or custom format using VGM or the
command line interface. Please refer to the VGM online help for instructions on using VGM
to view format details. Use the following procedure to view the detailed format information
through the command line interface.
To view formats parameters using the Format image:
1. Connect the generator with a display.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Load the Format image.
Information about the current format is displays.
3. Press the Step key, then turn Image knob to view additional formats.
To display individual format parameters:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Load the format whose parameters you want to view by entering the following
command:
3. Enter the format parameter(s) you want to view. For example, to view the horizontal
resolution, vertical resolution, horizontal period, and analog video sync type, enter the
following command:
The generator responds with the information in sequence as shown below:
640;480;800;2
62
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating custom formats
You can create new signal formats for the generator and add them to non-volatile memory.
You can create formats through VGM or by using a command line interface (either the
RS-232 port or the IEEE-488 port). The recommended procedure for creating new formats
is to use VGM. VGM contains the algorithms for ensuring compatibility between format
parameters where there are dependencies in their respective values. Please refer to the
VGM online help for information about creating formats using VGM.
Determining the signal specifications of the display
Your custom format will be based on the specifications of the display under test. Typically,
you can find the information required for the format in the detailed specification sheet for
the display. At a basic level, you must determine if you are working with an analog or a
digital display. An analog display can show an endless range of colors or shades of gray.
Analog displays normally accept video signal levels in the 1 Vp-p range. Digital displays
are more limited and can display only a few gray levels or a limited number of pre-defined
colors. These displays normally accept TTL video signals in the 4 Vp-p range.
Creating custom formats using the command line interface
There are two methods for creating formats through the command line interface. The first
method is to use the FMTN command to set all format parameters in the format buffer to
their default values, and then modify each value. The second method is to select an
existing format to use as a template for the new format, and then modify only the values
needed to create the new format. When using this method, you can save the new format
under a new name or the existing name.
Independent of the method you choose, you can enter each command interactively or,
using your computer, create a text file containing all the commands you want to issue, and
then download the text file to the generator. For instructions on creating and downloading
Creating a new format
The FMTN command is used in creating a new format. This command sets all of the
format parameters to known, default values. For a list of the parameters and their default
using interactive commands.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To create a new format:
2. Enter the following commands to initialize all parameters to default values and begin a
format editing session:
// initializes all parameters to default values
// begins a format editing session
3. Enter the format parameter commands in sequence to set the values for the new
format.
HRES 654
.
.
// sets the horizontal resolution to 654 pixels
// other format parameters
.
HTOT 720
// sets the horizontal total to 720 pixels
Note: You do not need to enter a parameter value if it matches the FMTN default
setting.
4. End the editing session and save the new format using the following commands:
// ends a format editing session
FMTA new_fmt_name
// saves format as new specified name
5. Assign the format to the knob list using the following commands:
DIRL FMT
// loads format directory into edit buffer
// begins a directory edit session
// ends a directory editing session
// saves contents of directory as current name
Creating a format based on an existing format
Use the following procedure to create a format based on an existing format using
interactive commands.
To create a custom format based on an existing format:
1. Determine the signal specifications of the display under test and select an existing
format in the generator’s format library whose parameter values are similar.
2. Connect the display to the generator.
3. Using the Format knob, select the format you want to use as a template for the new
format.
4. Using the Image knob, select the Format image to view the parameters of the selected
format.
5. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
64
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Enter the following commands to load and begin editing the existing format.
FMTL format_name
// loads existing format into the format editor
// begins a format editing session
7. Enter the format parameter commands in sequence where the new values differ from
the existing format values. For example to modify the horizontal resolution enter the
following command:
HRES 654
Note: You do not need to enter parameter values if they match the existing format.
8. End the editing session and save the new format using the following commands:
// ends a format editing session
FMTA new_fmt_name
// saves format as new specified name
9. Assign the format to the knob list using the following commands:
DIRL FMT
// loads format directory into edit buffer
// begins a directory edit session
// ends a directory editing session
// saves contents of directory as current name
Modifying existing formats
The following procedure demonstrates how to modify the parameters of an existing format
using the command interface. This example changes an existing digital format from RGB
4:4:4 to YCbCr 4:2:2, and saves the format into the default format directory.
To edit an existing format:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Set the generator to digital friendly mode:
SROP 2 (or SROP 2 4)
SROP 8
// sets generator to digital friendly mode
// sets generator to status display mode
3. Load and begin editing the format:
FMTL existing_format
// loads existing format into format editor
// begins a format editing session
4. Enter the format parameter commands in sequence where the values differ from the
default values. For example to modify the component video type enter the following
command:
DVST 14
DVSM 2
// changes the component color to YCbCr
// changes component color make up to 4:2:2
// loads hardware and outputs new signal
5. End the editing session and save the format using the following commands:
// ends the format editing session
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTA new_fmt_name
// saves format as new specified name
6. Assign the format to the knob list using these commands:
DIRL FMT
// loads format directory into edit buffer
// begins a directory edit session
// ends a directory editing session
// saves contents of directory as current name
7. Load the new format using these commands:
FMTL new_fmt_name
// loads new format in edit buffer
// applies new format to the generator
66
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Format knob lists
Stepping through all of the available formats using the Format knob can be time
consuming. This is particularly true if you regularly use only a few formats that may be
scattered throughout the list. You can set up the 802 to show only the formats you want, in
the order you want, when you turn the Format knob. The 802 maintains a list of these
formats in non-volatile memory, and you can edit the list to include formats you have
created and to remove any unneeded formats. You can edit the Format knob list using the
internal editor or the command line interface; however, the most convenient way to edit the
list and create custom knob lists is through VGM. Please refer to the VGM online help for
instructions on creating and editing format knob lists.
The default Format knob list is named fmt. In addition to editing this list, you can also
create new lists and name them to reflect their uses at your site.
Editing format knob list using internal editor
Use the following procedures to edit the format knob list using the internal format editor.
To edit the format knob list:
1. Power-up the generator while holding down the Image key until programmer is
displayed.
2. Select the FmtList image.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the Step key to start the Format List editor.
The left side of the screen shows the current contents of the format list. The formats
appear in the order that they are selected by the Format knob during normal operation.
The right side of the screen shows the available formats.
4. Use the Format and Image knobs to select formats in the lists. Use these commands
to edit the format list.
Key
Function
Insert (DCS)
Inserts the format selected from the list of available files at the cursor
position in the format list.
Delete (B)
Move (R)
Remove the selected format from the format list.
Moves the selected format in the format list to another position in the list.
To move the selected format, press Move, use the Format knob to spec-
ify the target position, and then press the Move key again.
Remove (DSS)
Deletes the format selected in the list of available formats. This will
erase the entire contents of the file from non-volatile memory. Since this
operation can destroy a lot of programming work, an on-screen mes-
sage will ask you to confirm the removal of the file. Pressing the Yes or
OK key will erase the file. Pressing the No or Cancel key will abort the
removal operation.
5. Press the Exit (Step) key to save the edited list and exit the editor.
68
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing format knob list using command line interface
Use the following procedures to edit the format knob list and create new knob lists through
the command line interface.
To insert a format at a specific location in a format knob list:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
63.)
3. Enter the following commands:
DIRL fmt
// loads default format list (fmt)
// begins a directory editing session
// inserts format named MyFormat at position 257
// ends the directory editing session
// saves contents of directory as current name
NAMI 257 MyFormat
To remove a format from a specific location in the format knob list:
DIRL fmt
NAMK MyFormat
// loads default format list (fmt)
// begins a directory editing session
// deletes format named MyFormat
// ends the directory editing session
// saves contents of directory as current name
To create a new format knob list, enter the following commands:
DIRL fmt
NAMK format_1
// loads default format list (fmt)
// begins a directory editing session
// deletes format_1
.
.
// deletes other formats
.
NAMK format_x
// deletes format_x
.
.
.
// insert other formats
DIRA new_fmt
// ends the directory editing session
// saves new format list as new_fmt
To apply a new format knob list:
FMTP new_fmt
// loads format list new_fmt
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring DCS priority scheme
There are two priority schemes for putting composite sync (CS) on the separate VS and
HS sync outputs when digital composite sync (DCS) is selected through types SSST = 2,
6, or 11. This applies to both the VS and HS pins of the VGA connector and to the analog
component BNC connectors.
•
•
Legacy DSC priority scheme
Default DSC priority scheme
The following table describes the legacy DCS priority scheme for horizontal sync.
OUTG
SSST
HSPG
VSPG
HS Output
HS Polarity
0
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
No signal
Do not care
1
Do not care
0
Do not care
Do not care
No signal
No signal
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
8 (DPMS –
OFF)
Do not care
1
1
1
1
9 (DPMS –
SUSPEND)
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
Horizontal
Sync
HSPP
10 (DPMS –
STANDBY)
Do not care
No signal
Do not care
HSPP
1, 3, 5, 7, or 11
1
1
Horizontal
Sync
2, 6, or 11
(DCS)
Composite
Sync
HSPP
The following table describes the legacy DCS priority scheme for vertical sync.
OUTG
SSST
HSPG
VSPG
VS Output
VS Polarity
0
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
No signal
Do not care
1
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
0
No signal
No signal
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
8 (DPMS –
OFF)
Do not care
1
1
9 (DPMS –
SUSPEND)
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
No signal
Do not care
VSPP
10 (DPMS –
STANDBY)
Vertical Sync
1
1
1, 3, 5, 7, or 11 Do not care
1
Vertical Sync
No signal
VSPP
2, 6, or 11
(DCS)
1
Do not care
Do not care
1
2, 6, or 11
(DCS)
0
1
Composite
Sync
VSPP
70
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following table describe the default DCS priority scheme for horizontal sync.
OUTG
SSST
HSPG
HS Output
HS Polarity
0
Do not care
Do not care
No signal
Do not care
1
Do not care
0
No signal
Do not care
Do not care
HSPP
Do not care
1
8 (DPMS – OFF) Do not care
No signal
9 (DPMS – SUS- Do not care
PEND)
Horizontal Sync
1
10 (DPMS –
STANDBY)
Do not care
No signal
Do not care
1
1
1, 3, 5, 7, or 11
1
1
Horizontal Sync
Composite Sync
HSPP
CSPP
2, 6, or 11 (DCS)
The following table describe the default DCS priority scheme for vertical sync.
OUTG
SSST
VSPG
VS Output
VS Polarity
0
Do not care
Do not care
No signal
Do not care
1
Do not care
0
No signal
No signal
No signal
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
Do not care
1
8 (DPMS – OFF) Do not care
9 (DPMS – SUS- Do not care
PEND)
1
10 (DPMS –
STANDBY)
Do not care
vertical Sync
VSPP
1
1
1, 3, 5, 7, or 11
1
1
vertical Sync
VSPP
CSPP
2, 6, or 11 (DCS)
Composite Sync
To enable the legacy DCS priority scheme:
1. Turn off the generator.
2. Hold down the Step and DCS keys while starting the generator.
The generator will remain in this mode through subsequent power cycles until the
generator is re-initialized or reset with the “No special modes” command (hold down
ACS+DCS+DSS while starting the generator).
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating format aliases
You can create aliases for formats to suit the needs of your site. Use the following
procedure to create an alias for a format, save it to the format directory, and then use the
alias.
To create and use a format alias:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Enter the following commands:
ALIN your_alias format
// assigns alias to format
DIRL FMT
NAMI 1 “your_alias”
// loads default format list (fmt)
// begins a format editing session
// assigns alias to format directory
// ends a format editing session
// saves alias in default format directory
DIRA FMT
To delete a format alias, enter the following command:
72
Chapter 4 Working with Formats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
The 802R/BT includes a library of 250 test images. In addition, you can create custom
images, which consist of one or more drawing primitives, including single pixel dots, lines,
rectangles, and ovals. You can select the grayscale and color tables used in the image and
save the images in non-volatile memory. Custom images can be added to the list of built-in
images that can be selected with the Image knob. You can create and edit test images and
edit the Image knob list using the Video Generator Manager (VGM) application or the
command line interface. Please refer to the VGM online help for details on creating custom
images using VGM.
The following functions are provided:
•
Creating images. You can create your own custom images and add them to the image
library.
•
Downloading bitmap images. You can also create your own images in other
applications and save them as bitmap files which can then be downloaded using a
terminal emulator or from a PCMCIA card.
•
•
•
Editing the Image knob list. You can edit the Image knob list to include any
combination of built-in and custom images. The default operating mode of the 802 uses
the Image knob to select images from an internal list of built-in images.
Setting up a looping image display. You can set up a continuous cycling mode that
draws images one-after-another in an infinite loop. Image looping can be used for
burn-in testing or for running single-mode displays at trade shows.
Creating aliases. You can assign your own names to images using aliases.
Viewing the image list
You can view the list of images available in the generator using VGM or the command line
interface. Please refer to the VGM online help for details on viewing the image list using
VGM. Use the following procedure to view the image list using the command line interface.
To display the image list:
2. Load the default image directory (img) or custom image directory by entering the
following command:
DIRL IMG
3. List the contents of the image directory by entering the following command:
NAMQ? 1 200
// lists the images from the first through 200
74
Chapter 5 Working with Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating custom images
This section describes how to create images and add them to the generator’s image
library, and how to customize the image list. The recommended method for creating
images is create a text file containing the commands for creating the image, and then
downloading the text file to the generator. Another method for creating images is to use
the Image Editor in VGM to create a basic image, save the basic image as a command file
in VGM, and then open and edit the command file to refine the image as needed.
To create custom images with a command file:
1. Using a text editor, open a text file (command file) on your computer and enter the
following commands.
OUTG 0
IMGN new_image
// gates all video and sync outputs off
// creates a new image
XRES 640
YRES 480
// begin an image editing session
// sets the horizontal resolution
// sets the vertical resolution
.
.
// other image parameters
.
// ends an image editing session
// saves image as new_image
// gates all video and sync outputs on
// draws the image
IMGA new_image
OUTG 1
// applies the buffer to the generator hardware
2. Save the text file, using a *.txt extension.
4. At the R:> prompt, transfer the text file to the generator. For example, to transfer a file
using HyperTerminal, do the following:
a. On the Transfer menu, click Send Text File. The Send Text File dialog box
appears.
b. Select the text file you want to send, and then click Open. HyperTerminal displays
the commands as they are sent.
c. Press Enter once to ensure that the last command is sent.
5. Assign the image to Image knob list by entering the following commands:
DIRL IMG
// loads image directory into edit buffer
// begins a directory editing session
// ends a directory editing session
// saves contents of directory as current name
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command file example
The following sample command file creates the image shown in the graphic below.
Commands used to draw image above:
IMGN
IMGB
XRES 640
YRES 480
// begin an editing session
// set the horizontal resolution
// set the vertical resolution
HATO Foreground 24 18
OVAL Foreground 479 479 80 0 GrayPat0
CROS White
RECT White 205 154 770 77 GrayPat50
RECT Black 128 96 30 45 GrayPat100
RECT Black 128 96 482 45 GrayPat100
RECT Black 128 96 30 345 GrayPat100
RECT Black 128 96 482 345 GrayPat100
RECT Red 30 96 184 347 GrayPat100
RECT Blue 30 96 243 347 GrayPat100
RECT Yellow 30 96 273 347 GrayPat100
RECT Cyan 30 96 303 347 GrayPat100
RECT Magenta 30 96 333 347 GrayPat100
RECT Blue 30 96 363 347 GrayPat100
FORM White 271 78
RECT Green 30 96 213 347 GrayPat100
RECT Green 30 96 393 347 GrayPat100
RECT Red 30 96 423 347 GrayPat100
RECT White 128 96 30 45 GrayPat7
RECT White 128 96 482 45 GrayPat7
RECT White 128 96 30 345 GrayPat7
RECT White 128 96 482 345 GrayPat7
76
Chapter 5 Working with Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGE
IMGA MyImage
// end an editing session
// save image as MyImage
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downloading bitmap images from a PCMCIA card
This section describes how to store a bitmap image on a standard PCMCIA memory card,
and then load the image as you would a built-in image. The generator can load only one
image from a card. Although you can download an image using VGM, loading an image
from a card is faster and easier.
This feature is supported on 802BT and 802R generators with video board FPGA 91 or
later, DVI daughter card FPGA 0xE3 or later, and firmware 7.3834000 or later (802BT) or
To copy an image onto a card:
1. Save the image you want to store on the card as an 8-bit or 32-bit (24-bit TrueColor)
bitmap (.bmp) file on your computer using any file name.
2. Hold down the ACS, DCS, and DSS keys, and then cycle the power to the generator.
This removes any special modes and sets the baud rate of the serial port to 2400 bps.
3. Establish a terminal session with the generator and change the baud rate of the
4. Insert a PCMCIA card into the slot in the generator.
5. At the R:> prompt, enter the following command to initiate the YMODEM-BATCH
file-upload protocol:
6. At the R:> prompt, transfer the file to the card. For example, to transfer a file using
HyperTerminal, do the following:
a. On the Transfer menu, click Send File. The Send File dialog box appears.
b. In the Filename box, click Browse and select the bitmap file you want to copy to
the generator.
c. In the Protocol box, click the down arrow and select Ymodem.
d. Click Send.
Note: You must send the image within about 15 seconds after sending the YMDI
command. If the R:> command prompt appears before you send the image, send the
YDMI command again, and then send the image again.
To view an image stored on a PCMCIA card:
1. Insert the card that contains the image you want to view.
78
Chapter 5 Working with Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: The card you need is a Type 1, Battery Backed RAM PCMCIA card with at least
2 MB of storage. These cards are available from synchrotech P/N PCM-SRW-AM002
2MB. Flash or compact type memory cards will not work.
2. Use one of the following procedures to configure the generator to use a format with the
same pixel depth as the image:
•
•
•
Select a built-in format with the appropriate pixel depth.
Create a format with the appropriate pixel depth.
Establish a terminal session with the generator and enter the following commands
to set the pixel depth to 32-bit (24-bit TrueColor) or 8-bit:
or
•
Hold down the R key while pressing and releasing the G key to toggle the pixel
depth between 8 and 32-bit pixel depths.
3. Using the Image knob, select the CardBMP image, or enter this command:
The image appears on the display.
4. To view an image from a different card, switch the cards, and then re-select the
CardBMP image.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Looping through images
You can set up a continuous cycling mode that draws all images in the image knob
listone-after-another in an infinite loop. When activated, the message “Loop Enabled”
appears on the display under test.
To enable image looping:
1. Using the Format knob, select a format compatible with the display under test.
2. Turn the Image knob clockwise beyond the last image in the Image list about one turn.
The message “Loop Enabled” appears on the display under test. After a second or two,
the first image in the cycle appears and the generator continuously cycles through the
test image list using a given format in this mode.
To disable image looping:
1. Turn the Image knob counter-clockwise to stop image looping.
80
Chapter 5 Working with Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Image knob list
If your test environment requires only a subset of the available built-in images, you can
configure the 802 to show only the images you want, in the order you want, when the
Image knob is turned. The 802 maintains a list of these images in non-volatile memory.
You can edit this list to include images you have created and to remove unneeded images.
The Image knob list can be edited using the command line interface; however, the most
convenient way to edit the knob list and create custom knob lists is using VGM. Please
refer to the VGM online help for procedures on editing image knob lists.
The default Image knob list is named img. In addition to editing this list, you can also
create new lists and name them to reflect their uses at your site.
Editing image knob list using internal editor
Use the following procedures to edit the image knob list using the internal image editor.
To edit list of images:
1. Power-up the generator while holding down the Image key until programmer is
displayed.
2. Select the ImgList image.
3. Press the Step key to start the image list editor.
The left side of the screen shows the current contents of the image list. The images are
listed in the order that they are selected by the Image knob during normal operation.
The right side of the screen shows all of the available images. The built-in images are
at the top of the list, followed by a factory default custom image. This image is used as
starting point to creating you own custom images. Any user-defined images in
non-volatile memory are at the bottom of the list.
4. Use the Format and Image knobs to select images in the lists. Use these commands
to edit the image list.
Key
Function
Insert (DCS)
Inserts the image selected in the list of available files before the image
selected in the image list.
The current firmware does not allow entering a secondary version of a
built-in image to the list. The primary version will need to be first
selected during normal operation. Pressing the Image key will then
select the secondary version.
Delete (B)
Remove the selected image from the image list.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key
Function
Move (R)
Moves the image selected in the image list to another position in the list.
To move the selected image, press Move, use the Format knob to spec-
ify the new position, and then press the Move key again.
Remove (DSS)
Deletes the selected user-defined image from the list of available files.
This will erase the entire contents of the file from non-volatile memory.
Standard images cannot be deleted.
5. Press the Exit (Step) key to save the list and exit the editor.
Editing Image knob list using command line interface
Use the following procedures to edit the Image knob list and create new knob lists through
the command line interface.
To insert an image at a specific location in the default image knob list:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
3. Enter the following commands:
DIRL img
// loads default image list called img
// begins a directory editing session
// ends the directory editing session
// saves the contents of directory as current name
To remove an image from a specific location in the image knob list:
DIRL img
NAMK MyImage
// loads default image list called img
// begins a directory editing session
// deletes image named MyImage
// ends the directory editing session
// saves the contents of directory as current name
To create a new image knob list:
DIRL img
// loads default image list called img
// begins a directory editing session
NAMK image_1
// deletes image named image_1
.
.
// deletes other images
.
NAMK image_x
// deletes image_x
.
.
.
// inserts other images
82
Chapter 5 Working with Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating image aliases
You can create image aliases to suit the needs of your site. Use the following procedure to
create an alias for an image, save it to the image directory, and then use the image.
To create and use an image alias:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Enter the following commands:
ALIN your_alias image
DIRL IMG
NAMI 1 “your_alias”
DIRA IMG
// assigns alias to image
// loads default image list (img)
// begins an image editing session
// assigns alias to image directory
// ends an image editing session
// saves alias in default image directory
To delete an image alias:
Enter the following command:
ALIK your_alias
// removes the alias
84
Chapter 5 Working with Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
When testing video displays, you typically select a format using the Format knob, and then
select an image using the Image knob. In a production environment, where there might be
a need to test several combinations of formats and images, you can create a test
sequence to automate the process of selecting formats and images. Test sequences
provide a way to progress through a pre-defined sequence of format and images, either
manually or automatically.
You can create test sequences using the command line interface, the internal sequence
editor or the Video Generator Manager (VGM) application. This section describes how to
create and run test sequences using the command line interface and internal sequence
editor. Please refer to the VGM online help for instructions on defining and running a test
sequence from VGM.
The following functions are provided:
•
•
Create your own custom test sequences consisting of multiple steps. Each step
specifies the format and image to display as well as the duration of the step. You can
create multiple sequence files, which are stored in non-volatile memory.
Program the 802R/BT generator to run in test-sequence mode on power-up. This mode
of operation is useful in a manufacturing test environment where the same test
procedure must be repeated on many identical displays. Multiple test sequences can
be stored in the generator and selected by the operator.
86
Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a test sequence
You can create a test sequence using the command line interface, the generator’s built-in
editor or VGM.
Creating a test sequence using command line
You can develop test sequences either by entering command interactively through a
terminal session or by entering a series of commands in a text file and then send them to
the generator through hyper terminal. When developing long test sequences, the
recommended procedure is to enter commands in a text file, and then send the file to the
generator. This approach enables you to change the test sequence without entering the
entire command script.
Use the following procedure to create a test sequence, save it to the sequence directory,
and then run it using the command line interface.
To create and save a test sequence interactively using the command line interface:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Enter the following commands to create a three-step sequence named MySeq.
// initializes the sequence edit buffer
// begins a sequence editing session
STEP 1
SDLY 5.0
// selects a step to be edited
// sets the delay for the current step to five seconds
IMGL SMPTEbar // loads an image
STEP 2
SDLY 5.0
// selects a step to be edited
// sets the delay for the current step to five seconds
IMGL Outline1 // loads an image
STEP 3
// selects a step to be edited
SDLY 5.0
// sets the delay for the current step to five seconds
SEQA MySeq
// ends the sequence editing session
// saves the current contents of the sequence editor
To create and save a test sequence from a text file:
1. Using a text editor, open a text file (command file) on your computer and enter the
following commands to create a three-step sequence named MySeq.:
// initializes the sequence edit buffer
// begins a sequence editing session
STEP 1
SDLY 5.0
// selects a step to be edited
// sets the delay for the current step to five seconds
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGL SMPTEbar // loads an image
STEP 2
SDLY 5.0
// selects a step to be edited
// sets the delay for the current step to five seconds
IMGL Outline1 // loads an image
STEP 3
// selects a step to be edited
SDLY 5.0
// sets the delay for the current step to five seconds
SEQA MySeq
// ends the sequence editing session
// saves the current contents of the sequence editor
2. Save the text file, using a *.txt extension.
3. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
4. Transfer the text file to the generator. For example, to transfer the file using
HyperTerminal, do the following:
a. On the Transfer menu, click Send Text File. The Send Text File dialog box
appears.
b. Select the text file you want to send, and then click Open. HyperTerminal displays
the commands as they are sent.
c. Press Enter once to ensure that the last command is sent.
To insert a sequence at a specific location in the sequence list:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Enter the following commands:
DIRL seq
// loads sequence directory into edit buffer
// begins a directory editing session
NAMI 1 MySeq
// assigns sequence to sequence list at 1
// ends the directory editing session
// saves contents of directory as current name
Creating and editing test sequences using the internal editor
You can use the generator’s internal Sequence Editor to create, edit and run test
sequences without using VGM. The 802 can be configured to allow an operator to run only
certain sequence files in the sequence mode. The 802 maintains a list of these accessible
sequences in non-volatile memory. You will need to edit the list if you wish to add
sequences you have created. The procedures for creating and editing the sequence file
list are provided below.
To create a test sequence using the internal sequence editor:
1. Turn on the generator while pressing the Image key until programmer is displayed.
2. Select the SeqList image.
88
Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the Image key to start the Sequence List editor.
4. Use the Image knob to select a sequence file from the list of available files. NewSeq is
provided by default to serve as a template.
5. Press the Insert key (DCS) to insert the NewSeq file into the sequence list.
6. Use the Format knob to select the NewSeq file, and then press the Modify key.
7. Use the Format knob to select the field you want to edit. Use the Image knob to select
field values.
Press Change (Outputs) to apply the selected value.
Press Insert (ACS) to insert a new step.
Press Clear (G) to delete all steps.
Press Delete (B) to delete the selected step.
To move the selected step, press Move (R), then use the Format knob to select the
target position, and then press Move again.
8. Press Mode (DSS) to specify how the generator should run the sequence file when the
generator is started. If you have multiple sequence files, the file with the most recent
mode setting you make will apply upon startup. Setting the mode for a file will
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
deactivate the mode status of all other sequence files. If a start-up mode is not set for
any sequence file, then the generator will start in the normal operating mode.
Mode
Display option Description
If no mode is specified the sequence is not started when the
blank
generator is started.
step
Use the Image knob to advance through sequence steps.
You cannot advance past the last step. However, rotating the
Image knob forward one revolution past the last step will
change the mode to automatic. Rotating the Image knob
backward one revolution changes the mode back to manual.
Step information is displayed on the LCD only.
step -s#
Current step number is displayed with image on display
being tested.
step -display
Complete step information (sequence name, format, image,
and step number) is displayed with image on display being
tested.
wrap
Use Image knob to advance through sequence steps.
Advancing past the last step restarts at the first step.
Step information is displayed on the LCD only.
wrap -s#
Current step number is displayed with image on display
being tested.
wrap -display
Complete step information is displayed with image on dis-
play being tested.
auto
Automatically and continuously cycles though sequence
steps, and displays step information on LCD only.
auto -s#
Current step number is displayed with image on display
being tested.
auto -display
Complete step information is displayed with image on dis-
play being tested.
9. Press Save (DCS) to save the sequence file. Use the Format and Image knobs to
specify a name for the file by selecting the characters presented.
10. Press Exit (Image) to exit the Sequence Editor, and to return to the Sequence List
editor.
To edit the list of sequences that can be used:
1. Hold down the Image key while starting the generator, until programmer is displayed.
2. Select the SeqList image.
3. Press the Image key to start the Sequence List editor.
The Sequence List box shows a list of sequence files that can be selected with the
Format knob. The Available Files box shows all sequence files available.
90
Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Use these controls to edit the list of sequence files.
Control
Description
Move
Use the Format knob to select the file you want to move, press Move, then use
the Format knob to specify the target location, and then press Move again.
Delete
Insert
Removes the selected sequence file from the sequence list.
Inserts the sequence file selected from the list of available files into the
sequence list.
Remove
Modify
Deletes the sequence file selected in the list of available files from non-volatile
memory.
Opens the selected sequence file in the Sequence Editor.
5. Press Exit to save the list, and to exit the editor.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing the test sequence list
You can view the list of test sequences stored in the generator using the command line
interface, the internal sequence editor or VGM.
Viewing the test sequence list using the command line
Use the following procedure to view the test sequence list using the command line
interface.
To view the sequence list using the command line interface:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Load the default test sequence directory (seq) or custom sequence directory using the
following command:
DIRL seq
3. List the contents of the sequence directory by entering the following command:
NAMQ? 1 4 // lists test sequences from the first through the fourth
Deleting a test sequence using the command line
Use the following procedure to delete a test sequence list using the command line
interface.
To delete a test sequence using the command line interface:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Load the default test sequence directory (seq) or custom sequence directory and begin
an editing session using the following commands:
DIRL seq
3. Delete the sequence by entering the following command:
NAMK myseq
ALLU
4. End and save the sequence editing session using the following command:
92
Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing test sequence using internal sequence editor
Use the following procedure to view the test sequence list using the internal sequence
editor.
To view the sequence list using the internal sequence editor:
1. Hold down the Image key while starting the generator, until programmer is displayed.
2. Select the SeqList image.
3. Press the Image key to start the Sequence List editor.
The Sequence List box shows a list of sequence files that can be selected with the
Format knob. The Available Files box shows all sequence files available.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running a sequence
Regardless of how you created a test sequence you can initiate it through the command
line, the built-in editor or VGM. For information on running a test sequence through VGM
refer to the VGM help. The instructions for running test sequences through the command
line or internal sequence editor are provided below.
Running a test sequence using the command line
A sequence can run in one of three modes:
•
•
•
Step and stop mode, where the progression of the sequence is under user control, and
the sequence halts after the final step.
Step and wrap mode, where the progression of the sequence is under user control, and
it continuously loops (repeats the sequence steps).
Automatic mode, which enables automatic progression through the sequence list and
also continuous looping.
The following procedures describe how to use these modes:
To run a sequence in step and stop mode:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Enter the following commands:
SMOD 1
// sets step mode to manual with stop after last step
// starts running the sequence
3. Turn the Image knob to progress through the sequence.
4. To stop the sequence, enter the following command:
SMOD 0; ALLU
To run a sequence in step and wrap mode:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Enter the following commands:
SMOD 2
// sets step mode to manual with wrapping after last step
// starts running the sequence
3. Turn the Image knob to progress through the sequence.
4. To stop the sequence, enter the following command:
SMOD 0; ALLU
94
Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To run a sequence in automatic mode:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.
2. Enter the following commands:
SEQL MySeq
SMOD 3
// loads MySeq into sequence edit buffer
// sets the sequence mode to run in auto mode
// starts running the MySeq sequence
3. To stop the sequence, hold down the ACS, DCS, and DSS keys, and then cycle the
power to the generator.
To run a sequence at power up:
1. Run the sequence in the desired mode.
2. Turn off the power to the generator.
3. Start the generator in normal operating mode (without holding down any keys).
4. Depending on the selected mode, the sequence will start automatically, or you can turn
the Image knob to move forward and backward though the sequence.
The format and image names for each step and the current step number will appear on
the LCD. Additional status information may appear before the step number, depending
on the mode. This will be S for step, W for wrap and A for automatic.
<format><seqName>
<image> <seqStep>
5. To stop the sequence, hold down the ACS, DCS, and DSS keys, and then cycle the
power to the generator.
To run a manual sequence continuously:
1. Rotate the Image knob a full turn clockwise beyond the last step. A message on the
LCD will confirm that the continuous cycle is running.
2. To stop the cycle, rotate the Image knob counter-clockwise. The generator will
remember if the sequence was in continuous cycle mode on power down. If so, it will
remain in continuous cycle mode when the generator is powered on.
Running a test sequence using internal sequence editor
To run a sequence, that was created using the internal sequence editor:
1. Configure one sequence file with a mode setting through the sequence editor (see
2. Start the generator in normal operating mode, without holding any keys down.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Depending on the mode of the sequence, the sequence will start automatically, or you
need to turn the Image knob to move forward and backward though the sequence.
The LCD will display the format and image name for each step, and the current step
number. Additional status information may appear before the step number, depending
on the mode (manual, automatic, wrap).
A manual mode sequence can be set to continuously cycle through all the steps, by
rotating the bottom knob a full turn clockwise beyond the last step. A message on the
LCD will confirm that the continuous cycle is running. The cycle is stopped by rotating
the bottom knob counter-clockwise. The generator will remember if the sequence was
in continuous cycle on power down. If so, it will continuous cycle on power on.
If multiple sequences have been defined, use the Format knob to load other
sequences.
Note: When controlling the generator from a program, it is possible to make any
sequence the “Power-on” sequence without having it appear on the sequence knob
directory. In this case, the generator will power-up in the sequence mode with the
selected sequence, but loading a different sequence file with the Format knob, will not
allow you to get back to the original power-up sequence file.
Cancelling the start-up sequence mode
If the generator has been configured to run a sequence at start-up, and you want the
generator to start in normal operating mode, you need to power the generator up while
indicating “no special modes” (press and hold the ACS, DCS and DSS keys).
96
Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
You can operate and program the 802 generator from an external computer or terminal
using either the RS-232C serial port or optional IEEE-488 (GPIB) port. The GPIB port
enables the 802 to be used as a programmable video signal source for integration into
automated test systems that use IEEE-488 or GPIB communications between
instruments.
98
Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the GPIB port address
The default GPIB address is 15. You can specify a different address.
To set the address of the GPIB port directly on the generator:
1. Locate the rotary switches on the back of the generator between the RS-232 port and
the GPIB port. These are accessible through the ventilation slots. There are two rotary
switches: the one on the left configures the value of the tens digit and the one on the
right configures the value of the ones digit.
2. Set the rotary switches first the value of the tens switch and then the value of the ones
switch to the desired value.
3. Hold down the DCS key, and then cycle the power to the generator. The port is set to
the new address.
Note: A normal power cycle will not update the memory to the new switch settings.
To set the address of the GPIB port using the command line:
1. Establish a terminal session with the generator
2. (Optional) Enter the following command to check the current address:
GPIB?
3. Enter the following command:
GPIB address
When the address is changed with the GPIB command, the change takes place as
soon at the command is issued.
The new address setting will be maintained until 1) the address is changed with another
GPIB command, 2) the unit is re-initialized with an INIT command, or 3) the unit is
re-initialized because the power-up self test found corrupted data in battery-backed
system memory. In cases 2 and 3, the GPIB address will revert to the address set on
the GPIB address switches if the unit has them, or to 15 if the unit does not have GPIB
address switches.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Queries and commands
The GPIB interface is an ASCII command line interface like the RS-232 command line
interface. The communications protocol is per IEEE-488.2 specification. Queries and
commands consist of four ASCII upper/lower case characters. Commands do not require
a response from the generator, while queries cause the 802 to respond with the required
data.
You can send multiple commands on the same line by separating the commands with a
semicolon (;) followed by a terminator. A terminator is defined as the NL character (ASCII
10), or EOI sent with the last byte of the command. The 802 will not parse any commands
received until a terminator is received. All commands are executed sequentially; that is,
when a command is parsed it is allowed to finish execution before the next command is
parsed, as illustrated in the following figure.
Separator ( ; )
Message
Terminator
Program Message Syntax
Separator
( ; )
Separator
(white space)
Command/Query
Header
Data
Message Unit Syntax
Commands
Commands instruct the 802 to set a parameter to the value given or perform some
function not requiring any additional data. Commands which have an asterisk (*) as their
first character are common commands as defined by the IEEE-488.2 standard and
generally operate the same in all instruments. All commands are listed and described in
Commands which do not require any additional data from the controller are self-contained
and should be followed by either a message separator (;) or message terminator. Any
other characters (except whitespace characters) will cause a command error.
Commands which require numeric data must be followed by at least one separator
character (whitespace), and then the data. Numeric data sent with a command is in
decimal format. Numeric data can be represented in one of three methods: integer,
floating point, or scaled floating point.
100
Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, the following number can be represented in three ways:
•
•
•
Integer (42)
Floating point (42.00)
Scaled floating point (4.200E+01)
Queries
Queries are comprised of a header followed immediately by a question mark (?). If there
are any characters between the query header and the question mark character (including
whitespace), a command error will result. Queries, return a response message upon
completion of execution. A response message is comprised of the requested data
terminated with an NL (ASCII 10) character. For example the following text would be
3.1500E+04<NL>
Note that the HRAT? query returns its parameter in exponential form. Possible returned
parameter forms are:
•
•
•
Integer (3965)
Exponential (+3.965E+03)
String ("text string")
Output queue
When a query is executed, the resulting response message is placed in an output queue
where it can be read by the controller. The 802 has an output queue that is 255 bytes long.
When a message is present in the output buffer, the MAV (message available) bit in the
Status Byte register is set. This varies slightly from the 488.2 standard in that the MAV bit
will be set only when at least one complete response message is present in the output
queue. A complete response message consists of response message text and a message
terminator (NL).
Buffer deadlock
Buffer deadlock occurs when the 802 tries to put a response message in the output queue
when the output queue is full and the controller is held off while sending a new message
because the input buffer is full. If deadlock occurs, the 802 will clear its output queue, set
the query error (QYE) bit in the Event Status register and proceed to parse incoming
messages. If any additional queries are requested while in deadlock, those response
messages will be discarded.
The 802 will clear the buffer deadlock when it finishes parsing the current command/query.
command.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending commands and queries
The generator parses command lines one at a time. Command lines must be terminated
with a carriage return (<cr>).The generator immediately echoes each character as it is
received and places it in a command line buffer. This buffer currently has room for a total of
256 characters. If more than 256 characters are sent before sending a <cr>, then the
following response will be given:
Buffer overflow<cr><lf><cr><lf>R:\>
Upon receiving a carriage return, the generator immediately echoes the <cr> and follows it
with a line feed (<lf>). The generator then parses the command line and initiates whatever
processing is implied. The generator then responds with one of the following four
responses depending on the condition:
Command invalid<cr><lf><cr><lf>R:\>
<message1><cr><lf><message2><cr><lf>...<messageN><cr><lf><cr><lf>R:\>
Execution error: <nnnn><cr><lf><cr><lf>R:\>
R:\>
Where <cr> and <lf> are the carriage return and line feed characters, respectively.
Note: Handshaking routines should only look for > and not R:\>. In the future, the R:\ part
of the prompt may change (for example, may be expanded to indicate the current path).
Bench-top generators output the following prompt on their serial port after finishing the
power-on procedure.
R:\>
This feature allows ATE systems to know when the generator is ready.
Sending multiple commands and queries per line
You cans send multiple commands and queries per line by separating each command or
query with a semi-colon (;) character. For example:
HTOT 900; ALLU
The response to multiple queries will be a series of data elements separated by
semi-colons (;). For example, with the VGA_m3 format loaded, the following command
string will produce the response shown.
640;480;525
Normally, all of the commands on a command line associated with a single command
terminator are read as a single command message without regard for execution or
completion order. However, by inserting the *WAI command, you can force the generator
102
Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to wait for all preceding commands to be completed before the commands that follow *WAI
are processed. For example, sending the following command line causes a red rectangle
to be drawn and then overwritten by the colorbar image.
Note that the IMGU command merely requests that the current image be rendered
eventually, not necessarily right away nor in a single attempt. By inserting a *WAI
command after the IMGU, the generator is instructed to render the colorbar image first,
before rendering the red rectangle. This command ensures that the generator draws the
red rectangle on top of the colorbar image.
The generator will wait until the colorbar image has been completely rendered before it
reads and executes the RECT command.
GPIB and RS-232 protocols as well.
Completion handshake
The generator returns a > prompt immediately after an FMTU, IMGU, ALLU, BOOT, INIT,
or SCAL command is received, even if these commands have not finished executing. If the
system controlling the generator must know when the process started by one of these
commands has been completed, then append *OPC? to the command string.
For example, the following command causes the generator to wait until all processes have
been completed before responding with the number 1 and sending the > prompt.
The *OPC? command is required by the IEEE-488.2-1992 standard, but also works with
GPIB and RS-232 protocols as well.
Input buffer
Since some commands may take longer to execute, the 802 has an input buffer. This input
buffer is 255 characters long and can be written to by the host controller while the 802 is
busy executing or parsing previous messages. If the input buffer becomes full, the 802 will
hold off the controller until there is room in the buffer. For this reason, a program message
cannot be longer than 255 characters including terminator.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status queries and control
To create applications that control the generator using the GPIB port, it is sometimes
necessary to query the status of the generator and set or reset the status bits and bytes.
There are two sets of status registers: 1) the Event Status Register and Event Status
Enable Register and 2) the Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register.
These are described in the following paragraphs.
Status byte
The status byte used by the 802 is the same as that defined by the IEEE-488.2 standard
and does not use any other bits of the status byte. The status byte is one part of a
by using the serial poll feature of your controller.
Requesting service
The GPIB provides a method for any device to interrupt the controller-in-charge and
request servicing of a condition. This service request function is handled with the status
byte. When the RQS bit of the status byte is true, the 802 is requesting service from the
controller. There are many conditions which may cause the 802 to request service. For
The table below lists the status commands and queries.
Status commands
and queries
Definition
Sets the Event Status Enable register to the given mask value. When a bit
in the Event Status register goes high and the corresponding bit in the
Event Status Enable register is a 1, it is enabled and will cause the ESB bit
in the Status Byte register to go high.
*ESE?
Returns the current value of the Event Status register. After this command
is executed, the Event Status register is cleared. This is the only way of
clearing any bit in the Event Status register except by the *CLS command.
Sets the Service Request Enable register to the mask value given. When a
bit in the Status Byte register goes true and the corresponding bit in the Ser-
vice Request Enable register is also true, the 802 will request service using
the GPIB.
*SRE?
*STB?
Returns the current value of the Service Request Enable register.
Returns the current value of the Status Byte register. The value stored in
the Status Byte register is not affected by reading it.
Clears the Event Status register, the Status Byte and the output buffer.
104
Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following figure illustrates IEEE-488 status reporting.
Standard
Event Status Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
&
&
&
&
&
3
&
2
&
1
&
0
Queue
Not-Empty
7
6
5
4
Standard
Event Status Enable
Register
Output Queue
RQS
6
Service
Request
Generation
MAV
ESB
7
3
2
1
0
Status Byte Register
MSS
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
Service Request
Enable Register
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
Status byte bit Definition
MAV
ESB
MSS
RQS
Message available. Indicates that at least one complete response is present in
the output buffer.
Event status bit. Indicates that one of the enabled conditions in the Standard
Event Status register is set.
Master summary status. Indicates that the 802 has a reason for requesting ser-
vice.
Request service. This bit is read only by executing a serial poll of the 802.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Status bit Definition
OPC
RQC
Operation complete. Indicates that all operations have been completed.
Request control. Indicates that a device is requesting control. The generator will
never request control, so this bit will always be 0.
QYE
DDE
Query error. Indicates that a query request was made while the generator was in
deadlock.
Device dependent error. Indicates that the generator encountered an error exe-
cuting a command.
EXE
CME
URQ
Execution error. Indicates that there was an error parsing a parameter.
Command error. Indicates that there was an unrecognizable command.
User request. Indicates that a front panel key has been pressed or that the front
panel knob has been turned.
PON
Power on. Indicates that power has been turned off and on. This bit will always
be 0 in the generator.
Bus commands
The IEEE-488.1 standard defines bus commands, which are sent to the 802 with ATN
true. The following table lists bus commands supported by the generator. For more
detailed descriptions of these commands, see the IEEE-488.1 and 488.2 standards.
Command
Description
DCL
Device clear. Clears the input buffer and output queue, and stops parsing any
commands.
SDC
GTL
LLO
Selected device clear. Same as DCL.
SPE
SPD
Serial poll enable. Enables transmission of the Status Byte.
Serial poll disable. Exits the serial poll state.
Remote/local operation
The 802 has complete remote/local operation as defined by the IEEE-488.1 standard. All
four remote/local states (REMS, LOCS, RWLS and LWLS) are supported.
In the remote state (REMS), the 802 is under remote control and messages are processed
as received. The generator enters the remote with lockout state (RWLS) if the controller
issues the local lockout (LLO) message to the 802. The generator enters the local state
(LOCS) when the REN line goes false or the controller issues the go to local (GTL)
message to the generator, or a front panel control is actuated.
106
Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the remote with lockout state (RWLS), the generator is under complete remote control
and front panel controls are disabled. The generator enters the RWLS state when the
controller issues the local lockout (LLO) message to the generator. Front panel access is
re-enabled when the controller issues the go to local (GTL) message to the generator.
In the local state (LOCS), the generator is under local control and all front panel controls
are enabled. Any remote messages received are stored for processing when the
generator enters the remote state again. The generator enters the remote state (REMS) if
the REN line is true and the generator is addressed to listen.
In the local with lockout state (LWLS), the generator is under local control, and all front
panel controls are enabled. Any remote messages received are stored for processing
when the generator enters the remote state again. The generator enters the remote with
lockout state (RWLS) if it is addressed to listen.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
The HDMI and DVI Analyzer options provide the 802 video test generator with the ability to
test and verify the quality of an HDMI or DVI video signal, respectively. Having both a
transmitter and receiver, the 802 generator with the Analyzer feature can be used to:
•
•
•
View timing of an HDMI/DVI video signal. Connect an HDMI/DVI source to the
HDMI/DVI Rx connector to measure and analyze the timing parameters of the signal.
Generate pseudo-random noise test pattern. Connect an HDMI/DVI host to the
HDMI/DVI Tx connector to receive pseudo-random noise for testing purposes.
Analyze pixel data at different frequencies. Examine the quality of HDMI/DVI pixel
transmission (including source, cables and distribution systems) for data errors and
flickering pixels.
•
View InfoFrame packets from an HDMI signal. Display and validate InfoFrame
packets transmitted from an HDMI source
This chapter provides procedures for testing with the analyzer through the front panel and
through the command line. Front panel instructions are provided initially for each test. For
HDMI analyzer connections
HDMI receiver
HDMI transmitter
SS
AV
Rx
Tx
VGA
Audio/Video connector
Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input
With the HDMI analyzer option, you can externally monitor the video and/or audio content
of an incoming HDMI signal. This feature lets you view and hear HDMI content that is
received at the HDMI Rx connector while analysis and testing functions are performed by
the analyzer.
110
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To monitor HDMI input:
•
Use the VGA-to-RCA cable (part 30-00148) to connect the AV connector with a YPbPr
display, and the audio connections, as shown below.
To AV
connector
To audio source
Red
To VGA-to
RCA cable
To audio player
White
A VGA-to-RCA (3) cable is available from Quantum Data (part 99-00503), which
requires a female-to-female HD15 adapter, which is also available from Quantum Data
(part 09-00251).
•
Use the VGA-to-RCA cable (part 30-00148) to connect the AV connector with an
analog VGA display, and the audio connections as shown below.
To AV
connector
To audio source
Red
To analog
display
To audio player
White
DVI analyzer connections
The 802 generator with the DVI analyzer option is equipped with two digital DVI
connectors. In addition to a DVI Tx (output) connector that emulates a DVI transmit device,
a DVI Rx (input) connector is provided that allows a high-quality DVI display to be
emulated.
SS
Tx
Rx
VGA
Transmitter
Receiver
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility
Use the Analyzer Setup Utility to view or modify the configuration of the analyzer.
To start the Analyzer Setup Utility:
2. Connect a digital display with the DVI or HDMI transmitter on the generator.
page 25).
4. Select the Analzyer image.
The Analyzer Setup Utility appears on the connected display.
Note: The Report Setup feature is not implemented.
Enabling and disabling analyzer images
Certain analyzer tasks require images to be displayed on an HDMI/DVI display.
To enable or disable display of analyzer images:
2. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.
112
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Using the Image knob, toggle between ON (to enable analyzer images) and OFF (to
disable analyzer images) setting.
4. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.
The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the new settings are implemented for
Analyzer mode operation.
Starting the analyzer
The analyzer functions as a special operating mode within the 802 generator. You must
place the generator into this mode to perform any analyzer tasks.
To put the generator in the analyzer mode:
2. Press and release the Outputs key. The light on the key extinguishes.
3. While holding down the G key, press and release the Outputs key.
The Outputs key illuminates and the following message appears on the LCD. This
indicates that the generator is in analyzer mode (example shows DVI analyzer).
To take the generator out of the analyzer mode:
1. Press and release the Outputs key.
The generator is returned to the normal mode as a signal source. The LCD shows the
format and image currently active.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring timing of video signal
The analyzer provides the ability to analyze signal timing information of an external
HDMI/DVI source device. This feature allows you to test a transmitted HDMI/DVI signal for
anomalies and verify that the proper timing is output by the HDMI/DVI transmitter for a
given signal format.
The procedures below provide instructions for configuring the analyzer through the front
panel. Note that you can also measure timing with the analyzer through the command line.
The analyzer provides two measurement methods:
•
•
Basic timing measurement – Displays limited measurements on LCD.
Detailed timing measurement – Displays detailed measurements on a display
connected with the generator.
The procedures below provide instructions for configuring the analyzer through the front
panel. Note that you can also measure timing with the analyzer through the command line.
Setting up analyzer to measure timing
To operate the analyzer, you must select the desired HDMI/DVI signal source and set
signal format settings and parameters.
To set HDMI/DVI signal source parameters:
2. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.
3. Using the Format knob, select the Auto Based On field.
4. If using the HDMI/DVI signal originating internally from the generator, follow these
steps:
a. Using the Image knob, select CURRENT in the highlighted field.
b. Using the Format knob, select the Format field.
c. Select the desired signal format number using the cursor (displayed under a digit
in the field) as follows:
•
To move the cursor between digits, press the R and G keys.
114
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
To select a number for a digit, turn the Image knob.
As the number in the Format field changes, the appropriate timing parameters for the
selection appear in the box under the Format Parameters field.
5. If using an HDMI/DVI signal originating externally from the generator, follow these
steps:
a. Select MEASURED in the highlighted field.
b. Select the Format Parameters field using the Format knob.
c. Capture the external signal’s timing parameters by pressing and releasing the B
key.
d. Configure the HDMI/DVI transmit device to output an HDMI/DVI signal.
After a few seconds, the external signal’s timing parameters are displayed in the box
under Format Parameters and in the Run Length(Hex) field.
Important: If the external source signal’s timing parameters change (or the field
selection is changed), the signal timing parameters must be recaptured.
6. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.
The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the new settings are implemented for
analyzer mode operation.
Measuring basic timing parameters
To view basic timing information of an external HDMI/DVI source signal:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.
2. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source parameters within the generator.
•
current analyzer configuration.
•
4. Start the analyzer (see “Starting the analyzer” on page 113).
5. Press and release the R key to display the horizontal and vertical frequencies of the
HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD (see example below).
HS rate
48076
VS rate
72.188
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Press the G key to display the following format parameters on the LCD.
Horizontal pulse width (pixels)
Vertical pulse delay (pixels)
Active pixels per line
Horizontal period (pixels)
1040 800 56 120
666 600 37 6
Vertical period (lines)
Active lines
Horizontal pulse delay (pixels)
Vertical pulse width (pixels)
Measuring detailed timing parameters
The analyzer can analyze detailed HDMI/DVI signal timing information. The timing
information is displayed on an HDMI/DVI display connected to the generator.
To view detailed timing information of an external HDMI/DVI source signal:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.
2. Connect an HDMI/DVI display to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator.
3. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source parameters within the generator.
•
current analyzer configuration.
•
5. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI/DVI
display.
Note: To automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID structure of
a DDC-compliant display, hold down the R key, then press and release the ACS key.
116
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Using the Image knob, select the FormatRx image.
Detailed timing information of the HDMI/DVI signal is displayed on the HDMI/DVI
display (as shown in the example below).
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing cables and distribution systems
This section describes how to test HDMI or DVI cables, and distribution systems using
pseudo-random noise. Using different signal formats, the HDMI/DVI cable can be tested
over a wide range of frequencies.
The procedures below provide instructions for testing cable and distribution systems with
the analyzer through the front panel. Note that you can also perform these procedures
To test a cable or distribution system:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI cable to be tested between the HDMI/DVI Tx and Rx connectors
on the generator.
Note: If you are testing a fiber optic cable, plug the fiber optic cable connector marked
“transmitter” to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator, and plug the connector
marked “receiver” to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator. Use a 5 Vdc power
supply adapter at the receiver side of the cable.
2. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source and pseudo-random noise
parameters within the generator.
•
current analyzer configuration.
•
You will have to configure the analyzer for an internal source. To edit HDMI/DVI
Note: The HDMI/DVI signal source must be set to internal (Auto Based On field set
to CURRENT) for this procedure.
•
For information on what values to set the pseudo-random noise parameters as well
3. (HDMI only) If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI Rx connector
118
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Using the Format knob, select the signal format you want to use.
Any built-in formats may be used for this test. However, we recommend using several
formats spread over a wide range of frequencies. For example, the Test165 format is
commonly used to test at the maximum pixel frequency (165 MHz), while the DMT0660
format can be used to test at a very low frequency (25.175 MHz).Use the following
formats to test single-link DVI over a range of frequencies:
Format
Pixel rate (Mhz)
TEST165
165.000
DMT1660
DMT1285G
DMT1285A
DMT1648
DMT1275A
DMT1185
DMT1260G
DMT1085
DMT1170
DMT1075
DMT1070
720p60
162.000
157.500
148.500
135.000
129.600
121.500
108.000
94.500
94.200
78.750
75.000
74.250
65.000
56.250
50.000
49.500
44.900
40.000
36.000
35.500
31.500
28.322
25.175
DMT1060
DMT0885
DMT0872
DMT0875
DMT1043
DMT0860
DMT0685
DMT0785H
DMT0675
SMT0760V
DMT0660
5. Start the analyzer (see “Starting the analyzer” on page 113).
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Press and release the B key to analyze the number of pixel errors detected per color
component of the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD (see example below).
R:
G:
B:
0
21
0
To stop the analysis, press and release the B key again. The light on the key
extinguishes and the analysis stops.
7. Press and release the ACS key to analyze pixel error rate (in errors per billion) and
number of pixels measured (in billions) in the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD
(see example below).
Note: When the number of pixel errors becomes very large, the text “Very high” is
displayed in the bottom row of the LCD (replacing the numbers).
PER: pels/billion
4.255
0.88
To stop the analysis, press and release the ACS key again. The light on the key
extinguishes and the analysis stops.
8. Press and release the DCS key to view the expected and measured values for the first
pixel error detected from the received HDMI/DVI signal (see example below).
original: 40018C
1st error: FFFFFF
To stop the analysis, press and release the DCS key again. The light on the key
extinguishes and the analysis stops.
9. To test the cable at a different frequency, return to step 4.
Testing accuracy of analyzer
You can verify the analyzer’s ability to correctly analyze pseudo-random noise.
The procedures below provide instructions for testing the accuracy of the analyzer through
the front panel. Note that you can also perform these procedures through the command
To verify the analyzer’s pseudo-random noise analysis capability:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI Tx connector to an HDMI/DVI display.
2. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI/DVI
display.
120
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: To automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID structure of
a DDC-compliant display, hold down the R key, and then press and release the ACS
key.
3. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source parameters within the generator.
•
current analyzer configuration.
•
You will have to configure the analyzer for an internal source. To edit HDMI/DVI
4. Configure pseudo-random noise parameters to implement a single pseudo-random
noise test sequence. This requires setting the Procedure field to SINGLE SHOT.
•
5. Disconnect the HDMI/DVI Tx connector from the HDMI/DVI display.
6. Connect an HDMI/DVI cable between the HDMI/DVI Tx and Rx connectors on the
generator.
7. Using the Format knob, select the signal format you want to use.
•
Any of the pre-defined formats can be used for this test for DVI. However, we
recommend using the Test165 format to test DVI at the maximum pixel frequency
(165MHz). For HDMI the Test81 format should be used.
Note: In order to access the test formats such as Test165, you may have to re-invoke
the default format list by applying pressing and holding the R key and then pressing and
releasing the ACS key.
8. Using the Image knob, select either the PRN_5 or PRN_9 image.
9. Start the analyzer (see “Starting the analyzer” on page 113).
10. Press and release the B key to analyze number of pixel errors detected per color
component of the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD (see example below).
•
If you selected the PRN_5 image, the following should be displayed (5 errors in
each color component).
R:
G:
B:
5
5
5
•
If you selected the PRN_9 image, the following should be displayed (9 errors in
each color component).
R:
G:
B:
9
9
9
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. To verify accuracy using a different frequency, halt the analyzer mode and return to step
7.
122
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring pixel errors
In cases where the external HDMI/DVI device cannot generate pseudo-random noise, a
“delta error” testing capability is provided that allows analysis for flickering pixels in a
still-frame test image. With the video signal connected to the analyzer input, signal quality
can be measured blindly and test results delivered in simple numeric terms.
The procedures below provide instructions through the front panel. Note that you can also
configure the analyzer to measure pixel errors through the command line. For procedures
Setting delta error patch parameters
To enable and configure delta error patch testing by the analyzer, you must set certain
analyzer parameters properly. Use the procedure to configure the analyzer to test for delta
error patch testing.
To set delta error patch testing parameters:
configure the appropriate HDMI/DVI signal source and timing parameters.
3. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.
4. Using the Format knob, select the Delta Error Patch Setup field.
5. Using the Image knob, specify whether to enable (ON) or disable (OFF) delta error
patch.
If set to OFF, delta error patch is disabled and all associated fields are disabled.
6. Using the Format knob, select the Travel field.
7. Using the Image knob, specify how you want the patch to move across the display as
follows:
•
•
Select Zig Zag to move over the active video in a zig zag fashion.
Select FIXED to move over the active video in a fixed position.
8. Using the Format knob, select the Parameters field.
9. Using the Image knob, specify how you want the delta error patch implemented as
follows:
•
Select AUTO to allow the generator to automatically set the patch settings. The
patch width and height are calculated based on size of the active video area.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Select MANUAL to define specific patch settings.
10. To define specific settings for delta error patch (width, height, and position), follow these
steps:
a. Using the Format knob, select the Width, Height, X, or Y field.
Note: If you selected AUTO in the Parameters field and the HDMI/DVI signal source is
internal (Auto Based On field set to CURRENT), the Width and Height fields are not
selectable. Similarly, if you selected AUTO in the Parameters field and the HDMI/DVI
signal source is external (Auto Based On field set to MEASURE), the Width and Height
b. Set the parameter (in decimal) using the cursor (displayed under a digit in the field)
to select the appropriate value as follows:
•
•
To move the cursor between digits, press the R and G keys.
To select a number for a digit, turn the Image knob.
c. Repeat these steps until each parameter is defined.
11. Using the Format knob, select the Reference Frame field.
12. Using the Image knob, specify the method used to compare the patch within different
frames as follows:
•
•
Select FIRST to use the first field as the reference for comparison with other
patches in other frames.
Select PAIRS to set the comparison to be performed in each two successive
frames.
13. Using the Format knob, select the Frames Compared field.
14. Specify the number of frames to be compared with the patch dimensions using the
cursor (displayed under a digit in the field) to select the appropriate value as follows:
•
•
To move the cursor between digits, press the R and G keys.
To select a number for a digit, turn the Image knob.
15. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.
The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the settings are implemented for Analyzer
mode operation.
124
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Measuring pixel errors in patch
The analyzer can test and analyze the transmission quality of an external HDMI/DVI
transmit device using a delta error patch pattern. The analyzer captures all or a portion of
an external image (patch pattern) and verifies that all pixels match over a number of
frames. The results are output to an HDMI/DVI display using a special image.
To test an external HDMI/DVI signal using delta error patch pattern:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.
2. Connect an HDMI/DVI display to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator.
3. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source and delta error patch parameters
within the generator.
•
•
•
current analyzer configuration.
4. (HDMI only) If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI Rx connector
5. Generate a static image from the HDMI/DVI transmit device.
6. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI/DVI
display.
Note: To automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID structure of
a DDC-compliant display, hold down the R key, then press and release the ACS key.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Using the Image knob, select the DeltaErr image.
The DeltaErr image appears on the connected HDMI/DVI display. As shown in the
example below, errors are presented in the area in which they are found by color
component.
126
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing InfoFrames (HDMI only)
The HDMI analyzer can analyze InfoFrame data from an incoming HDMI signal. With this
capability, an HDMI transmit device can be tested for its ability to transmit InfoFrame
packets correctly.
Testing HDMI transmit device InfoFrame capability
The 802 generator can monitor the InfoFrame content of the received HDMI signal.
To view current HDMI InfoFrame contents received from an HDMI transmitter:
1. Connect an HDMIdisplay to the HDMI Tx connector on the generator.
2. Connect the HDMI source to the HDMI Rx connector on the generator.
4. If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI Rx connector (see
5. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI/DVI
display.
Note: To automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID structure of
a DDC-compliant display, hold down the R key, then press and release the ACS key.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Using the Image knob, select the PacketRx image.
The PacketRx image appears on the connected HDMI display. Shown in the image are
the current settings for the AVI InfoFrame input.
7. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates.
8. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate InfoFrame type.
The contents of the appropriate InfoFrame input are displayed on the HDMI display.
9. When finished, press and release the Step key.
The light on the Step key extinguishes.
128
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing audio (HDMI only)
The HDMI analyzer can process audio data from an incoming HDMI signal. With this
capability, an HDMI source can be tested for its ability to successfully transmit audio
packets.
Testing HDMI transmit device audio capability
The 802 generator can monitor the audio content of the received HDMI signal.
To monitor audio content received from an HDMI transmitter:
1. Connect the HDMI transmit device to the HDMI Rx connector on the generator.
3. Monitor the audio signal received on the HDMI Rx connector using an external audio
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling analyzer using command-line interface
You can operate the Analyzer using the 802 generator’s command line interface. This
section describes Analyzer functions and commands and provides examples of command
sequences you can use to perform Analyzer tasks.
Signal timing analysis commands
This section provides command line procedures for viewing signal timing parameters.
Viewing signal timing parameters (on an HDMI/DVI monitor)
This example displays timing and allows you to view real-time, detailed HDMI/DVI signal
timing information from a connected HDMI/DVI transmit device.
To view basic timing information of an external HDMI/DVI source signal:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.
110).
3. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to
4. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal
(HDMI or DVI):
SROP 2 4
This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI
or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with
(DVI or HDMI).
5. (optional) Enter the following command to set the status display mode:
SROP 8
6. Enter the following commands to initiate the measurement of timing parameters.
ANIG 1
IMGL FormatRx // loads the FormatRX image into the edit buffer
IMGU // applies the FormatRX image to the generator/analyzer
// enables analyzer images to be displayed
Viewing specific timing parameters
The following is an example of using commands to view the total number of horizontal
pixels and horizontal frequency of the HDMI/DVI signal.
130
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To view specific timing information of an external HDMI/DVI source signal:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.
2. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to
3. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal
(HDMI or DVI):
SROP 2 4
This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI
or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with
(DVI or HDMI).
4. (optional) Enter the following command to set the status display mode:
SROP 8
5. Enter the following commands to initiate the measurement of timing parameters.
HTOT?
HRES?
// initiates measurement of timing from external source
// queries for the horizontal total pixels
// queries for the horizontal active pixels
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pseudo-random noise generation commands
This section provides command line procedures for generating pseudo-random noise.
Generating pseudo-random noise
The following is an example of using commands to first configure and then generate
pseudo-random noise.
To generate pseudo-random noise:
1. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to
2. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal
(HDMI or DVI):
SROP 2 4
This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI
or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with
(DVI or HDMI).
3. (optional) Enter the following command to set the status display mode:
SROP 8
4. Enter the following commands to generate pseudo-random noise.
// turns on the pseudo-random noise test
<CR>
// a carriage return halts the continuous test
5. Enter the following commands to stop pseudo-random noise generation.
PNSG 0
PNGU
Pseudo-random noise analysis commands
This section provides command line procedures for generating pseudo-random noise and
analyzing the received data.
132
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Analyzing pseudo-random noise in a cable or distribution
system
The following example uses commands to test a connected HDMI/DVI cable or distribution
system.
To analyze pseudo-random noise in a cable or distribution system:
1. Connect the DVI or HDMI cable between the transmit and receive connectors on the
generator.
If you are testing a distribution system connect an access cable to the distribution
center to the transmit connector on the generator and a second access cable to the
receive connector on the generator.
2. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to
3. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal
(HDMI or DVI):
SROP 2 4
This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI
or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with
(DVI or HDMI).
4. (optional) Enter the following commands to set the status display mode:
SROP 8
5. Enter the following commands to analyze pseudo-random noise in a cable or
distribution system.
FMTL TEST165 // loads the TEST165 format for testing DVI
Note: For HDMI testing load the TEST81 format.
// applies the TEST165 or TEST81 format to the generator
6. Enter the following commands to configure the pseudo-random noise parameters.
PNSF 0
PNST 1
PNSA 1
PNSM 0
// selects internal timing source for pseudo-random noise
// specifies QDI-BCM algorithm
// sets pseudo random noise to be calculated each pixel
// sets pseudo random noise test to run in auto mode
PNAU // loads the generator with pseudo-random noise settings
Note: The test will stop automatically if configured to run in the single or multi-shot
mode. If you initiate the test in the continuous mode, you will have to enter a carriage
return to halt the test after PNAU is invoked.
7. Enter the following commands to view the results of the test.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
// returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion
// returns the number of pixels measured in billions
// returns the number of bad pixels for R, G, B components
// returns information about the first error encountered
Analyzing pseudo-random noise from an external source
The following example tests an HDMI/DVI transmit device’s pixel data using
pseudo-random noise generated by an external source.
To analyze pseudo-random noise from an external source:
1. Connect the DVI or HDMI cable between the receive connector on the generator and
the output interface on the device under test.
2. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to
3. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal
(HDMI or DVI):
SROP 2 4
This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI
or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with
(DVI or HDMI).
4. (optional) Enter the following commands to set the status display mode:
SROP 8
5. Enter the following commands to configure the pseudo-random noise parameters.
PNSF 1
PNST 1
PNSA 1
PNSM 0
// selects external timing source for pseudo-random noise
// specifies QDI-BCM algorithm
// initiates measurement of timing from external source
// sets pseudo random noise to be calculated each pixel
// sets pseudo random noise test to run in auto mode
PNAU // loads the generator with the pseudo-random noise settings
Note: The test will stop automatically if configured to run in the single or multi-shot
mode. If you initiate the test in the continuous mode, you will have to enter a carriage
return to halt the test after PNAU is invoked.
6. Enter the following commands to view the results of the test.
// returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion
// returns the number of pixels measured in billions
// returns the number of bad pixels for R, G, B components
// returns information about the first error encountered
Testing the analyzer
The following example verifies the analyzer’s pseudo-random noise analysis capability.
134
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To verify the analyzer’s pseudo-random noise analysis capability:
1. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to
2. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal
(HDMI or DVI):
SROP 2 4
This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI
or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with
(DVI or HDMI).
3. (optional) Enter the following commands to set the status display mode:
SROP 8
4. Connect an HDMI/DVI cable between the HDMI/DVI Tx and Rx connectors on the
generator.
5. Enter the following commands to select the signal format and image.
FMTL TEST165 // loads the TEST165 format
Note: For HDMI testing load the TEST81 format.
// applies the TEST165 or TEST81 format to the generator
// activates the image in the generator
6. Enter the following commands to set the pseudo-random noise parameters.
PNSF 0
PNST 1
PNSA 1
PNSM 0
// selects internal timing source for pseudo-random noise
// specifies QDI-BCM algorithm
// sets pseudo random noise to be calculated each pixel
// sets pseudo-random noise test to “single-shot”
// loads the generator with pseudo-random noise settings
Note: The test will stop automatically if configured to run in the single or multi-shot
mode. If you initiate the test in the continuous mode, you will have to enter a carriage
return to halt the test after PNAU is invoked.
7. Enter the following commands to view the results of the test.
// returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion
// returns the number of pixels measured in billions
// returns the number of bad pixels for R, G, B components
// returns information about the first error encountered
Analyzing pixel data (delta error patch)
The following is an example of using commands to test an HDMI/DVI transmit device’s
pixel data using a delta error patch test.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set delta error patch testing parameters:
1. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to
2. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal
(HDMI or DVI):
SROP 2 4
This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI
or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with
(DVI or HDMI).
3. (optional) Enter the following commands to set the status display mode:
SROP 8
4. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.
5. Connect an HDMI/DVI display to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator.
6. Enter the following commands to load a suitable format for the display under test.
FMTL DMT0660 // loads the DMT0660 format for testing
// applies the DMT0660 format to the generator
7. Enter the following commands to load a suitable static image.
IMGL FLAT
// loads the static image for testing
// applies the image to the generator
8. Enter the following commands to configure the delta patch parameters.
PDSY 256
PDSH 64
// sets patch starting at x-pixel 128
// sets patch starting at y-pixel 256
// sets patch height at 64 pixel
// sets patch width at 90 pixels
PDSW 96
10. Enter the following commands to run the delta patch test.
ANIG 1
// captures patch of image
// enables analyzer images
IMGL DeltaErr // loads the DeltaErr image
IMGU
// activates the image in the generator
136
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Generating pseudo-random noise from your device
This section explains how to implement pseudo-random noise is your own device.
Implementing pseudo-random noise from your device
The analyzer can test and analyze pixel data received from an HDMI/DVI source. To
accomplish this, a pseudo-random noise pattern is used that provides a sequence of
highly dynamic pixel values.
To maximize your ability to analyze pixel data generated by set-top boxes, you must be
able to generate pseudo-random noise. To facilitate this, you can use the lfsr.h and lfsl.cpp
source code files from
http://www.quantumdata.com/support/resources/pr_noise/QDI-BCM_PseudoNoise.ZIP,
which enable you to generate QDI-BCM pseudo-random noise from your device.
Once implemented, you can verify that the code is implemented correctly by using the
Dump10K() function to write the first 10,000 pixel values to a file. This result should match
the contents of the PN_31_24.txt reference file included in
http://www.quantumdata.com/support/resources/pr_noise/QDI-BCM_PseudoNoise.ZIP.
lfsr.h
The following source code is provided for the lfdr.h file.
// LFSR.h: interface for the CLFSR class.
#if !defined(AFX_LFSR_H__5947F6F9_1DBE_4E6E_9AFB_77D5D8857A10__INCLUDED_)
#define AFX_LFSR_H__5947F6F9_1DBE_4E6E_9AFB_77D5D8857A10__INCLUDED_
#if _MSC_VER > 1000
#pragma once
#endif // _MSC_VER > 1000
class CLFSR
{
public:
void Dump10K();
unsigned long GetPixel();
void Reset();
CLFSR();
virtual ~CLFSR();
protected:
int state;
unsigned long seed;
};
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
#endif //
!defined(AFX_LFSR_H__5947F6F9_1DBE_4E6E_9AFB_77D5D8857A10__INCLUDED_)
lfsl.cpp
The following source code is provided for the tfsl.cpp file.
// Implementation of the CLFSR class
#include “LFSR.h”
#include <stdio.h>
#ifdef _DEBUG
#undef THIS_FILE
static char THIS_FILE[]=__FILE__;
#define new DEBUG_NEW
#endif
// enable this to light up pixels 1,2,3 as red,green,blue
// in horizontal order
// Pixel 1 represents the top left corner of the screen
// when this is enabled, all other pixels are black
//#define RGB_TEST
// Construction/Destruction
unsigned long pixelvalue;
CLFSR::CLFSR()
{
}
CLFSR::~CLFSR()
{
}
void CLFSR::Reset()
{
state=0;
seed=0x08000001;
}
// Pixel 1 should be 0x000000
// Pixel 2 should be 0x00 (7-bits) , Opcode(10-bits), SeedHigh(7 bits)
// Pixel 3 should be SeedLow (24 bits)
// All other pixels are then set based on the results of the LFSR
calculations.
// The 10-bit Opcode is custom per Quantum Data’s request and it will be
set to ‘00,0000,0111’.
unsigned long CLFSR::GetPixel()
{
unsigned long temp;
138
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
// states 0 to 2 are specific for QuantumData
switch (state)
{
// pixel 1
case 0:
pixelvalue=seed;
state++;
#ifdef RGB_TEST
return (0xff0000); // red
return(0);
#else
#endif
break;
// pixel 2
case 1:
temp=((0x007<<7) | (( seed &0x7f000000)>>24)) & 0xffffff;
state++;
#ifdef RGB_TEST
#else
return (0x00ff00); // green
return(temp);
#endif
break;
// pixel 3
case 2:
temp=seed &0x00ffffff;
state++;
#ifdef RGB_TEST
#else
return (0x0000ff); // blue
return(temp);
#endif
break;
default:
pixelvalue= ((pixelvalue & 0x7f)<<24) | ( ((pixelvalue>>4)
& 0xffffff) ^ ((pixelvalue>>7) & 0xffffff) );
#ifdef RGB_TEST
return (0x0); // blank
#else
return(pixelvalue & 0xffffff);
#endif
break;
break;
}
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
}
void CLFSR::Dump10K()
{
int i;
FILE* f;
char s[100];
f=fopen(“c:\\temp\\noise.txt”,”w”);
Reset();
for (i=0;i<10000;i++)
{
sprintf(s,”%.6lx”,GetPixel());
fprintf(f,”%s\r\n”,s);
}
//
AfxMessageBox(“See c:\\temp\\noise.txt”);
fclose(f);
Sending pseudo-random noise to external device
The analyzer can be the source for a pseudo-random noise test pattern. HDMI/DVI
displays can use this test pattern for testing and analysis purposes.
To generate a pseudo-random noise test pattern:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI receiver device to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator.
2. If necessary, set the proper pseudo-random noise parameters within the generator.
•
current analyzer configuration.
•
3. Place the generator in HDMI/DVI analyzer mode.
See “Starting the analyzer” on page 113 for steps on launching analyzer mode.
•
4. Press and release the Step key to generate pseudo-random noise to be transmitted.
The key illuminates and pseudo-random noise is transmitted from the HDMI/DVI Tx
connector. The following message appears on the LCD:
Generating Psudo
Random Noise
5. To stop pseudo-random noise generation, press and release the Step key.
The light on the key extinguishes and pseudo-random noise is no longer transmitted.
140
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Analyzing noise from an external device
The analyzer can test and analyze the transmission quality of an external HDMI/DVI
transmit device using pseudo-random noise.
Important: To perform this test, the external HDMI/DVI transmit device must be able to
generate pseudo-random noise using the QDI-BCM format.
Note: Before performing this test, you may first want to test the cables and distribution
equipment used to transport the HDMI/DVI signal between the external device and
To test an external HDMI/DVI signal using pseudo-random noise:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.
2. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source and pseudo-random noise
parameters within the generator.
•
current analyzer configuration.
•
Note: The HDMI/DVI signal source must be set to external (Auto Based On field set
to MEASURED) for this procedure.
•
3. If desired, monitor the video/audio signal received on the HDMI Rx connector (see
4. Start the analyzer (see page 113).
5. Generate pseudo-random noise from the HDMI/DVI transmit device.
6. Press and release the B key to analyze the number of pixel errors detected per color
component of the received HDMI/DVI signal (see example below).
R:
G:
B:
0
21
0
To stop the analysis, press and release the B key again. The light on the key
extinguishes and the analysis stops.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Press and release the ACS key to analyze pixel error rate (in errors per billion) and
number of pixels measured (in billions) in the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD
(see example below).
PER: pels/billion
4.255
0.88
Note: When the number of pixel errors becomes very large, the text “Very high” is
displayed in the bottom row of the LCD (replacing the numbers).
To stop the analysis, press and release the ACS key again. The light on the key
extinguishes and the analysis stops.
8. Press and release the DCS key to analyze the expected and reported values for the
first pixel error detected from the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD (see example
below).
original: 40018C
1st error: FFFFFF
To stop the analysis, press and release the DCS key again. The light on the key
extinguishes and the analysis stops.
Setting pseudo-random noise parameters
This section describes how to modify the pseudo-random noise output by the generator.
To set pseudo-random noise parameters:
configure the appropriate HDMI/DVI signal source and timing parameters.
3. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.
4. Using the Format knob, select the Pseudo Random Noise Setup field.
5. Using the Image knob, specify whether to enable (ON) or disable (OFF)
pseudo-random noise.
If set to OFF, pseudo-random noise is disabled and all associated fields are disabled.
6. Using the Format knob, select the Advance after Every field.
7. Using the Image knob, specify how you want pseudo-random noise generated, as
follows:
142
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
Select PIXEL to generate and receive pseudo-random noise at every pixel within
the whole frame.
Select ACTIVE PIXEL to generate and receive pseudo-random noise only at active
pixels within the frame.
8. Using the Format knob, select the Parameters field.
9. Using the Image knob, specify how you want the pseudo-random noise seed and
sequence length implemented, as follows:
•
Select AUTO to use the default seed value and sequence length. The default
settings ensure a stable, pseudo-random noise image. If you select this setting,
proceed to step 11.
•
Select MANUAL to define specific seed value and sequence length settings. If you
select this setting, proceed to step 10.
Note: If the HDMI/DVI signal source is external (Auto Based On field set to
MEASURED), you cannot manually define these settings. The Parameters and Seed
Value(Hex) fields appear dimmed, and the Run Length(Hex) field is set when
10. If you set the Parameters field to MANUAL, define specific settings for pseudo-random
noise seed and sequence length by following these steps:
a. Using the Format knob, select the Seed Value(Hex) field.
b. Specify the desired seed value using the cursor (displayed under a digit in the field)
to select the appropriate value as follows:
•
•
To move the cursor between digits, press the R and G keys.
To select a number for a digit, turn the Image knob.
c. Using the Format knob, select either the Run-Length(Hex) or Run-Length(Dec)
field.
d. Specify the desired sequence length value in hexidecimal (if Run-Length(Hex)
field is highlighted) or decimal (if Run-Length(Dec) field is highlighted) using the
cursor (displayed under a digit in the field) to select the appropriate value as
follows:
•
•
To move the cursor between digits, use the R and G keys.
To select a number for a digit, use the Image knob.
11. Using the Format knob, select the Procedure field.
12. Using the Image knob, select the sequence type for pseudo-random noise to be
generated and tested as follows:
•
•
Select CONTINUOUS to run the pseudo-random noise sequence continuously.
Select SINGLE SHOT to run one sequence of pseudo-random noise.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Select MULTI SHOT to define a specific number of sequences to run. Define the
number of sequences to run in the field next to the Procedure field.
13. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.
The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the settings are implemented for analyzer
mode operation.
144
Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
The HDMI option enables the generator to test HDMI-compliant sink devices. With the
HDMI option, the generator outputs HDMI-compatible TMDS video and data packets
containing audio and auxiliary information.
The HDMI option includes the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advanced E-EDID parsing
Generation of all EIA/CEA-861-B formats below 165 MHz (with all possible variations)
Pixel repetition test capabilities
Internal sine wave generator and external SPDIF audio input for audio testing
AFD test capabilities
Automatic and manual InfoFrame configuration
Note: This chapter refers to the EIA/CEA-861B standard, which may be purchased from
http://global.ihs.com/
146
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
This section provides basic information on how to operate the 802 generator using the
HDMI option.
HDMI connections
The generator with the HDMI option has two connectors. In addition to an HDMI Tx
(output) connector that emulates an HDMI source device, an AV connector allows external
SPDIF audio to be input to the HDMI signal. To use the AV port, an RCA-to-VGA cable is
included with the generator.
The following figure shows the location of these connectors on a model 802 generator with
the HDMI option.
Audio/Video connector
HDMI transmitter
SS
AV
Tx
VGA
Setting up the generator for HDMI operation
To perform testing using the HDMI option, you must ensure that the generator is
configured to output HDMI signals:
To set up the generator to perform HDMI testing:
1. Hold down the G and B keys, and then power on the generator.
The following message appears on the front panel LCD.
Special:
keys
Digital friendly
2. Release the G and B keys.
The generator is placed in Digital Friendly mode.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Hold down the R and ACS keys, and then cycle the power to the generator.
The following message appears on the front panel LCD.
Special:
keys
hot-plug formats
4. Release the R and ACS keys.
The generator is placed in Hot-Plug Format mode. This loads the Format knob list with
formats supported by the connected HDMI display (hot-plug formats read via EDID
structure of attached display).
Note: To toggle between the factory default and hot-plug Format knob lists, press and
release the R and ACS keys. Using the factory default Format knob list will disable the
generator’s ability to automatically select the appropriate output signal protocol (HDMI
output signal via Toggle DVI/HDMI key operation (R and G keys).
5. Hold down the Step, G, and B keys while starting the genertor, until Status display
appears on the LCD.
6. Release the Step, G, and B keys to enable status display on the generator (see
example below).
Color space
Color depth
Video type
Format name
H31
V60
D8C=DMT0659
0=SMPTE133
Image version
Image name
The format status on the LCD will indicate whether the unit is outputting HDMI or DVI
signal protocol from the Tx connector. An “H” in the format status (H8C in the example
above) indicates HDMI output; a “D” in the format status indicates DVI output.
Note: With the compliant Hot-plug Formats mode active and a hot-plug detected, the
generator automatically selects the appropriate TMDS output signal protocol (HDMI or
DVI) for the attached display (via EDID read).
7. If the output signal protocol is DVI, toggle to HDMI protocol by holding down the R key,
then pressing and releasing the G key.
The format status changes to “H” (from “D”) on the LCD.
148
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing HDMI video
This section provides steps on how to test handling of HDMI video signals by an HDMI
display. To support HDMI, the generator provides pre-defined formats for every video
format specified in the EIA/CEA-861-B standard. These pre-defined formats support all
aspects of the HDMI signal (video, audio, and auxiliary data).
The following table lists the generator formats used to test support for HDMI
(EIA/CEA-861-B) formats.
EIA/CEA-861-B Video
Identification Code
Quantum Data format
1
DMT0659, DMT0660
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
480p59, 480p60, 480p59LH, 480p60LH
480p59SH, 480p60SH
720p59, 720p60
1080i29, 1080i30
480i2x29, 480i2x30, 480i2xL1, 480i2xL2
480i2xS1, 480i2xS2
240p2x_1, 240p2x_2, 240p2x_3, 240p2x_4,
240p2xL1, 240p2xL2, 240p2xL3, 240p2xL4
9
240p2xS1, 240p2xS4, 240p2xS3, 240p2xS4
480i4x29, 480i4x30, 480i4xL1, 480i4xL2
480i4xS1, 480i4xS2
10
11
12
240p4x_1, 240p4x_2, 240p4x_3, 240p4x_4,
240p4xL1, 240p4xL2, 240p4xL3, 240p4xL4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
240p4xS1, 240p4xS2, 240p4xS3, 240p4xS4
480p2x59, 480p2x60, 480p2xL1, 480p2xL2
480p2xS1, 480p2xS2
1080p59, 1080p60
576p50, 576p50LH
576p50SH
720p50
1080i25
576i2x25, 576i2xLH
576i2xSH
288p2x_1, 288p2x_2, 288p2x_3, 288p2xL1,
288p2xL2, 288p2xL3
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EIA/CEA-861-B Video
Identification Code
Quantum Data format
24
25
26
27
288p2xS1, 288p2xS2, 288p2xS3
576i4x25, 576i4xLH
576i4xSH
288p4x_1, 288p4x_2, 288p4x_3, 288p4xL1,
288p4xL2, 288p4xL3
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
288p4xS1, 288p4xS2, 288p4xS3
576p2x50, 576p2xLH
576p2xSH
1080p50
1080p23, 1080p24
1080p25
1080p29, 1080p30
Testing HDMI video formats
Basic testing requires verifying proper handling of those video formats supported by the
HDMI display. Using the table above as a guide, you can verify your display’s support for
one or more EIA/CEA-861-B formats.
To test an HDMI display using supported HDMI formats:
1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.
2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.
•
up the generator for HDMI operation.
3. Using the Format knob, specify the HDMI video format you want to test.
150
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Using the Image knob, select the Master image.
The Master image appears on the connected HDMI display (as shown below).
5. To verify proper handling of the selected HDMI video format, check for the following in
the image on the HDMI display:
•
•
•
•
•
•
scrambled raster
jitter
centering
scaling anomalies
resolution patches (for clarity)
sparkling or missing pixels
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Using the Image knob, select the Ramp image.
The Ramp image appears on the connected HDMI display (as shown below).
7. To verify proper handling of the selected HDMI video format, check for glitches in the
image on the HDMI display.
8. Using the Image knob, select additional images (as desired) to verify proper handling
of the selected HDMI video format.
9. To test another HDMI format, return to step 3.
Testing HDMI video pixel repetition
The EIA/CEA-861-B standard defines a number of progressively-scanned gaming formats
which support variable horizontal resolution. These formats maintain a fixed 2880-pixel
format timing and use pixel repetition to provide 10 different effective horizontal
resolutions. A special blanking scheme further reduces the number of active pixels (to
those listed in the table below), thereby providing a horizontal safe area that insures that
all of the pixels in a game will be visible on overscanned HDMI displays.
To support HDMI gaming format and pixel repetition testing, the generator allows you to
sequentially apply pixel repetition (up to 10 times) to a unique image. As the pixel
repetition factor is increased, the horizontal resolution of the displayed image will decrease
as shown the table below.
Pixel repetition factor
(image version)
Horizontal resolution
0
2880 pixels/line
1
2
2560 pixels/line
1280 pixels/line
152
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pixel repetition factor
(image version)
Horizontal resolution
3
4
853 pixels/line
640 pixels/line
512 pixels/line
427 pixels/line
366 pixels/line
320 pixels/line
284 pixels/line
256 pixels/line
5
6
7
8
9
10
To test an HDMI display using HDMI pixel repetition:
1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.
2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.
•
up the generator for HDMI operation.
3. Using the Format knob, select the HDMI gaming format you want to test.
Note: Gaming formats on the generator have the characters "4x" in their names (such
as “480i4x29” or “576i4x25”). For a listing of all HDMI formats, see the table on page
4. Using the Image knob, select the PixelRep image.
The PixelRep image appears on the connected HDMI display (as shown below).
5. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate image version number (1-10).
Note: The image version number correlates with the pixel repetition factor.
The pixel repetition factor appears in the center of the image.
7. To verify proper handling of the selected HDMI gaming format, check the following in
the image on the HDMI display:
•
The horizontal active area is resized to the appropriate number of clocked pixels
using vertical bars to the left and right of the default (2880 pixel) image.
•
•
The white vertical borders and circles in the active area appear thicker.
The white text in the center of the active area appears stretched and bigger.
8. Using the Image knob, select additional pixel repetition factors (as desired) to verify
proper handling of the selected HDMI gaming format using variable horizontal
resolutions.
9. When finished, press and release the Step key.
The light on the Step key extinguishes.
154
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing HDMI audio
This section provides steps on how to test handling of audio packets by an HDMI display.
Testing can be performed using audio originating from both internal (generator) and
external sources. The generator supports both 2-channel SPDIF audio from internal
source and external source and up to 8-channel audio from an internal audio source.
There are seperate sets of images for testing 2-channel SPDIF audio and 8-channel
audio.
Testing 2-channel HDMI audio output from internal SPDIF source
To support testing of HDMI audio, the 802 generator provides two-channel LPCM audio
(using an internally-generated sinewave) at the highest audio sampling rate (48 kHz).
Multiple scenarios are provided that allow you to test one or both audio channels at
different amplitudes and frequencies, as well as test using the different supported
sampling rates.
The following table lists the images used to perform HDMI audio testing using an internal
audio source.
Image
Description
AudioLR
Left and right audio channel output with adjustable amplitude.
AudioLRf
AudioRAT
Audio_L
Audio_Lf
Audio_R
Audio_Rf
Left and right audio channel output with adjustable frequency.
Left and right audio channel output with adjustable sampling rate.
Left audio channel output with adjustable amplitude.
Left audio channel output with adjustable frequency.
Right audio channel output with adjustable amplitude.
Right audio channel output with adjustable frequency.
To test an HDMI display using HDMI audio from the generator:
1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.
2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.
•
up the generator for HDMI operation.
3. Using the Format knob, select either the DMT0660 or 480i2x29 format.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate image (see table above).
The image appears on the connected HDMI display. The image shows the current
settings for the HDMI audio output. For example, the AudioLR image is shown below.
5. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates.
6. Using the Image knob, adjust the amplitude, frequency, or sampling rate (based on the
selected image) of the HDMI audio output.
7. To verify proper HDMI audio handling, check the following on the HDMI display:
•
•
•
Audio is output from the proper channels (left, right, or both).
When amplitude is adjusted, the volume is subsequently changed.
When frequency is adjusted, the pitch is subsequently changed.
8. When finished, press and release the Step key.
The light on the Step key extinguishes.
156
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing 8-channel HDMI audio output from internal source
To support testing of HDMI audio, the 802 generator provides 8-channel LPCM audio
(using an internally-generated sinewave) at the highest audio sampling rate (192 kHz).
Multiple scenarios are provided that allow you to test one or both audio channels at
different amplitudes and frequencies, as well as test using the different supported
sampling rates.
The following table lists the images used to perform HDMI audio testing using an internal
audio source.
Image
Description
Audio_1
Channel 1 output with adjustable amplitude.
Audio_1f
Audio_2
Audio_2f
Audio_3
Audio_3f
Audio_4
Audio_4f
Audio_5
Audio_5f
Audio_6
Audio_6f
Audio_7
Audio_7f
Audio_8
Audio_8f
Channel 1 output with adjustable frequency.
Channel 2 output with adjustable amplitude.
Channel 2 output with adjustable frequency.
Channel 3 output with adjustable amplitude.
Channel 3 output with adjustable frequency.
Channel 4 output with adjustable amplitude.
Channel 4 output with adjustable frequency.
Channel 5 output with adjustable amplitude.
Channel 5 output with adjustable frequency.
Channel 6 output with adjustable amplitude.
Channel 6 output with adjustable frequency.
Channel 7 output with adjustable amplitude.
Channel 7 output with adjustable frequency.
Channel 8 output with adjustable amplitude.
Channel 8 output with adjustable frequency.
To test an HDMI display using HDMI 8-channel audio from the generator:
1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.
2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.
•
up the generator for HDMI operation.
3. Using the Format knob, select either the DMT0660 or 480i2x29 format.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate image (see table above).
The image appears on the connected HDMI display. The image shows the current
settings for the HDMI audio output. For example, the Audio_1 image is shown below.
5. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates.
6. Using the Image knob, adjust the amplitude or frequency (based on the selected
image) of the HDMI audio output.
7. To verify proper HDMI audio handling, check the following on the HDMI display:
•
•
•
Audio is output from the proper channels.
When amplitude is adjusted, the volume is subsequently changed.
When frequency is adjusted, the pitch is subsequently changed.
8. When finished, press and release the Step key.
The light on the Step key extinguishes.
Testing HDMI audio using an external audio source
The generator provides basic, two-channel LPCM audio signals. However, it can encode
multichannel audio signals from an external SPDIF source (such as a DVD player) with the
HDMI content stream.
158
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To test an HDMI display using HDMI audio from an external source:
1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.
2. Connect the external audio source to the AV connector on the generator using the
RCA-to-VGA cable (part 30-00148) provided with the generator, as shown below:
To AV
connector
To audio source
Red
White
3. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.
•
up the generator for HDMI operation.
4. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI display.
5. Using the Image knob, select any desired image.
6. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator.
7. Configure the generator to use an external audio source by entering the following
command:
SDMG 2
FMTU
8. Set the sample frequency to match the frequency of the external source by entering the
following command:
ARAT 44.1E3 (example only)
Alternatively configure the generator to detect the audio sampling rate from the channel
header of the incoming digital audio.
ARAT 0.0
Note: The default frequency is 48 kHz (which is used by DVD players). However, if the
external source is an audio CD played on a DVD player, the player will output S/PDIF
with a sampling rate of 44.1 KHz (not 48 KHz). In this case, set the sampling frequency
to 44.1 kHz (or reload the format, which will detect the sampling frequency
automatically).
9. Turn on the external audio source.
The external audio signal will be encoded into the HDMI signal.
Note: The generator cannot independently control external source channels. You must
use the device generating the audio signal to control the channels.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. To verify proper HDMI audio handling, check the following on the HDMI display:
•
•
Audio is output from the proper channels (left, right, or both).
When the volume is adjusted at the external source, the volume is subsequently
changed.
160
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing HDMI InfoFrames
This section provides steps on how to test handling of auxiliary (InfoFrame) packets by an
HDMI display. The generator loads and sends default Auxiliary Video Information (XAVI),
Audio (XAUD), and Source Product Description (XSPD) InfoFrame packet buffers to the
and the XAUD InfoFrame packets are sent at every frame (repeated mode), while the
XSPD is sent only once. The XMPG and XGIF InfoFrames are gated off and not enabled.
Viewing InfoFrame contents
The 802 generator provides a convenient method for monitoring the InfoFrame content of
the transmitted HDMI signal.
To view current HDMI InfoFrame contents transmitted from the generator:
1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.
2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.
•
up the generator for HDMI operation.
3. Using the Format knob, select the HDMI format you want to test.
4. Using the Image knob, select the PacketTx image.
The PacketTx image appears on the connected HDMI display. The image shows the
current settings for the AVI InfoFrame output.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates.
6. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate InfoFrame type.
The contents of the appropriate InfoFrame output appears on the HDMI display.
7. When finished, press and release the Step key.
The light on the Step key extinguishes.
Testing with Active Format Description (AFD)
When transporting HDMI video images from a source to a display, different formats may
be used between the content, transmission signal, and display. To provide compatibility
between the different formats, Active Format Description (AFD) is used.
AFD describes the portion of the coded video frame that is "of interest" (or “active”). The
appropriate AFD information is transmitted with the video to the HDMI display as part of
AVI InfoFrame packets. Using AFD information, the display is able to present the image
optimally.
For AFD testing, the generator allows you to apply different AFD cases using the AFDtest
image, which provides 12 different cases (as image versions) for both 4:3 and 16:9
displays. As each image version appears, the appropriate AFD information is sent with the
video to the display.
The following table lists the AFD cases (as specified in the ETSI TR 101 154 v.1.4.1
standard) that are provided by the generator.
Image
Image
Version
Version
AFD case
(4:3 Format) (16:9 Format) Aspect Ratio of Active Area
2
8
7
box 16:9 (top)
3
5
4
box 14:9 (top)
4
9-12
0
9-12
6
box > 16:9 (center)
8
Same as the signal format
4:3 (center)
9
1
1
10
11
13
14
15
7
8
16:9 (center)
4
3
14:9 (centered)
3
5
4:3 (with shoot and protect 14:9 center)
16:9 (with shoot and protect 14:9 center)
16:9 (with shoot and protect 4:3 center)
6
2
2
0
162
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To test an HDMI display’s ability to support AFD:
1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.
3. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate video signal format. See the table on
page 149 for a listing of HDMI formats.
4. Using the Image knob, select the AFDtest image.
The AFDtest image appears on the connected HDMI display (as shown below).
5. Press the Step key.
The Step key illuminates, and the following image appears.
6. Using the Image knob, select an AFD scenario by selecting the appropriate image
version number (1-12).
Note: The image version number corresponds with the AFD case (or code). See the
case.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The image appears on the HDMI display. For example, the image representing AFD
case 11 (image version 4) on a 4:3 display is shown in the example below.
7. Using the selected AFD scenario, verify that the HDMI display presents the image
correctly.
Note: Displays use the AFD information to determine how to present an image.
Different displays may present HDMI video with the same AFD differently.
8. Using the Image knob, select additional AFD cases (as desired).
9. When finished, press and release the Step key.
The light on the Step key extinguishes.
164
Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
This chapter provides procedures for testing EDID generation and handling. The
generator can be configured to emulate an HDMI/DVI source when testing HDMI/DVI sink
(display) devices or it can be configured to emulate an HDMI/DVI sink (display) device
when testing an HDMI/DVI source device.
Some of the EDID tests require the analyzer option. These include testing the EDID
handling capabilities of a source device and the HDMI compliance EDID testing for a sink
(display) device. Viewing EDID of a display and writing to a display is a generator function
and does not require the analyzer option.
166
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EDID testing for source devices
The generator can emulate an HDMI/DVI sink (display) in order to test HDMI source
devices.
Testing response of source to EDID
The analyzer can emulate different HDMI/DVI displays using a built-in, configurable EDID
structure. With this capability an HDMI/DVI source device can be tested for its ability to
handle an EDID structure received from virtually any DDC-compatible display. You first
have to configure the generator to support the HDMI/DVI signal source and enable
measuring of internal signals. You then configure the EDID in accordance with a particular
display. Use the following procedures.
To set up the generator to perform HDMI/DVI testing:
1. Hold down the G and B keys, and then power on the generator.
The following message appears on the front panel LCD.
Special:
keys
Digital friendly
2. Release the G and B keys.
The generator is placed in Digital Friendly mode.
3. Hold down the R and ACS keys, and then cycle the power to the generator.
The following message appears on the front panel LCD.
Special:
keys
hot-plug formats
4. Hold down the Step, G, and B keys while starting the genertor, until Status display
appears on the LCD.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Release the Step, G, and B keys to enable status display on the generator (see
example below).
Color space
Color depth
Video type
Format name
H31
V60
D8C=DMT0659
0=SMPTE133
Image version
Image name
The format status on the LCD will indicate whether the unit is outputting HDMI or DVI
signal protocol from the Tx connector. An “H” in the format status (H8C in the example
above) indicates HDMI output; a “D” in the format status indicates DVI output.
Note: With the compliant Hot-plug Formats mode active and a hot-plug detected, the
generator automatically selects the appropriate TMDS output signal protocol (HDMI or
DVI) for the attached display (via EDID read).
To configure the analyzer for internal measurements:
1. Connect a digital display with the DVI or HDMI transmitter on the generator.
2. Select the Analzyer image.
The Analyzer Setup Utility appears on the connected display.
3. Press and release the Step key.
The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.
168
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Using the Image knob, select the ON setting to enable analyzer images.
5. Using the Format knob, select the Auto Based On field.
6. Using the Image knob, select CURRENT in the highlighted field to measure the
HDMI/DVI signal originating internally from the generator.
7. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.
The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the new settings are implemented for
analyzer mode operation.
To configure the analyzer to emulate the EDID structure of a display:
1. Determine the HDMI/DVI display you wish to emulate and if possible obtain a text file
of its EDID.
Note: This can be obtained from the manufacturer or by reading the EDID using the
HDMI/DVI generator. For procedures on reading the EDID of a display with the
2. Connect an HDMI/DVI cable between the HDMI/DVI Tx and Rx connectors on the
generator.
14).
For example, to change the color characteristics of the EDID structure (a total of 10
bytes starting at byte 19), you could use the following command strings:
XDID 19 A E88A82A0564796240F48
DIDU
To program multiple segments (or the entire EDID structure) at once, create a text file
containing the EDID. Then send the text file to the generator using your terminal
emulator’s file transfer feature.
The following commands write the entire EDID block 0:
XDID 0 80 00FFFFFFFFFFFF005A63118F01010101130D010380221B782A4706A55C47
9C251E4F54BFEF008180310A010101010101010101010101302A009851002A40307013
00520E1100001E000000FF004132333033313931353335390A000000FD00324B1E530E
000A202020202020000000FC0056583730302D330A20202020200095
DIDU
EDID structure in ASCII hex format.
the requested EDID in ASCII hex format.
analyzer’s receiver.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To test the source device’s handling of the EDID:
1. Connect the HDMI/DVI source device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.
Upon receiving the HDMI/DVI signal at the HDMI/DVI Rx connector, the generator
sends the EDID structure to the source device.
2. At the HDMI/DVI source device, compare the processed EDID information with the
EDID structure defined in the generator.
170
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EDID testing for sink devices
The generator can emulate an HDMI, DVI or VGA source device in order to test HDMI, DVI
or VGA displays. This includes viewing EDID from a display and writing EDID data to a
display. The generator can test an HDMI display device’s EDID structure and transmission
in accordance with the HDMI Compliance Test Specification 1.0.
Viewing EDID from a display
You can use the generator to view EDID from a DDC-compliant VGA, HDMI or DVI display
connected with the generator.
To view EDID information from an HDMI, DVI or VGA display:
1. Connect an HDMI, DVI or VGA device to the HDMI, DVI or VGA Tx connector on the
generator.
2. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the HDMI, DVI or VGA display
connected to the HDMI, DVI or VGA Tx connector.
Alternatively, to automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID of the
display, hold down the R key, and then press and release the ACS key.
3. Using the Image knob, select the EdidData image.
The EdidData image displays the first block of data.
4. Press the Step key, turn the Image knob to the first EDID block.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To view parsed EDID information, press and release the Step key, and then turn the
Image knob to view additional blocks and parsed data.
To query EDID information from an HDMI, DVI or VGA display via the command line:
14).
Querying the EDID from the command line enables you to create a text file with the
EDID in order to configure the analyzer to emulate the display device.
Writing EDID data to a display
You can modify the EDID in the connected display, if the EEPROM in the display is
writable.
To modify the EDID in a display:
1. Connect the display to be modified to the HDMI, DVI or VGA Tx connector on the
generator.
14).
172
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, to change the color characteristics of the EDID structure (a total of 10
bytes starting at byte 19), you could use the following command string:
i2cw eprom1 a0 25 A E88A82A0564796240F48
4. To program multiple segments or a complete EDID structure, use a text editor to enter
the commands in a text file, and then download the file to the generator from a terminal
emulator program such as HyperTerminal.
Testing EDID in HDMI sink device for HDMI compliance
The analyzer supports the following EDID and video HDMI compliance tests in
accordance with the HDMI Compliance Test Specification 1.0 (CTS):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Test ID 8-1: EDID Readable
Test ID 8-2: EDID VESA Structure
Test ID 8-3: CEA Timing Extension Structure
Test ID 8-17: 861B Format Support Requirements
Test ID 8-18: HDMI Format Support Requirements
Test ID 8-19: Pixel Encoding Requirements
Test ID 8-20: Video Format Timing
These tests are intended for in-house testing of products before submission to an HDMI
ATC for full certification testing.
Overview of HDMI compliance testing
HDMI compliance testing is conducted through the generator’s transmit HDMI connector.
A standard HDMI-to-HDMI cable is used between the device under test and the generator.
The generator must be placed in the digital friendly mode and set to output HDMI signals,
which is the default configuration for HDMI equipped generators.
After making the physical connections you need to specify the capabilities of the sink
display under test. This enables the generator to compare the expected results with the
actual results measured from the display. Use the CDF_Sink image, which is based on the
Capabilities Declaration Form (Appendix 3) of the Compliance Test Specification, to
specify the display capabilities.
To test the sink device, load the EdidHDMI image, and turn the image knob to advance
through each test listed above in sequence.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing HDMI sink devices for EDID compliance
The procedures for EDID and video testing of HDMI sink devices in accordance with the
HDMI Compliance Test Specification 1.0 are provided below.
Note: The EDID and video tests should be performed in sequence as a single test series.
Each test is dependent on successful completion of the previous test.
To set up the generator for HDMI compliance testing:
1. Hold down the G and B keys, and then power on the generator.
The following message appears on the front panel LCD.
Special:
keys
Digital friendly
2. Release the G and B keys.
The generator is placed in Digital Friendly mode.
3. Select and apply a valid HDMI format such as DMT0660 either by turning the Format
knob or entering the following command:
FMTL DMT0660; FMTU
4. Load the GenOps image to verify that the generator is configured to output HDMI (that
it is not in DVI-only mode).
The generator’s default configuration is to output HDMI. Note that the display status
mode will indicate that the generator is in HDMI mode with an “H” character. You can
also verify that the generator is putting out an HDMI signal by issuing the following
command:
HDMI?
The returned value should be 1 indicating HDMI output.
174
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To specify the capabilities of the sink device:
1. Load the CDF_Sink image, which is shown below.
2. Press and release the Step key to enable selection of each field. Use the Format knob
to position the cursor. Use the Image knob to choose values.
For example, if your display supports both 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios, set the
Sink_PrimaryAR field to Both.
3. Press the Step (Exit) key to save the settings. The settings are stored until you change
them, and are kept if the generator is restarted.
To initiate the compliance testing:
1. Load the EdidHDMI image.
2. Press and release the STEP key, then turn the Image knob to progress through the
tests in the sequence below.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing EDID readability (Test ID 8-1) - This test verifies that the EDID can be read
properly. The screens are shown below.
(
176
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing EDID VESA structure (Test ID 8-2) - This test verifies that the data in the base
EDID 1.3 block and basic EDID Extension handling is correct and meets all aspects of the
relevant specifications.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing CEA timing extension structure (Test ID 8-3) - This test verifies that the data in any
CEA Timing Extension present in EDID is formatted properly and meets all aspects of the
relevant specifications.
178
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing 861B Format Support Requirements (Test ID 8-17) - This test verifies that no
861B-defined video format is declared only in a Detailed Timing Descriptor.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing HDMI Format Support Requirements (Test ID 8-18) - This test verifies that Sink
DUT indicates support for all required video formats in its EDID.
180
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing Pixel Encoding Requirements (Test ID 8-19) - Verifies that the Sink supports
YCpCr pixel encoding when required.
To create a knob list of all formats supported by the display:
1. Press and release the STEP key to return to the initial compliance testing screen.
The STEP key should be extinguished.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press and hold the R key and then press and release the ACS key. Alternatively power
off the generator, press and hold both the R and ACS keys then power up the generator
to configure the generator knob list with the hot plug formats.
The initial compliance test screen re-appears and the Format knob list includes only
those formats in the display EDID.
Visual verification of formats
Additional visual inspection of Tests 8-19 and 8-20 is necessary to ensure that each
format can be loaded and displayed at each pixel encoding and at its minimum and
maximum pixel rate.
Test ID 8-19 involves testing each format with different YCbCr pixel encoding: 4:4:4 pixel
sampling and 4:2:2 sampling. Test ID 8-20 requires that each format listed in the EDID be
be tested at two different pixel clock frequencies. The two different frequencies shall be the
minimum and maximum permitted by a Source. For 50Hz formats, these values are
49.75Hz and 50.25Hz (50Hz 0.5%). For 59.94Hz or 60Hz formats, these frequencies are
59.64Hz (59.94Hz – 0.5%) and 60.3Hz (60Hz + 0.5%). The tested pixel clock frequency
accuracy shall be 0.05%.
A separate listing of the formats is provided on the Format knob list to support this visual
inspection testing. The nomenclature for visual inspection testing of maximum and
minimum pixel rate is of the form shown in the example below:
182
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example
SV D 01 Y 2
1
Short
Video
Descriptor
VIC
Component
Format
Index
color
sampling
•
•
SVD – Short Video Descriptor.
01 – EIA/CEA-861-B Format Video Identification Code (for example 01, 02, 06, etc.
•
•
Y2 – Y indicates color difference. 2 = 4:2:2 pixel sample encoding. 4 = 4:4:4.
1 – Represents DMT0659 format, which is first format (index 1) listed under video
The nomenclature for visual inspection testing for pixel encoding is of the form shown in
the example below:
1
SVD 01 H 0
Short
Video
Descriptor
VIC
Format
Index
Frequency
(High / Low)
•
•
SVD – Short Video Descriptor.
01 – EIA/CEA-861-B Format Video Identification Code (for example 01, 02, 06, etc.
•
•
H – Indicates that format is using maximum (H = High) or minimum (L = Low)
frequency required by compliance test.
To visually validate the formats in the knob list for pixel encodings and pixel rate:
1. Select an image suitable for testing the display type by turning the Image knob or
entering the appropriate command. For example to display the Master image enter:
IMGL Master; IMGU
2. Turn the format knob to display each of the formats in the knob list that begin with SVD.
Each format should display properly.
3. Turn the format knob to display each of the formats in the knob list.
Each format should display properly.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Chapter 10 Testing EDID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11 Testing HDCP
You can use the generator, with the High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP)
option installed, to test HDCP 1.0 and 1.1 compliant devices.
Topics in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing DVI or HDMI receiver with HDCP
This section describes how to test DVI and HDMI receivers with HDCP.
All DVI and HDMI options, including analyzer options, support HDCP production keys if
the HDCP option is installed. Some DVI options support both production and public keys.
To determine which HDCP keys your generator supports:
1. Load the GenStats image.
2. Verify that HDCP is listed under the Options heading, which indicates that the HDCP
option is installed, and that production keys are available.
3. If the following image names are listed on the LCD, then HDCP public (test) keys are
installed.
•
•
•
•
HdcpA1B1
HdcpA1B2
HdcpA2B1
HdcpA2B2
Note: With older firmware installed, you may be able to select these images, but an
“Image is not available” message is displayed on the display connected with the
generator. This message indicates that public keys are not installed.
To test HDCP with a DVI device:
1. Hold down the G and B key while starting the generator put the generator in digital
friendly mode.
Alternatively, enter the following command:
SROP 2
2. Connect the DVI transmitter on the generator to the device’s DVI receiver.
3. Select an appropriate HDCP test image.
If you are testing a device with a production key, select the HdcpProd(uction) image.
The HdcpProd image assumes that both the HDCP transmitter and receiver have a
production key.
If your generator supports public keys, select the appropriate image below. For
example, if the receiver has pubic key B2, and you want to use public key A1 in the
transmitter, then select the HdcpA1B2 image.
•
•
•
HdcpA1B1
HdcpA1B2
HdcpA2B1
186
Chapter 11 Testing HDCP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
HdcpA2B
4. To test another device, connect the cable to the new device.
The HDCP test starts automatically.
To test HDCP with an HDMI device:
1. Hold down the G and B key while starting the generator put the generator in digital
friendly mode.
Alternatively, enter the following command:
SROP 2
2. Connect the HDMI transmitter on the generator to the device’s HDMI receiver.
3. Select the HdcpProd(uction) image.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing HDCP between HDMI transmitter and DVI receiver
HDCP 1.1-compliant devices must interoperate with HDCP 1.0 compliant devices using
the DVI protocol. Generators with an HDMI transmitter can be used to test HDCP with
devices that have an DVI receiver.
To test HDMI Tx with DVI Rx:
1. Hold down the G and B key while starting the generator put the generator in digital
friendly mode.
Alternatively, enter the following command:
SROP 2
2. Establish a command terminal connection with the generator, using HyperTerminal or
VGM.
3. At the R:> prompt, enter the following to set the HDMI transmitter into DVI mode, which
disables audio:
HDMI 0
ALLU
The DVI mode setting is saved until you change it.
4. Use an HDMI-to-DVI cable (provided with HDMI generator) to connect the HDMI
transmitter to the DVI receiver.
5. Load the HdcpProd image. This image assumes that both the transmitter and receiver
are using production keys.
To change HDMI transmitter from DVI to HDMI mode:
1. Establish a command terminal connection with the generator, using HyperTerminal or
VGM.
2. At the R:> prompt enter the following to invoke the HDMI mode:
HDMI 1
ALLU
188
Chapter 11 Testing HDCP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing HDCP with static images
The standard HDCP test images have color bars in the background. A special mode is
available for testing HDCP with any static background image you specify.
To test HDCP with a different background image:
1. Turn on the generator while holding down the G and ACS keys until hdcp tester is
displayed.
Alternatively, enter the following command:
SROP 8192
2. Select a format that is supported by the display, and then load any static image.
The HDCP test begins automatically when you connect the display.
If the HDCP test passed, the generator displays the image you specified. If the test
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using command-line interface to control HDCP
The command interface can control HDCP tests in automated testing environments.
To run HDCP test from command prompt:
1. Establish a command terminal connection with the generator using VGM or
HyperTerminal.
2. Connect the device to be tested to the transmitter on the generator.
3. At the R:> prompt, enter the following command to run the HDCP test:
HDCP?
HDCP? command
The HDCP? command is the only command used to control HDCP tests.
Syntax HDCP? [ A1 | A2 ] [ B1 | B2 ] [frames]
Where frames is the number of frames to be tested. The default number of frames is 512.
Example These examples demonstrate how to specify which test to run.
Command
Result
hdcp?
Runs test with production keys for 512 (default) frames, and then returns 0 if
the test passed, or an error number if the test failed.
hdcp? 2000
hdcp? a1 b1
Run test with production keys for 2000 frames.
Runs test with public keys A1 and B1 for 512 frames.
hdcp? a2 b1 2000 Runs test with public keys A2 and B1 for 2000 frames.
Error codes These errors may occur when using the HDCP? command.
Code
Meaning
9520
HDCP key combination is not supported. Valid combinations are A1/B1,
A2/B1, A1/B2, and A1/B2.
9521
9522
9508
Test started successfully, but failed during test.
Test did not start.
Specified keys are not present.
190
Chapter 11 Testing HDCP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting HDCP errors
Common problems
This table describes possible solutions to problems that may occur during HDCP testing.
Problem
Test fails at step 3
Solution
Transmitter could not read Bksv from the receiver, Bksv was read cor-
rectly but is a wrong value, or an I2C error occurred.
If the EdidData image loads, the I2C communication is working properly.
Verify that the Bksv value is 5 bytes (that is, 40 bits of which 20 zeros
and 20 ones) by reading the value from the test image.
HdcpProd image flashes Restart the generator while holding down the Outputs key, or use the
repeatedly at step 9
SROP 16 command, which starts the generator in “Reset HDCP Rx by
gating clock” mode.
HdcpProd image is
unavailable
The HdcpProd image requires the HDCP production key option to be
installed in the generator. To determine if this option is installed, view
the GenStats image. The HDCP option will be listed under the Options
heading if it is present.
Running HDCP test in step mode
The generator normally runs the steps in the HDCP test automatically. If the test fails, the
test is restarted after a few seconds, which makes it difficult to read values at the step
where the test failed. Run any HDCP test in manual mode to pause the test after each
step.
To run the HDCP test in step mode:
1. At any step during an HDCP test, press the Step key.
2. Turn the Image knob to advance to the next step. If you are using an PCI-based
generator, use the commands displayed on the screen to advance to the next step.
3. Press the Step key again to return to automatic mode.
Running an HDCP self-test
An HDCP self-test checks that HDCP authentication is working properly between the
transmitter and receiver on the analyzer. This test can also be used to confirm that a cable
is not interfering with HDCP authentication, and that the DDC clock and DDC data pins,
which the I2C buss uses, are working correctly.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To run an HDCP self-test:
1. Hold down the G and B key while starting the generator put the generator in digital
friendly mode.
Alternatively, enter the following command:
SROP 2
2. Connect your cable to the Rx and Tx on the analyzer.
3. Select the HdcpProd image.
When testing a display, the HDCP test results are displayed on the display being tested.
When testing a cable, where no display is connected to the transmitter, test results are
displayed by the LCD display on the generator. If HDCP authentication is working
correctly, the name of the HdcpProd image on the LCD will be updated with Ri values
every 2 seconds. If HDCP is not working, the LDC display will remain static.
Understanding the HDCP test
Understanding what the generator does during an HDCP test can help you determine why
an HDCP test failed.
To determine which hardware is installed:
1. Load the GenStats image.
2. Compare the following table with the GenStats image to determine which hardware is
installed.
GenStats information
Hardware
DVI (SiI) (under Options) and DVI FPGA less Silicon Image
than F1 (under Generator Information)
DVI (under Options)
Broadcom
DVI Analyzer (under Options)
Silicon Image
Silicon Image
DVI II (under Options) and DVI FPGA F1 or
later (under Generator Information)
DVI II (under Options) and DVI FPGA is earlier Broadcom
than F1 (under Generator Information)
HDMI (under Options)
Silicon Image
Silicon Image
HDMI Analyzer (under Options)
Test sequence for Broadcom transmitters:
1. The generator resets the transmitter and its HDCP engine.
192
Chapter 11 Testing HDCP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the “Reset HDCP Rx by gating clock” mode is enabled, the generator resets the
receiver, and gates off transmitter clock and data for 400 mS. Otherwise, the receiver
is not reset.
3. The transmitter reads the Bksv (HDCP receiver KSV), over the I2C bus, and verifies
that it has 20 zeros and 20 ones.
This step is the first interaction between the transmitter and receiver.
4. Receiver writes the receiver KSV to the transmitter.
5. Transmitter generates An (session random number).
6. Transmitter writes An to the receiver, using the I2C bus.
7. Transmitter writes the transmitter KSV to the receiver, using the I2C bus.
8. Load the transmitter keys.
9. The transmitter reads the Ri value (link verification response) from the receiver and
compares it with its own generated Ri value. They should match to proceed. If this step
fails, the test returns to step 1.
10. Generate authentication.
11. Transmitting encrypted data.
Test sequence for Silicon Image transmitters:
1. Reset the transmitter.
2. If the “Reset HDCP Rx by gating clock” mode is enabled, the generator initializes the
transmitter. Otherwise, do not initialize the transmitter.
3. Transmitter generates An (session random number).
4. Transmitter writes An to the receiver, using the I2C bus.
This step is the first interaction between the transmitter and receiver. The transmitter
reads the Bksv, over the I2C bus, and verifies that it has 20 zeros and 20 ones.
5. Write the transmitter KSV to the receiver.
6. Read and verify the receiver KSV.
7. Write receiver KSV to transmitter.
8. Ri ready at transmitter.
9. The transmitter reads the Ri value from the receiver and compares it with its own
generated Ri value. They should match to proceed. If this step fails, the test returns to
step 1.
10. Generate authentication.
11. Transmitting encrypted data.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Chapter 11 Testing HDCP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
The generator is equipped with a Special Sync BNC connector labeled S/S on the front
right side. You can configure the output of this video interface to output frame sync, line
sync, composite sync or a special probe pulse.
196
Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating special sync for probe pulse
The probe feature is used in connection with a programmable probe pulse that is available
on the S/S BNC. This pulse is most often used to trigger an oscilloscope or synchronize an
inspection camera. The probe feature allows you to position the leading edge of the probe
pulse anywhere within the video frame. This feature greatly facilitates troubleshooting by
enabling you to focus on specific video signal problems occurring anywhere in the video
signal.
Configuring the probe feature involves positioning the probe pulse in the desired location
on the video frame. You can do this either through the front panel or the command line
interface. The front panel display is most convenient if you are near the generator and not
using a computer or terminal. You can control the generator through the command line
interface either locally or remotely through the serial connection.
Front panel controls and indicators
To use the probe feature begin by first activating the probe feature through the generator
keys, and then positioning the pulse in the desired location by turning the Format knob
(horizontal position) and the Image knob (vertical position). The current position of the
pulse is shown on the LCD.
Probe coordinate numbering
Unlike ITU and SMPTE standards, Quantum Data standards count pixels, lines, and
coordinates beginning with the number zero (not one) to improve the mapping between
video signal specifications and modern computer graphics coordinates. The television
standards are accounted for by suppressing any half-active line that appears in an
equalizing interval and lengthening (to a full line) any half-active line that begins in the
active portion of a field. Vertical counting always begins with the leading edge of blanking
of the first field (not vertical sync). The first field is always defined as the field that includes
the top line of the displayed picture (Y:0). This definition is always true whether the total
number of active lines is odd or even.
With interlaced scanning, lines continue to be numbered sequentially throughout the
frame, beginning with the leading edge of blanking of the first field. Therefore, the first two
lines of blanking in the first field are numbered L:0 followed by L:1. If you have 525 total
lines and 486 of those are active, for example, the first two (blank) lines of the second field
would be numbered L:262 and L:263. The Y position continues to follow the visual order of
lines going from the top to the bottom of the screen. If the last line of blanking in the first
field is L:18, then L:19 corresponds to Y:0, L:20 to Y:2, L:21 to Y:4 and so on. In the
second field, L:282 would correspond to Y:1, L:283 to Y:3, L:284 to Y:5 and so on.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the probe feature
This section describes how to configure the probe feature.
To enable the probe feature:
1. Deactivate the signal outputs of the generator by pressing the Outputs key. The light
on the Outputs key extinguishes.
2. Hold down the Step key, and then press and release the Outputs key. The LCD
displays a Probe feature message, and then the following screen.
3. Release the Step key.
Setting sensitivity of knobs
You can control the amount of distance traveled with each click of the Format and Image
knobs by using the ACS, DCS, and DSS keys. If neither ACS, DCS, nor DSS is selected,
then the amount of movement is increased exponentially as you move farther in a particular
direction and is reset when you change direction.
To set the sensitivity of the Format and Image knobs:
1. Press the appropriate key:
Sensitivity
Procedure
100 pixels/lines per knob click
Press the ACS key. The key illuminates.
10 pixels/lines per knob click
1 pixel/line per knob click
Press the DCS key. The key illuminates.
Press the DSS key. The key illuminates.
Controlling probe using generator controls
This section procedures for controlling the special sync probe through the front panel keys
and knobs.
To position the probe pulse in a specific location in the video signal:
1. Turn the Format knob to set the horizontal position of the probe pulse to the desired
pixel relative to the leading edge of the horizontal sync.
The horizontal position of the probe is simultaneously displayed in two different ways:
•
The horizontal position P:nnnn is given in pixels relative to the leading edge of the
horizontal sync.
•
If the leading edge of the probe is within the active portion of a line, an alternate
horizontal position X:nnnn is also displayed, indicating the number of pixels
198
Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
between the start of active video (X:0) and the leading edge of the probe pulse in
the horizontal direction.
2. Set the vertical position by turning the Image knob.
The vertical position of the probe is simultaneously displayed in two different ways:
•
The vertical position L:nnnn is given in whole scan lines relative to the leading edge
of blanking of the frame or first field.
•
If the probe is within the active portion of the frame, an alternate vertical position
Y:nnnn is also displayed, indicating the number of lines between the start of active
(Y:0) and the leading edge of the probe in the vertical direction.
To position and activate the probe pulse:
1. Press the Step key. The cursor appears. You may have to turn the Format and Image
knobs to move the cursor into the active video. This feature allows you to visually move
the probe to an area of interest (within the active portion of the frame) without using
numerical coordinates.
2. Turn the Format knob to move the cursor horizontally. Turn the Image knob to move
the cursor vertically.
3. Activate the probe pulse.
Action
Activate the probe pulse on the specified Press the R and G keys. The light on the
scan line keys extinguish.
Activate the probe pulse on all active scan Press the R key. The light on the key
lines at the same horizontal position illuminates.
Activate the probe pulse on all scan lines, Press the G key. The light on the key
Procedure
whether active or not at the same
horizontal position
illuminates.
Controlling probe using command line interface
Using the command line interface to control the probe provides more control, enables you
to change the polarity and width, and to change the format and image while maintaining
the probe pulse parameters.
To configure the probe feature:
1. Enable the probe feature by entering the following commands:
)
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PSHD 100 // set pulse horizontal position at 100 pixels from leading
-
edge of vertical blanking, in range from 0<=PSVD<(VTOT-1)
// apply the settings
To set the lines on which the probe pulse occurs:
1. Send the appropriate command:
Set the probe pulse to occur
Command
Once per frame
PSPM 0
Once every active line
Once every line
PSPM 1
PSPM 3
200
Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring special sync for FS, LS or CS
The special sync output can provide frame sync, line sync, or composite sync signals. The
output is controlled by setting parameters of these signals through the command line
interface. The following commands are used to set the special sync signal:
•
•
•
•
FSPG - Frame sync
PSPG - Probe signal
LSPG - Line sync
CSPG - Composite sync
Note: The special sync output is disabled whenever these parameters are set to zero.
A frame pulse can be generated and output at the beginning of each frame. In the case of
interlaced video, the frame pulse is output at the beginning of the blanking interval (of the
first field) that immediately precedes the top line of active video.
Field 0
Field 1
Blank
Active
Blank
Active
VID
VS
FS
VSPD (lines)
FSPD (lines)
FSPG=1, FSPP=1
FSPG=1, FSPP=0
FSPW (pixels)
FS
To configure frame sync on the special sync output:
1. Enable the frame sync by entering the following command:
FSPG 1
enabled.
2. Set the frame pulse polarity (either 0 for low or 1 for high) by entering the following
command:
FSPP 1
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the frame pulse pixel width (in the range from 1 pixel to HTOT - 1) by entering the
following command:
FSPW 100
0]) by entering the following command:
-
FSPD 10
5. Save these settings by entering the following command:
To configure line sync on the special sync output:
1. Enable the line sync signal by entering the following commands:
FSPG 0
PSPG 0
LSPG 1
2. Set the line sync pulse polarity by entering the following command:
LSPP 1
// 1 = high (default)
To configure composite sync on the special sync output:
1. Enable digital composite sync by entering the following command:
SSST 2 (or 6,11)
Alternatively, you can press the DCS key on the front panel.
2. Enable the composite sync signal by entering the following commands:
FSPG 0
PSPG 0
LSPG 0
CSPG 1
3. Set the composite sync pulse polarity by entering the following commands:
CSPP 1
// 1 = high (default)
202
Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*DDT
Delay Device Trigger
Class Trigger
Description Specifies a command or command string to be executed when the generator is “triggered”
with the *TRG command. Only one *DDT command can be pending at a time. The
command or query arguments must be enclosed in quotes.
Command syntax *DDT “command_1; command_2 ... command_n”
Example *DDT “imgl flat; imgu”
*TRG // to invoke the command line in quotes from the *DDT command
206
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*ESE
Event Status Enable
Class GPIB
Description Sets the Event Status Enable register to the given mask value. The bits in the Event Status
Enable register function as enable bits for each corresponding bit in the Event Status
register. That is, when a bit in the Event Status register goes high, and the corresponding
bit in the Event Status Enable register is a 1, it is enabled and will cause the ESB bit in the
Status Byte register to go high.
The *ESE? query returns the current value of the Event Status Enable register.
Command syntax *ESE mask
mask
0 - 255
Example *ESE 8
Query syntax *ESE?
Query response mask NL
Where mask is in integer NR1 form.
Video Test Generator User Guide
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*ESR?
Event Status Register
Class GPIB
Description Returns the current value of the Event Status register. After this command is executed, the
Event Status register is cleared. This is the only way of clearing any bit in the Event Status
register except by the *CLS command.
Query syntax *ESR?
Returns registerValue NL
Where registerValue is in integer NR1 form.
208
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*IDN?
IDeNtification
Class GPIB
Description Returns an equipment identification string formatted per IEEE-488.2 standards.
Query syntax *IDN?
Returns Company,Model,SerialNumber,FirmwareVersion
Company
Always QuantumData.
Model
Product model description.
SerialNumber
Serial number of nonvolatile SRAM module (Dallas chip) in generator.
FirmwareVersion
Version number of currently installed firmware.
Example R:\*idn?
QuantumData,802BT-DVI-AN,7514191,7.38380000
Video Test Generator User Guide
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*OPC
OPeration Complete
Class GPIB
Description Causes the 882 to set the OPC bit in the Event Status register when all operations have
been completed. Since there are no overlapping commands, the *OPC command will set
the OPC bit immediately when executed.
The *OPC query will put a 1 in the output buffer when all operations are complete.
Command syntax *OPC
Query syntax *OPC?
Returns NL
210
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*RST
ReSet
Class GPIB
Description Performs a device reset. This places the 882 into a known condition. These conditions
are:
•
•
•
•
IEEE-488 address set to 15
Status Byte cleared
Input queue empty
Output queue empty
Command syntax *RST
Video Test Generator User Guide
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*SRE
Service Request Enable
Class GPIB
Description Sets the Service Request Enable register to the mask value given. The bits in the Service
Request Enable register function as enable bits for each corresponding bit in the Status
Byte register to enable a condition to request service from the system controller. That is,
when a bit in the Status Byte register goes true, and the corresponding bit in the Service
Request Enable register is also true, the 882 will request service through the GPIB. The
*SRE query returns the current value of the Service Request Enable register.
Command syntax *SRE mask
mask
0 - 255
Example *SRE 16
Query syntax *SRE?
Returns mask NL
Where mask is in integer NR1 form.
212
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*STB
STatus Byte
Class GPIB
Description Returns the current value of the Status Byte register. The value stored in the Status Byte
register is not affected by reading it.
Query syntax *STB?
Returns statusByte<NL>
Where statusByte is in integer NR1 form.
Video Test Generator User Guide
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*TRG
TRiGger
Class GPIB port control
Description Triggers the generator programmatically. The *TRG command is used to trigger a
command or command string entered with the *TRG command.
Command syntax *TRG
Example *DDT “imgl flat;imgu”
*TRG // Invoke the command line in quotes from the *DDT command
214
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*TST
self TeST
Class GPIB port control
Definition: Causes the 882 to perform a self-test and report the results in a response message. If the
self-test fails, an ASCII "1" is placed in the output buffer; otherwise, an ASCII "0" is placed
in the output buffer.
Query syntax *TST?
Returns result<NL>
Where result is in integer NR1 form.
Video Test Generator User Guide
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*WAI
WAIt for completion suffix
Class GPIB port control
Description Causes the generator to wait until all processes have been completed before sending the
prompt. Normally, the generator returns a prompt immediately after either an FMTU,
IMGU, ALLU, BOOT, INIT, or SCAL command is received, even before these commands
have finished executing. If the system controlling the generator must know when a
command has finished executing, use a semicolon to append the suffix … ;*WAI. .
Command syntax command; *WAI
command
FMTU, IMGU, ALLU, BOOT, INIT, or SCAL
Example FMTL vga_m3
// Load a format from memory to buffer
IMGL SMPTE133 // Load the SMPTE RP-133 image to buffer
ALLU; *WAI
// Update hardware to current buffer contents and delay
// prompt until all done
216
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDR
memory ADDRess
Class Direct processor control
Description Sets the pointer register that is used in connection with the PUTR command and GETR?
query. The ADDR? query returns the current contents of the pointer register.
Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by
Quantum Data.
Command syntax ADDR address
address
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
Query syntax ADDR?
Query response address
Other required ADDR and ADDR? expect and return parameters formatted according to the current radix
commands
Video Test Generator User Guide
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADOT
draw A single pixel DOT
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a single pixel dot. A dot is the smallest graphic element that can be drawn. It uses
three parameters: the color and the X and Y coordinates.
Command syntax ADOT color x y
color
available colors
x
y
positive integer number
positive integer number
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example ADOT White 200 300 // Draw white dot at X = 200 Y = 300
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
218
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALIN
create ALIas New
Class Alias
Description Creates an alias for an object such as a format, image or test sequence. You can create
more than one alias name for an object.
Command syntax ALIN alias object
Example ALIN MYDMTFMT DMT0675 // creates alias format for format DMT0675
220
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALIQ?
ALIas Query
Class Alias
Description Lists alias names.
Query syntax ALIQ? start count
Example ALIQ? 1 20 // show alias names from first alias name through 20th alias
ALIN to create an alias name.
Video Test Generator User Guide
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALLE
end ALL Editor sessions
Class Directory, format, image and sequence editor control
Description Same as entering all of the DIRE, FMTE, IMGE and SEQE commands.
Command syntax ALLE
222
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALLU
ALL Use
Class System control
Description Checks the current contents of the format buffer for errors. If no errors are found, it
reconfigures the signal generating hardware in accordance with the contents. Next, the
current test image is re-rendered using the latest system and format parameter data.
Command syntax ALLU
Other required This command updates the generator after using the FMTL, IMGL and SEQL commands
commands
to load new files from memory. This command also can be used to see the results of work
when using commands to edit formats or custom images.
Example FMTL vga_m3 // Load a format from memory to buffer
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AMAP
render A pixel MAP
Class Bitmap image control
Description Renders (copies) a pixel map stored in the generator as name to the frame buffer. The
bitmap will be placed so that the top left corner will be at the given x, y location in the
frame buffer.
Command syntax AMAP x y name
x, y
location
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax AMAP?
Example AMAP 0 0 myicon // Renders a pixel map called “myicon”
// in the top left corner of active video
224
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANIG
ANalyzer Image Gate
Class DVI signal analyzer
Description Activates or deactivates the FormatRx and DeltaErr analyzer images.
Command syntax ANIG gate
gate
0 = analyzer images are not activated
1 = analyzer images are activated
Query syntax ANIG?
Query response 0 or 1
Example ANIG 1 // activates analyzer images
IMGL FormatRx; IMGU //outputs FormatRx image
Video Test Generator User Guide
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANIM?
current test image has ANIMation
Class Image editor control
Description Returns a flag indicating if the image currently being displayed is animated.
Query syntax ANIM? imageName
Query response 0 = Not animated (static image) or the image was not found.
1 = Animated.
Example ANIM? cubes // to determine if the “cubes” image has animation
1
// response indicates that “cubes” is an animated image
226
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANTI
ANTI-alias
Class Image drawing primitives
Description Causes other primitives to be drawn using anti-aliasing on diagonal edges when
appearing anywhere in a custom image. This command affects only television formats on
801GX generators. It causes the leading and trailing edges of rectangles to have
controlled rise and fall times.
Command syntax ANTI
commands
anti-aliased primitives.
Video Test Generator User Guide
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARAT
Audio sampling RATe
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Sets the sampling rate of the audio stream output from the generator. This sets the CT
parameter of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 20).
Command syntax ARAT rate
rate
192.0E3
176.4E3
96.0E3
88.2E3
48.0E3 (default)
44.1E3
32.0E3
Example ARAT 48.0E3
IFGU
228
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AROW
render A ROW of pixels
Class Bitmap image control
Description Renders (copies) binary stored as a hexstring to the frame buffer. The bitmap will be
placed so that the top left corner will be at the given x, y location in the frame buffer.
Command syntax AROW x y bpp hexstring
Query syntax AROW?
Example AROW 5 5 4 02D // render hex data “02D” directly into frame
// buffer at location 5, 5 at a depth of
// 4 bits-per-pixel
Video Test Generator User Guide
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASBG
Analog Sync on Blue Gating
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Enables and disables adding composite sync to the blue analog video outputs when
analog sync is selected (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being
generated (see AVST command). The ASBG? query returns the current setting of ASBG.
See the ASSG command description for information on simultaneously controlling red,
green and blue sync gating.
Command syntax ASBG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax ASBG?
Query response mode
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example ASBG 1 // Enable comp sync on blue in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
230
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASCT
Analog Sync Composite Type
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Sets the kind of composite sync added to the analog video outputs when analog sync is
enabled (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being generated (see AVST
command). The ASCT? query returns the current setting of ASCT. A setting of zero (0)
indicates that the ACS sync selection cannot be activated by the operator.
Command syntax ASCT type
type
0 = none
1 = American HDTV ORed
2 = American ORed
3 = American w/serr
4 = American w/serr & eq
5 = European HDTV ORed
6 = European ORed
7 = European w/serr
8 = European w/serr & eq
9 = American HDTV w/serr
10 = American HDTV w/serr & eq
11 = European HDTV w/serr
12 = European HDTV w/serr & eq
13 = Japanese HDTV ORed
14 = Japanese HDTV w/serr
15 = Japanese HDTV w/serr & eq
Query syntax ASCT?
Query response type
Video Test Generator User Guide
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other required The SSST mode must be set to 4, 5, 6, or 7 and the AVST type must be set to 1, 2 or 5 in
commands
order for the ASCT setting to have any affect on the generator's hardware outputs. The
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example ASCT 2 // Enable Amer ORed comp sync in buffer
SSST 4 // Enable ACS
AVST 2 // Select analog RGB as video type
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
232
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASGG
Analog Sync on Green Gating
Class (Obsolete) Format parameter
Description Enables and disables adding composite sync to the green analog video outputs when
analog sync is selected (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being
generated (see AVST command). The ASGG? query returns the current setting of ASGG.
See the ASSG command description for information on simultaneously controlling red,
green and green sync gating.
Command syntax ASGG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax ASGG?
Query response mode
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example ASGG 1 // Enable comp sync on green in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASRG
Analog Sync on Red Gating
Class (Obsolete) Format parameter
Description Enables and disables adding composite sync to the red analog video outputs when analog
sync is selected (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being generated
(see AVST command). The ASRG? query returns the current setting of ASRG.
See the ASSG command description for information on simultaneously controlling red,
green and red sync gating.
Command syntax ASRG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax ASRG?
Query response mode
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example ASRG 1 // Enable comp sync on red in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
234
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASSC
Analog Sync Swing Calibration factor
Class System calibration settings
Description Sets the analog video calibration (or scaling) factor that's used to adjust the level set by
ASSS. Issuing the command with a single factor sets all three analog video channels to
the same value. Issuing the command with three factors sets each of the analog video
channels to each of the given values. The actual peak-to-peak swing of the analog
composite sync signals at the output connectors equals the product of ASSS multiplied by
ASSC. The ASSC? query returns the current settings of ASSC. The default factory setting
is 1.000 for this parameter.
Note: The ASSC parameter is a system level parameter that affects the analog video
swing of all formats that are recalled. The ASSC value is retained when the generator is
powered down and back up again. Query the current setting of ASSC if you are
experiencing problems with low or missing analog composite sync levels. Reinitializing the
generator's memory restores the setting to factory default values of 1.000.
Command syntax ASSC red_factor, green_factor, blue_factor
or
ASSC common_factor
factor
min = 0.000 (floating point accepted)
max = 1.000 (floating point accepted)
Query syntax ASSC?
Query response red_factor, green_factor, blue_factor
Example ASSC .995 .998 1.00 // Reduce red and green sync levels
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASSG
Analog Sync Signal Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Enables and disables adding composite sync to all three analog video outputs when
analog sync is selected (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being
generated (see AVST command). This command can take the place of sending all three of
the individual ASRG, ASGG, ASBG commands. The ASSG? query returns the current
settings of the ASSG?
Command syntax ASSG red_mode, green_mode, blue_mode
or
ASSG common_mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
(0, 0, 0 or 0, 1, 0 only choices on 801GC-ISA)
Query syntax ASSG?
Query response red_mode, green_mode, blue_mode
commands
setting and redraws the test image.
Example ASSG 0,1,0 // Enable composite sync on green in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
236
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASSS
Analog Sync Signal Swing
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Sets the maximum peak-to-peak swing for any composite sync that is added to any of the
three analog video channels. The actual peak-to-peak swing of the analog sync signals at
the output connectors equals the product of ASSS multiplied by ASSC. The ASSS? query
returns the current setting of ASSS.
Command syntax ASSS level
level
min = 0.000 volts (floating point accepted)
max = 0.400 volts (floating point accepted)
Query syntax ASSS?
Query response level
commands
Example ASSS 0.286 // Set sync swing to 286 mV in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVCM
Analog Video Calibration Method
Class System calibration setting
Description Determines how the generator tests and calibrates its analog video outputs. The AVCM?
query returns the current setting of AVCM.
Command syntax AVCM type
type
0 = Interpolate
1 = Measure Interpolate
2 = Measure Set Absolute
3 = Test Levels
Query syntax AVCM?
Query response type
Example AVCM 1 // Select Measure Interpolate
// type of self cal
238
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVCO
Analog Video COnfiguration
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Sets the mapping of the analog video colors to the video output connections. The AVCO?
query returns the current setting of AVCO.
Command syntax AVCO type
type
0 = RGB - R to R, G to G, B to B (Normal)
1 = RBG - R to R, B to G, G to B
2 = GRB - G to R, R to G, B to B
3 = GBR - G to R, B to G, R to B
4 = BRG - B to R, R to G, G to B
5 = BGR - B to R, G to G, R to B
Query syntax AVCO?
Query response type
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example AVCO 5 // Output blue on red chan and red on blue chan
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVCS
Analog Video Color subcarrier Selection
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Sets the color subcarrier type used for the television outputs on generator models that
have television outputs available. The AVCS? query returns the current setting of AVCS.
Command syntax AVCS type
type
0 = No subcarrier
1 = NTSC-M, 3.579545 MHz (American)
2 = NTSC-44, 4.43361875 MHz (conversion format without phase alternation)
3 = PAL, 4.43361875 MHz (with phase alternation)
4 = PAL-Nc, 3.58205625 MHz (Argentina)
Query syntax AVCS?
Query response type
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example AVCS 1 // Select standard American NTSC encoding
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
240
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVPG
Analog Video Pedestal Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Enables and disables the analog video set-up pedestal. The AVPG? query returns the
current setting of AVPG.
Command syntax AVPG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax AVPG?
Query response mode
Other required Analog video must be enabled with the AVST command in order to output an analog video
commands
setting and redraws the test image.
Example
AVPG 1
AVPS 7.5 // Set pedestal level to 7.5 IRE
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
// Enable use of a black level pedestal
Video Test Generator User Guide
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVPS
Analog Video Pedestal Swing
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Sets a black pedestal level between the blanking level (0.0 I.R.E.) and the peak video
level (100.0 I.R.E.). The AVPS? query returns the current setting of AVPS.
Command syntax AVPS level
level
min = 0.0 I.R.E.
max = 100.0 I.R.E.
Query syntax AVPS?
Query response level
commands
setting and redraws the test image.
Example
AVPG 1
AVPS 7.5 // Set pedestal level to 7.5 IRE
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
// Enable use of a black level pedestal
242
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVSS
Analog Video Signal Swing
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Sets the maximum peak-to-peak swing for all three analog video channels. The actual
peak-to-peak swing of the analog video signals at the output connectors equals the
product of AVSS multiplied by AVSC. The AVSS? query returns the current setting of
AVSS.
Command syntax AVSS level
level
0.000 to 1.000 volts (floating point accepted)
Query syntax AVSS?
Query response level
Other required Analog video must be enabled with the AVST command in order to output an analog video
commands
command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example 1 This example uses the AVSS command changes the output level of the NTSC format from
714mV to 500mV, and adds the revised format to the format knob list.
FMTL NTSC
FMTB
AVSS 0.5
FMTE
FMTA NTSC_1
DIRL fmt
DIRB
NAMI 1 NTSC_01
DIRE
DIRS
Example 2 This example enables analog video, and sets the video swing.
AVST 2
AVSS 0.714
FMTU
// Select RGB component color video in buffer
// Set to 714 mV in buffer
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 3 This example changes the sync level from 286mV to 200mV, and sets the video output
level at 500mV.
FMTL NTSC
FMTB
ASSS 0.2
AVSS 0.7
FMTE
FMTA NTSC_1
244
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVST
Analog Video Signal Type
Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal
Description Establishes the type of signal that appears on the analog video outputs of the generator.
The AVST? query returns the current setting of AVST.
Command syntax AVST type
type
0 = none
1 = Analog Y (grayscale)
2 = Analog RGB (color)
3 = CVBS or S-Video grayscale
4 = CVBS or S-Video color
5 = Analog YPrPb (old SMPTE 240M HDTV)
6 = Analog YCrCb ITU BT.601 (ANSI/SMPTE 170M TV)
7 = Analog YPrPb SMPTE RP177 HDTV
8 = YPrPb ITU-R BT.709 HDTV
Query syntax AVST?
Query response type
commands
setting and redraws the test image.
Example DVST 0 // Disable digital video
AVST 2 // Select RGB component color video
ALLU
// Update hardware and redraw test image
Video Test Generator User Guide
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BALG
dc BALancing Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Enables and disables adding DC balancing to the Open LVDI digital outputs on generators
that support LVDI outputs. FPD-Link compatible displays use unbalanced (BALG 0), while
OpenLDI displays use balanced (BALG 1).
The BALG? query returns the current setting of BALG.
Command syntax BALG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax BALG?
Query response mode
commands
246
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASE
number BASE
Class Direct processor control
Description Establishes the radix of address and data parameters passed to or returned from the
ADDR, GETA, GETR, PUTA, PUTR, and CALL commands. If a negative radix is specified,
then parameters passed to (or returned from) these functions are assumed to be signed.
For example, if BASE= -16, then the value -1 communicates the value FFFFFFFF hex.
The BASE? query returns the current setting of BASE. The radix radix always is passed
and returned in base 10, regardless of the setting of BASE. BASE is preset to -10 each
time the generator is powered on. Base -10 is the preferred radix. The BASE? query
returns the current setting of BASE.
Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by
Quantum Data.
Command syntax BASE radix
radix
-36 to -2 or 2 to 36
Query syntax BASE?
Query response radix
Video Test Generator User Guide
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUG
BLUe Gate
Class Video Gate
Description Toggles the blue video signal gate.
Command syntax BLUG mode
mode
0 disable
1 enable
Query syntax BLUG?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
Example BLUG 0; ALLU // disable blue video component
248
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOT
warm BOOT
Class System control
Description Causes the generator to go through its standard power-up procedure. Self-calibration is
not performed. The procedure checks all RAM storage locations for corrupt data. This
command is equivalent to turning the generator off and then on.
Command syntax BOOT
250
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAT
Bit RATe
Class Format parameter setting - Digital audio signal
Description Sets the bit rate (in Hz) for an external compressed audio source. This sets the MBR
parameter of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B).
The BRAT? query returns the current compressed digital audio bit rate
Command syntax BRAT rate
rate
0.0 (audio is not compressed)
8000, 16000, 24000 (or higher multiple of 8,000)
Query syntax BRAT?
Example BRAT 32000
IFGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CACH
instruction CACHe enable
Class System parameter settings
Description Enables and disables the use of the instruction cache. The CACH? query returns the
current setting of CACH.
Command syntax CACH mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax CACH?
Query response 0 or 1
Example CACH 0 // Disable the use of the instruction cache
252
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALF
analog video CALibration Factors
Class System calibration settings
Description Sets the analog output calibration factors to values other than those set by the generator's
own self-calibration function. Each channel is calibrated using two independent zero
calibration points, and two independent slope calibration points. Interpolation equations for
the different video types are used to set the caldac values that controls the output sync
and voltage levels to the correct values.
TV calibration uses two factors for NTSC output, and two factors for PAL output.
Note: Sending bad calibration factors to the generator via the CALF command can hang
the generator. If the generator hangs it will have to be reinitialized.
Command syntax CALF zero500R, zero50R, slope1500R, slope1000R, zero500G, zero50G, slope1500G,
slope1000R, zero500B, zero50B, slope1500B, slope1000B, ntsc714, pal700, ntsc_blank,
pal_blank
zero500R
Red calibration factor from 0 (most negative) to 4095 (least negative) at -1.0V.
zero50R
Red calibration factor from 0 (most negative) to 4095 (least negative) at -100mV.
slope1500R
Red calibration factor from 0 (maximum swing) to 4095 (minimum swing) at 2.0V.
slope1000R
Red calibration factor from 0 (maximum swing) to 4095 (minimum swing) at 1.4V.
zero500G, zero50G, slope1500G, slope1000R
Green calibration factors.
zero500B, zero50B, slope1500B, slope1000B
Blue calibration factors.
ntsc714
Factor from 0 (maximum swing) to 4095 (minimum swing) for NTSC output level at
714mV. The ntsc714 and ntsc_blank values are interrelated.
pal700
Factor from 0 (maximum swing) to 4095 (minimum swing) for PAL output level at
700mV.
ntsc_blank
Factor from 0 (least negative) to 4095 (most negative) used to set the zero level of the
NTSC output at 0.0 IRE.
Video Test Generator User Guide
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
pal_blank
Factor from 0 (least negative) to 4095 (most negative) used to set the zero level of the
PAL output at 0.0 IRE.
Query syntax CALF?
command updates the signal generating hardware to the new settings and redraws the
test image.
Example CALF 1090, 2590, 1992, 3223, 1149, 2634, 2059, 3278, 1001, 2506, 1993,
3221, 781, 780, 3387, 3513
ALLU
// Set new factors
// Use new factors
254
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALL
CALL internal function
Class Direct processor control
Description Calls internal C functions. Address address is the entry point of the C function to be called.
Parameter passed indicates the number of parameters to be passed. If passed is not zero,
then parameters being passed p(1) through p(n) immediately follow the passed parameter
on the command line.
The CALL? query is similar to the CALL command except that returned parameters are
expected. Here, a third parameter returned is added to indicate the number of parameters
returned by the function. If BASE= -10 or -16 and a returned value of -1 is given
(4,294,967,295 if BASE=10 or FFFFFFFF if BASE=16), then a single value is read from
register A8 of the TMS34010 (rather than being popped off the C stack). Most C functions
that return a single parameter return their single parameter in this way. Returned
parameters are space-delimited and formatted according to the current radix (see BASE
command). All parameters passed to the CALL and CALL? must be formatted according
to the current radix. This includes the parameters passed and returned.
Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by
Quantum Data. Indiscriminate use of this command can cause the generator to stop
operating or loss of stored data in non-volatile RAM.
Command syntax CALL address passed [ p(1) [ p(2) [ p(3) …[ p(18) ]…]]]
address
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
passed
0 to 18 (BASE = -10 or 10)
0 to 12 (BASE = -16 or 16)
p(n)
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
Query syntax CALL? address passed returned [ p(1) [ p(2) [ p(3) …[ p(17) ]…]]]
Video Test Generator User Guide
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
address
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
passed
0 to 18 (BASE = -10 or 10)
0 to 12 (BASE = -16 or 16)
returned
4,294,967,295 and 0 to 20 (BASE = 10)
-1 to 20 (BASE = -10)
FFFFFFFF and 0 to 14 (BASE = 16)
-1 to 14 (BASE = -16 query only)
p(n)
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
Query response ret(1) [ ret(2) [ ret(3) … [ ret(20) ]…]]
Other required CALL and CALL? expect and return parameters formatted according to the current radix
commands
256
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CENT
draw video CENTering markers
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a small cross in the center of active video. If the format has an even number of
active pixels, the vertical line is 2 pixels thick. The horizontal line is 2 pixels thick if the
format has an even number of active lines. The primitive uses a single parameter, the
color of the cross.
Command syntax CENT color
color
available colors
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example CENT red // Draw a small red cross in center of active video
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CROS
draw a centered CROSs
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a large centered cross that fills the active video area. The vertical line is 2 pixels
thick if the format has an even number of active pixels. The horizontal line is 2 pixels thick
if the format has an even number of active lines. The primitive uses a single parameter,
the color of the cross.
Command syntax CROS color
color
available colors
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example CROS magenta // Draw a large cross in the center of the active video
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
258
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CSPG
Composite Sync Pulse Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Enables and disables all of the digital composite sync outputs when digital composite sync
is selected via the SSST command (SSST = 3). The CSPG? query returns the current
setting of CSPG.
Command syntax CSPG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax CSPG?
Query response 0 or 1
Other required In order to use digital composite sync, it must be selected with the SSST command. The
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example CSPG 1 // Enable dig comp sync in buffer
SSST 2 // Choose digital comp sync type in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CSPP
Composite Sync Pulse Polarity
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital composite sync output. The CSPP? query returns
the current setting of CSPP.
Command syntax CSPP polarity
polarity
0 = active-low (negative going pulse)
1 = active-high (positive going pulse)
Query syntax CSPP?
Query response 0 or 1
Other required In order to use digital composite sync, it must be gated on with the CSPG command and
commands
test image.
Example CSPG 1 // Enable dig comp sync in buffer
CSPP 1 // Select active hi in buffer
SSST 2 // Choose digital comp sync type in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
260
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CTLM
ConTroL Mask
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Sets the masked control bits for the LVDS output. The control bits are not always required
by receivers. There are two bits that can be set: CTL00 and CTL01.
Command syntax CTLM mask
mask
0 = sets bit low
1 = sets bit high
Query syntax CTLM?
Example CTLM 2 // the 2 in hex sets the CTL01 bit to 1.
CTLM 3 // the 3in hex ets the CTL00 and CTL01 bits to 1.
Video Test Generator User Guide
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CXAR
Content Aspect Ratio
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI Active Video
Description Sets the aspect ratio of the source image content.
Command syntax CXAR aspect_ratio
aspect_ratio
0.75 to ˜2.39
The following table provides a listing of established aspect ratios.
Aspect Ratio Symbol
Description
Television Portrait
Examples
3x4, 480x640, 600x800, 768x1024,
960x1280, 1200x1600
0.750
OT or T
90
0.800
OG or G
Workstation Graphics
Portrait
4x5, 1024x1280, 1280x1600
90
1.000
Q
G
Quadrate, "Square”
Workstation Graphics
SDTV / Silent Film
1x1, 512x512, 1024x1024
5x4, 1280x1024, 1600x1280
1.250
1
1.333…
T (A)
4x3, 640x480, 800x600, 1024x768,
1280x960, 1600x1200
1
2
˜1.37
C (B)
Academy “Classic”
˜4x3, 0.825x0.602 SMPTE RP40 35mm "C"
with sound
1.444…
1.500
I
IMAX™
13x9, IMAX™
1
V (T)
Vista Vision™
3x2, 1152x768 Apple Computer
(uncropped) Vista Vision™
1
1.555…
1.600
M (V)
Mid
14x9, AFD Shoot and Protect (half-way
between 4x3 and 16x9)
D
16 Decimal
16x10, 1728x1080, 1280x800, see VESA
CVT 1.0
1.666…
1.750
E
Z
European Film, "1.66
Old Film
5x3, 1200x720, 1280x768, 1800x1080
7x4, Old Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer and Disney
Films
1.777…
˜1.85
H
HDTV
16x9, 1280x720,1920x1080
1
A (F)
Film Standard (USA)
˜13x7, 1280x692, 1920x1038, 0.825x0.446
SMPTE RP40 35mm "A"
2.000
˜2.20
U
Univisum™
2x1, 1280x640, 1920x960
1
F (M)
“Flat”, MPEG "20x9”
"˜11x5, 1280x582, 1920x874, 1.912x0.870
SMPTE RP91 70mm
1
˜2.39
B (C)
Anamorphic Cinema,
˜12x5, 1280x536, 1920x804, 1.650x0.690
SMPTE RP40 35mm "B"
3
“2.35”
1. The letters in parenthesis are the letters that we used to use, before we updated our aspect ratio symbols for compatibiliity
with existing film industry standards (i.e. the symbols defined in SMPTE RP40).
2. In 1932, the shape of film was changed from 1.33:1 to 1.37:1 in order to better accommodate the new optical soundtrack that
was added a few years earlier. This slightly wider shape is the true aspect ratio of “classic” film. The aperture is commonly
referred to as “Academy” and was the shape of the vast majority of U.S. films produced until the 1950s.
3. Sometimes called “2.35”, which was the aspect ratio before it was changed to 2.39:1 in 1971 to keep splices from showing up
in the projected image.
262
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DACA
Digital Audio Channels Available
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Specifies which audio channels are active.
Command syntax DACA mask
mask
0 to 3, based on following table.
Channel
1
2
Bit
0
1
Value
1
2
Normally, each type of audio content is assigned to a particular channel and is always
output on that channel when present. There is one exception to this rule: rear center (RC)
content is switched from channel 5 to 7 whenever rear left (RL) content is simultaneously
present. To simplify this, RC content is thus treated as if it were two different types of
content: RC5 and RC7. When RL content is not present, RC content is output on channel
5 as RC5 content. When RL content is present, RC content is output on channel 7 as RC7
content.
value (see table below).
DACA
3
DAXA
3
XAUD:CA
0
Note: If DACA is set to a value not found in the table above, then other parameters will not
be automatically set and an error will be generated if the format is loaded while this
condition exists.
mask
0 to 255 (based on the value in the table below).Notes:
•
corresponding value (see table below). However, in the case of DACA values 243, 247,
251, and 255, two sets of DAXA and XAUD:CA values are possible. In this case, DAXA
and XAUD:CA settings will be based on those highlighted (in grey) in the table.
•
If DACA is set to a value not found in the table above, then other parameters will not
be automatically set and an error will be generated if the format is loaded while this
condition exists.
264
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example DACA 3 //specifies audio channels 1 and 2
DACG 3 //gates audio channels 1 and 2
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DACG
Digital Audio Channel Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Specifies which audio channels are gated (on).
Command syntax DACG mask
mask
0 to 3 (based on the value in the table below).
Channel
Bit
1
0
1
2
1
2
Value
Example DACA 3 //specifies audio channels 1 and 2
DACG 3 //gates audio channels 1 and 2
FMTU
266
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DADG
Digital Audio Down-mix Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Enables or disables downmixing of an audio signal. This sets the DM_I parameter of the
Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 24).
Command syntax DADG mode
mode
1 = enable
0 = disable
Example DADG 1
FMTU
IFGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DALS
Digital Audio Level Shift Value
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Sets the level shift value (in decibels) for downmixing of the audio signal. This sets the
LSV parameter of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 23).
Command syntax DALS x
x
0 - 15 (dB)
Example DALS 5
FMTU
IFGU
268
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DASI
Digital Audio Signal Interface
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Sets the digital audio signal interface.
Command syntax DASI interface
interface
0 = none
1 = SPDIF
Example DASI 1
IFGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAST
Digital Audio Signal Type
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Sets the digital audio signal type for an audio signal. This sets the CT parameter of the
Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 19).
Command syntax DAST type
type
0 = void
1 = IEC 60958-3 Consumer LPCM
Example DAST 1
IFGU
270
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAXA
Digital Audio Content Available
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Specifies which speaker locations are available (present).
Command syntax DAXA mask
mask
0 to 3 (based on the value in the table below).
Normally, each type of audio content is assigned to a particular channel and is always
Content
Bit
FR
1
FL
0
Value
2
1
output on that channel when present. There is one exception to this rule: rear center (RC)
content is switched from channel 5 to 7 whenever rear left (RL) content is simultaneously
present. To simplify this, RC content is thus treated as if it were two different types of
content: RC5 and RC7. When RL content is not present, RC content is output on channel
5 as RC5 content. When RL content is present, RC content is output on channel 7 as RC7
content.
value (see table below). However, this method should not be used to gate channels.
DAXA
DACA
3
3
0
XAUD:CA
Note: If DAXA is set to a value not found in the table above, then other parameters will not
be automatically set and an error will be generated if the format is loaded while this
condition exists.
Example DAXA 3 //specifies FR and FL as having audio content
DAXG 3 //gates FR and FL content
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAXG
Digital Audio Content Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Specifies which speaker locations are gated (on).
Command syntax DAXG mask
mask
0 to 3 (based on the value in the table below).
Content
FR
FL
Bit
1
0
Value
2
1
Example DAXA 3 //specifies FR and FL as having audio content
DAXG 3 //gates FR and FL content
FMTU
272
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCBM
Display Code Bit Mask
Class Direct processor control
Description Sets the 4-bit binary bit mask used by the DCRD? query. The mask is entered as the
decimal equivalent of a 4-bit binary number. The binary number represents the masking of
the individual sense lines from M3 (MSB) to M0 (LSB). The DCBM? query returns the
current setting of DCBM.
Command syntax DCBM mask
mask
0 = 0 0 0 0
1 = 0 0 0 1
2 = 0 0 1 0
3 = 0 0 1 1
4 = 0 1 0 0
5 = 0 1 0 1
6 = 0 1 1 0
7 = 0 1 1 1
8 = 1 0 0 0
9 = 1 0 0 1
10 = 1 0 1 0
11 = 1 0 1 1
12 = 1 1 0 0
13 = 1 1 0 1
14 = 1 1 1 0
15 = 1 1 1 1
Query syntax DCBM?
Query response mask
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example DCBM 7 // Set mask to read sense lines 0, 1 and 2 only
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCEX
Display Code EXpected
Class Format parameter settings
Description Sets up the display code that is expected from a display connected to the generator. The
code is determined by one or more sense lines being connected to ground by the display.
Many video controller cards for the Apple Macintosh II and VGA type cards for the IBM-PC
sample the status of the display code sense lines. The information then sets up one of
several different operating modes to match a particular display. An improper display code
may make the controller card or display appear to malfunction.
The DCEX? query first performs a logical AND operation with the display code bit mask
and the actual display code that's sensed. The decimal equivalent of the result then is
returned. The mask is set with the DCEX command.
The expected setting and the actual result are both shown in the Format test image. They
have no effect how a given format generates a set of test signals.
Command syntax DCEX code
code
0 = 0 0 0 0
8 = 1 0 0 0
9 = 1 0 0 1
10 = 1 0 1 0
11 = 1 0 1 1
12 = 1 1 0 0
13 = 1 1 0 1
14 = 1 1 1 0
15 = 1 1 1 1
1 = 0 0 0 1
2 = 0 0 1 0
3 = 0 0 1 1
4 = 0 1 0 0
5 = 0 1 0 1
6 = 0 1 1 0
7 = 0 1 1 1
Query syntax DCEX?
Query response code
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example DCBM 7 // Set mask to read sense lines 0, 1 and 2 only
DCEX 5 // Only lines 0 and 1 should be grounded
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
274
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCPG
Data Channel Power Gate
Class EDID and DDC control
Description Enables and disables the +5V power signal used by the DDC channel.
Command syntax DCPG option
option
0 = disable +5V power
1 = enable +5V power
Example DCPG 0
Video Test Generator User Guide
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCPX?
Data Channel Power Overcurrent
Class EDID and DDC control
Description Queries the status of the 5V display data channel (DDC) power level.
Query syntax DCPX?
Returns 0 or 1
0 = OK
1 = overcurrent (for example, shorted)
Example DCPX?
0
276
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCRD?
Display Code ReaD
Class Direct processor control
Description Returns the display code detected on the monitor sense lines as filtered through the
display code bit mask. Converting the returned decimal number to a 4-bit binary number
shows the status of the individual sense lines from M3 (MSB) to M0 (LSB).
Query syntax DCRD?
Query response code
code
0 = 0 0 0 0
1 = 0 0 0 1
2 = 0 0 1 0
3 = 0 0 1 1
4 = 0 1 0 0
5 = 0 1 0 1
6 = 0 1 1 0
7 = 0 1 1 1
8 = 1 0 0 0
9 = 1 0 0 1
10 = 1 0 1 0
11 = 1 0 1 1
12 = 1 1 0 0
13 = 1 1 0 1
14 = 1 1 1 0
15 = 1 1 1 1
commands
Example DCRD? // Return current sense lines reading
Video Test Generator User Guide
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DDCV?
DDC Version supported
Class EDID and DDC control
Description The DDCV? query returns a status flag indicating if the generator hardware supports
VESA DDC communications.
Query syntax DDCV?
Query response 0 or 1
0 = no DDC support
1 = DDC supported
Example DDCV? // Return DDC support information
278
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELX
slider image DELta X
Class Image editor control
Description Sets the amount of horizontal shift that occurs for each step of the SlideG and SlideRGB
built-in images. The command is also used to set the horizontal size of the white patch
used in the Regulate image. The DELX? Query returns the current DELX setting.
Command syntax DELX delta_x
delta_x
horizontal distance in pixels
Query syntax DELX?
Query response delta_x
Example DELX 8
DELY 3
// Set H shift to 8 pixels per step
// Set V shift to 3 pixels per step
// Display each step for 2 frames
DWEL 2
IMGL “SlideG” // Select Image that uses DELX and DELY
IMGU
// Draw the Image
Video Test Generator User Guide
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELY
slider image DELta Y
Class Image editor control
Description Sets the amount of vertical shift that occurs for each step of the SlideG and SlideRGB
built-in images. The command is also used to set the vertical size of the white patch used
in the Regulate image. The DELY? Query returns the current DELY setting.
Command syntax DELY delta_y
delta_y
vertical distance in pixels
Query syntax DELY?
Query response delta_y
Example DELX 8
DELY 3
// Set H shift to 8 pixels per step
// Set V shift to 3 pixels per step
// Display each step for 2 frames
DWEL 2
IMGL “SlideG” // Select Image that uses DELX and DELY
IMGU // Draw the Image
Description Updates hardware with new EDID contents.
Command syntax DIDU
Example XDID 8 3 DE33FF
DIDU
280
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRA
DIRectory save As
Class Directory memory management
Description Saves the current contents of the directory edit buffer using the given name.
Command syntax DIRA name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example DIRA MY_DIR // Save with the name "MY_DIR"
Video Test Generator User Guide
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRB
DIRectory editing Begin
Class Directory memory management
Description Marks the beginning of a directory editing session. This command does nothing in the
current firmware version, but is used for compatibility with future versions of firmware.
Command syntax DIRB
Other required Use either a DIRL command to load an existing directory or a DIRN command to create a
commands
Example DIRN // Initialize directory edit buffer
DIRB // Start directory editing session
// One or more directory editing commands ...
DIRE // End directory editing session
282
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRE
DIRectory editing End
Class Directory memory management
Description Marks the end of a directory editing session. This command does nothing in the current
firmware version, but is used for compatibility with future versions of firmware.
Command syntax DIRE
commands
save changes.
Example DIRB
// Start directory editing session
// One or more directory editing commands ...
DIRA MYDIR_02 // Save edited directory as MYDIR_02
DIRE
// End directory editing session
Video Test Generator User Guide
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRK
DIRectory Kill
Class Directory memory management
Description Deletes a directory by name. The query returns a one if the named directory can be
deleted. If directory is read-only or nonexistent, the query returns a zero.
Command syntax DIRK name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax DIRK? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or 1
Example DIRK MY_DIR // Delete directory called "MY_DIR"
284
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRL
DIRectory Load
Class Directory memory management
Description Copies the directory having a name equal to name from directory memory into the
directory edit buffer. The query returns a one if the named directory can be loaded;
otherwise, a zero is returned.
Note: Use the FMTP, IMGP and SEQP commands to select which directory is used for the
format, image, and sequence selection lists.
Command syntax DIRL name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax DIRL? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or 1
Example DIRL MY_DIR // Load "MY_DIR" directory in edit buffer
Video Test Generator User Guide
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRN
DIRectory New
Class Directory memory management
Description Initializes the directory edit buffer. The name name is assigned as the directory's name.
The query will return the name that has been assigned as the directory's name.
Command syntax DIRN name
name
optional valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax DIRN?
Example DIRN // Init edit buffer without assigning a new name
or
DIRN MY_DIR // Init edit buffer with name of "MY_DIR"
286
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRP
DIRectory Path
Class Directory memory management
Description Sets the current directory path name. The query will return the current directory path
name.
Command syntax DIRP name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax DIRP?
Query response name
Example DIRP DIRPTH01 // Set directory path to DIRPTH01
Video Test Generator User Guide
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRQ?
DIRectory Query pointer
Class Directory memory management
Description Returns the number directory names from the list of all the directory names stored in
directory memory beginning at index. The directories are kept in alphanumeric order.
Query syntax DIRQ? index number
index
positive integer number
number
positive integer number
Query response List of specified directory names
Example DIRQ? 1 5
// List the first five directories in memory
or
DIRQ? 1 9999 // List all directories in memory
288
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRS
DIRectory Save
Class Directory memory management
Description Saves the current directory edit buffer contents into directory memory using the current
name of the directory in the edit buffer.
Example DIRN fmtnew
// creates a new format directory (knob list) name
// begins a directory editing session
DIRB
NAMI 1 myfmt1
// adds myfmt1 to directory (knob list)
.
.
// add other formats to directory (knob list)
.
NAMI n myfmtn
DIRE
DIRS
// adds myfmtn to directory (knob list)
// ends the directory editing session
// saves the directory
Video Test Generator User Guide
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DMAP
Dimension bitMAP
Class Bitmap image control
Description Defines the size of a rectangular bitmap array in the edit buffer. The width and height, in
pixels is set by the width and height parameters. The number of data bits per pixel is set
by the bpp parameter.
Command syntax DMAP width height bpp
width
min =
max =
height
min =
max =
bpp
1, 2 or 4
Query syntax DMAP?
Query response width height bpp
Example DMAP 32 20 4 // Set bitmap array to 32 pixels wide by 20 pixels high
// and a depth of 4 bits-per-pixel
290
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DNUM
Display sequence step NUMbers
Class Sequence editor commands
Description Enables and disables the addition of the sequence step number to the displayed test
image when running a sequence.
Command syntax DNUM mode
mode
0, 1 or 2
Query syntax DNUM?
Query response mode
Example DNUM 1 // Enable the displaying of the sequence step #
Video Test Generator User Guide
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DPGU
Data Island Packet Generator Use
Class Data packet generator
Description Updates the hardware with content of the current Data Island packet.
Command syntax DPGU
Example 1 Turn mute on:
XGCP 1 0
DPTG 7
DPTR 1
DPGU
Example 2 Read mute status:
R:MUTE?
R:1
Example 3 Turn mute off:
XGCP 0 1
DPTG 7
DPTR 1
DPGU
Example 4 Read mute status:
R:MUTE?
R:0
Example 5 Change the N value to 6000, and let hardware determine CTS value:
XACR 6000
DTPG 7
DPGU
// You can read N and CTS value at the reciever for verification.
Example 6 Change the N value to 6000, and CTS to 8000:
XACR 6000 8000
DTPG 7
DPGU
// You can read N and CTS value at the reciever for verification.
292
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 7 Turn audio off:
DPTG 3
DPGU
Example 8 Turn audio on:
DPTG 7
DPGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DPTG
Data Island Packet Type Gate
Class Data packet generator
Description Gates on or off the assigned packet type (Audio Sample, Audio Clock Regeneration, or
General Control Packet) to be updated by the hardware and sent to the receiver.
Gating Audio Sample packets on and off also enables and disables the audio output from
the transmitter. The mask value is a value ORed with the current setting.
Command syntax DPTG mask
mask
1 = General Control Packet (GCP)
2 = Audio Clock Regeneration (ACR)
4 = Audio Sample
8 = Generic Data Packet (GDP)
Example This example gates off the audio (the current value is 7):
DPTG 3; DPGU
294
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DPTR
Data Island Packet Type Repeat Mask
Class Data packet generator
Description Specifies if a General Control packet is sent with every frame or sent once.
Note: Audio Sample and ACR packets are always enabled (and thus cannot be changed).
Command syntax DPTR mask
mask
1 = General Control Packet (GCP)
8 = Generic Data Packet (GDP)
Video Test Generator User Guide
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DSCT
Digital Sync Composite Type
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Establishes the type of composite sync that appears at the digital composite sync outputs
returns the current setting of DSCT. A setting of zero (0) indicates that digital composite
sync cannot be activated by the operator.
Command syntax DSCT type
type
0 = none
10 = American HDTV w/serr & eq
11 = European HDTV w/serr
12 = European HDTV w/serr & eq
13 = Japanese HDTV ORed
14 = Japanese HDTV w/serr
15 = Japanese HDTV w/serr & eq
Query syntax DSCT?
Query response type
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example DSCT 2 // Select simple Amer ORed in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
296
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DSST
Digital Sync Separate Type
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Establishes the type of digital separate sync that appears at the digital HS and VS outputs
EIA and CCIR digital separate syncs is that, in the case of CCIR, the width of the vertical
case, the width of the vertical sync pulse is as programmed.
Command syntax DSST type
type
0 = none
1 = American separate
2 = American HDTV separate
3 = European HDTV separate
4 = Japanese HDTV separate
5 = European separate
Query syntax DSST?
Query response Returns the current setting of DSST. A setting of zero (0) indicates that separate digital
H&V sync cannot be activated by the operator.
Example DSST 1
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVIC
Digital Video Identification Code
Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter
Description Writes the specified Video Identification Code (VIC) into the AVI InfoFrame.
Command syntax DVIC code
code
0 = unestablished format
1 - 34 = DVIC code corresponding to a format defined in EIA/CEA-861-B standard
(Section 4). See table below for DVIC codes.
http://www.quantumdata.com/support/downloads/802bt/hdmi/TimingsEIA-861-B.pdf.
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
DVIC Format Name NCPP
SXAR
A
SXEX
CXAR
A
TUNE
1
HRES
640
640
720
720
720
720
720
720
1280
1280
1920
1920
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
2880
VTOT
525
525
525
525
525
525
525
525
750
750
1125
1125
525
525
525
525
525
525
262
262
263
263
262
262
263
263
262
262
263
263
525
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
DMT0659
DMT0660
480p59
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
N
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
H
H
H
H
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
N
N
N
A
A
A
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A
A
H
H
H
H
A
A
A
A
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
480p60
0
480p59LH
480p60LH
480p59SH
480p60SH
720p59
720p60
1080i29
1080i30
480i2x29
480i2x30
480i2xL1
480i2xL2
480i2xS1
480i2xS2
240p2x_1
240p2x_2
240p2x_3
240p2x_4
240p2xL1
240p2xL2
240p2xL3
240p2xL4
240p2xS1
240p2xS2
240p2xS3
240p2xS4
480i4x29
L
L
cbb
cbb
S
S
N
N
N
N
N
N
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
L
cbb
cbb
S
S
N
N
N
N
0
0
0
0
L
L
L
L
cbb
cbb
cbb
cbb
S
S
S
S
N
0
298
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
DVIC Format Name NCPP
SXAR
A
SXEX
CXAR
A
TUNE
0
HRES
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
720
VTOT
525
525
525
525
525
262
262
263
263
262
262
263
263
262
262
263
263
525
525
525
525
525
525
1125
1125
625
625
625
750
1125
625
625
625
312
313
314
312
313
314
312
313
314
625
625
625
312
313
314
312
313
314
312
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
26
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
480i4x30
480i4xL1
480i4xL2
480i4xS1
480i4xS2
240p4x_1
240p4x_2
240p4x_3
240p4x_4
240p4xL1
240p4xL2
240p4xL3
240p4xL4
240p4xS1
240p4xS2
240p4xS3
240p4xS4
480p2x59
480p2x60
480p2xL1
480p2xL2
480p2xS1
480p2xS2
1080p59
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
N
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
H
H
A
A
A
H
H
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
L
L
H
H
H
H
A
A
A
A
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
A
A
H
H
H
H
H
H
A
H
H
H
H
A
H
H
A
A
A
H
H
H
H
H
H
A
H
H
A
A
A
H
H
H
H
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
cbb
cbb
S
S
N
N
N
N
0
0
0
0
L
L
L
L
cbb
cbb
cbb
cbb
S
S
S
S
N
N
0
720
720
720
720
0
L
L
cbb
cbb
S
S
N
N
N
720
1920
1920
720
720
720
720
1920
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
720
0
1080p60
576p50
576p50LH
576p50SH
720p50
0
0
L
cbb
S
N
N
N
0
1080i25
0
576i2x25
576i2xLH
576i2xSH
288p2x_1
288p2x_2
288p2x_3
288p2xL1
288p2xL2
288p2xL3
288p2xS1
288p2xS2
288p2xS3
576i4x25
576i4xLH
576i4xSH
288p4x_1
288p4x_2
288p4x_3
288p4xL1
288p4xL2
288p4xL3
288p4xS1
0
L
cbb
S
N
N
N
0
0
0
L
L
L
cbb
cbb
cbb
S
S
S
N
720
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
2880
0
L
cbb
S
N
N
N
0
0
0
L
L
L
cbb
cbb
cbb
S
Video Test Generator User Guide
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
DVIC Format Name NCPP
SXAR
A
SXEX
S
CXAR
H
TUNE
0
HRES
2880
2880
720
720
720
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
1920
VTOT
313
314
625
625
28
28
29
29
30
31
32
32
33
34
34
288p4xS2
288p4xS3
576p2x50
576p2xLH
576p2xSH
1080p50
1080p23
1080p24
1080p25
1080p29
1080p30
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
A
A
A
A
H
H
H
H
H
H
S
N
H
A
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
L
cbb
S
N
N
N
N
N
N
625
1125
1125
1125
1125
1125
1125
0
0
0
0
0
0
1. The generator treats double-clocking and pixel repetition as two totally separate items. NCPP controls the number of clocks
per pixel, while NPPP controls pixel repetition factor. All library formats set pixel repetition factor NPPP to zero (i.e. OFF) by
default. Double-clocking and pixel repetition cannot be applied simultaneously due to AVI:RP field constraints. Therefore, dou-
ble-clocked formats do not support pixel repetition. Pixel repetition is only applicable to the "4x" formats, where HRES remains
at 2880-pixels as the pixel repetition factor NPPP is varied between 1 and 10 - thereby varying the effective resolution.
2. EXCX and EXAR are not listed here, because all library formats set EXCX and EXAR equal to N0 and CXAR, respectively.
These values may be subsequently changed by rendering a special test image called "AFDtest", after the base format has
finished loading, in order to evaluate different AFD cases.
3. TUNE is a flag that indicates whether the frequencies of a format have been detuned or not. A value of one indicates that all
of the frequencies of a format have been tuned by a factor of 1/1.001 for NTSC compatibility. A value of zero, on the other
hand, indicates that the format has not been so tuned.
4. Double-clocked formats have the same horizontal resolution as single-clocked formats - the horizontal active (as we define it),
is not doubled in the double-clocked case. Some formats are distinguished by a horizontal active that is 4-times the normal
value of 720. Here, pixel repetition may be applied, by a special "PixelRep" test image, after the format has loaded. The "Pix-
elRep" test image allows the number of pixels-per-pixel (NPPP) to be varied and an image with repeated pixels to be rendered
for test purposes.
5. Some formats are distinguished by having a slightly different vertical line total.
Example DVIC 23
FMTU
300
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVPT
Digital Video Protocol Type
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Controls the output protocol. Setting the DVPT parameter to 2 and issuing a FMTU (or
ALLU) command causes the output signal protocol to switch to HDMI, while setting DVPT
to 1 causes a DVI compatible protocol to be output. All of the formats in the format library
set DVPT to 0. This is a default setting, which lets the output protocol be determined, on a
global basis, by the type of hardware that is present.
Command syntax DVPT type
type
0 = default (based on hardware present)
1 = DVI 1.0
2 = HDMI 1.0
Example DVPT 2
FTMU
Video Test Generator User Guide
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVQM
Digital Video Quantization Mode
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Controls the gamut of digital signals per the EIA/CEA-861-B standard.
The DVQM? query returns the current DVQM mode.
Command syntax DVQM mode
mode
Use the following table to determine the proper mode (0, 1, or 2).
NBPC=8 gamuts
NBPC=10 gamuts
NBPC=12 gamuts
DVQ
Mode
Components
LMIN
LMAX
LMIN
LMAX
LMIN
LMAX
0
1
2
RGB
0
255
0
1023
0
4095
YC C
0
1
255
254
254
235
240
0
4
1023
1019
1019
940
0
4095
4079
4079
3760
3840
b
r
r
r
RGB
16
YC C
1
4
16
b
RGB
16
16
64
64
256
256
YC C
960
b
Notes:
•
•
Computer (for example, DMT and CVT) formats set DVQM=0 for full gamut.
DVQM can be set to 1 to test the undershoot/overshoot signal code margins (for
example, see SMPTE 296M section 7.12).
•
Television formats (for example, 1080i29) set DVQM=2 for reduced gamut required by
various television standards (for example, EIA/CEA-861-B).
Query syntax DVQM?
Example DVQM 1
FMTU
302
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVSC
Digital Video Swing Calibration factor
Class System calibration setting
Description Sets the TMDS differential swing calibration factor for the digital video signal (HDMI and
DVI). The DVSC query returns the current value.
Command syntax DVSC factor
factor
0.0 to 1.1
Query syntax DVSC?
Examples DVSC 0.9 // sets the digital video swing calibration to 0.9
ALLU
Video Test Generator User Guide
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVSI
Digital Video Signal Interface
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Determines which of the three interfaces on the 802R-PCI-D generator the digital output is
applied. There are three digital interfaces on this PCI generator: LVDS, TTL and DVI.
Command syntax DVSI interface
interface
1 = TTL
2 = LVDS
3 = DVI
Query syntax DVSI?
Example DVSI 3 // Puts the generator digital output on the DVI interface
ALLU // Applies the setting to the generator
304
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVSM
Digital Video Sampling Mode
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Controls how the color difference components (CbCr) are sampled when YCbCr signal
type is selected. Set DVST to a signal type that supports the sampling mode specified by
DVSM.
Command syntax DVSM mode
mode
0 = RGB 4:4:4 (default)
2 = 4:2:2 (color difference components are sampled at half the pixel rate; luminance is
sampled at full pixel rate)
4 = 4:4:4 (both luminance and color difference components are sampled at the pixel
rate)
Examples DVST 10
DVSM 0
FMTU
DVST 13
DVSM 2
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVSP
Digital Video Signal Polarity
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital video outputs. The DVSP? query returns the
current setting of DVSP.
Command syntax DVSP polarity
polarity
0 = active-low (negative going video)
1 = active-high (positive going video)
Query syntax DVSP?
Query response polarity
Other required To use the digital video outputs, digital video must be enabled with the DVST command.
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example AVST 0 // Deselect analog video in buffer
DVST 5 // Select 3 bit color in buffer
DVSP 1 // Select active high video in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
306
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVSS
Digital Video Signal Swing
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Sets the TMDS differential swing voltage for the digital video signal. The DVSS query
returns the current value.
Command syntax DVSS voltage
voltage
0.0 to 2.0 volts differential peak-to-peak (nominally 1.000, 0.150 to 1.560 range
guaranteed)
Query syntax DVSS?
Examples DVSS 1.25 // sets the digital video signal swing voltage to 1.25 volts
ALLU
Video Test Generator User Guide
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVST
Digital Video Signal Type
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Establishes the kind of video signal that exits the digital video signal outputs of the
generator.
The DVST? query returns the current setting of DVST.
Command syntax DVST type
type
0 = none
10 = RGB
13 = YCbCr (per SMPTE 260M-1999, Table 1)
14 = YCbCr (per ITU-R BT.601-5 Table 3, Item 7)
15 = YCbCr (per ITU-R BT.709-5 Part 1, Section 6.10)
Query syntax DVST?
after the DVST command, to update the hardware with the new settings.
Example AVST 0 // Deselect analog video in buffer
DVST 10 // Select digital RGB
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
308
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DWEL
slider image DWELl time
Class Image Control – System Level
Description Sets the how long each step of the SlideG and SlideRGB built-in images is displayed
before the image is updated. The delay is based on the number of vertical frame refreshes
that must occur for the currently loaded video format. The command is also used to set
how long each step of the Regulate image is displayed. The DWEL? query returns the
current DWELL setting.
Command syntax DWEL delay
delay
integer representing number of video frames
Query syntax DWEL?
Query response delay
Example DELX 8
DELY 3
// Set H shift to 8 pixels per step
// Set V shift to 3 pixels per step
// Display each step for 2 frames
DWEL 2
IMGL “SlideG” // Select Image that uses DELX and DELY
IMGU
// Draw the Image
Video Test Generator User Guide
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EDID?
EDID read
Class EDID and DDC control
Description Reads all bytes in the base EDID and up to seven extensions from a DDC compliant
display connected to the transmitter on the generator. The data is returned in raw ASCII
hex format.
Query syntax EDID?
Query response ASCII hex test string
Example This example reads a four block E-EDID.
R:\edid?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310
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQUA
EQUalization interval After vertical sync pulse
Class Format parameter setting - synchronization
Description Establishes the width of the equalization interval after the vertical sync pulse in each field
sync signal is one of the CCIR types, then the actual equalization interval output by the
generator will be 0.5 lines shorter than the whole number specified. The EQUA? query
returns the current setting of EQUA.
Command syntax EQUA lines
lines
min = 0
max = number of lines after vertical sync before video
Query syntax EQUA?
Query response lines
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example EQUA 3 // Set post-equalization to 3 lines in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQUB
EQUalization interval Before vertical sync pulse
Class Format parameter setting - synchronization
Description Establishes the width of the equalization interval before the vertical sync pulse in each
sync signal is one of the CCIR types, then the actual equalization interval output by the
generator will be 0.5 lines shorter than the whole number specified. The EQUB? query
returns the current setting of EQUB.
Command syntax EQUB lines
lines
min = 0
max = number of lines after video and before vertical sync
Query syntax EQUB?
Query response lines
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example EQUB 3 // Set pre-equalization to 3 lines in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
312
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQUF
EQUalization Flatten
Class Format parameter setting - synchronization
Description Determines if composite sync will have all equalization pulses removed in the vertical sync
front porch (delay) period as required by certain military HOBO and Maverik video formats.
The EQUF? query returns the current setting of EQUF.
Command syntax EQUF mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax EQUF?
Query response mode
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example EQUF 0; ALLU // This is the default
Video Test Generator User Guide
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ERRC
ERRor queue Clear
Class System error control
Description Clears all errors waiting to be reported in the error queue.
Command syntax ERRC
314
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ERRQ?
ERRor Queue
Class System error control
Description Returns number errors from the list of all errors in the error queue beginning at index. The
ERRQ? query does not remove the errors from the queue.
Command syntax ERRQ? index number
index
Positive integer number
number
Positive integer number
Query response List of specified range of errors in the error queue.
Examples: ERRQ? 1 5
// List the first five errors in the queue
or
ERRQ? 1 9999 // List all errors in the queue
Video Test Generator User Guide
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ERRY?
Yank ERRor from queue
Class Format parameter setting - synchronization
Description Returns the most recent error added to the error queue and removes it from the queue.
Query syntax ERRY?
Query response Error
316
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXAR
EXtended Aspect Ratio
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Sets the aspect ratio of the extended image content.
Note: If the source image content was shot for a single screen shape, then this parameter
will be the same as the CXAR parameter. Alternatively, if the source image content was
shot for two different shaped screens (using a “shoot and protect” technique), then this
parameter will be different than the CXAR parameter.
Command syntax EXAR aspect_ratio
aspect_ratio
0.75 to ˜2.39
command).
Example EXAR 1.77 // Sets 16:9 picture aspect ratio for extended image content
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXCX
Extended-From-Content Aperture Map
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Maps CXAR-shaped image content into the extended EXAR-shaped aperture.
Command syntax EXCX code
code
0 to 131071 (in decimal)
The mapping code is made up of three binary field codes as follows:
•
•
•
Bits 0-2 are the Squeeze/Stretch (“S”) field code
Bits 3-9 are the Letterbox/Pillar (“L”) field code
Bits 10-16 are the Safe Area (“K”) field code
To determine the proper mapping code, follow these steps:
1. Using the table below, determine the proper “S” field code for bits 0-2.
“S” Field Code
Undo Non-Linear Squeeze
Squeeze/Stretch Method
Disabled (scaling is uniform)
Linear Squeeze (anamorphise)
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
0
Symbol
0
0
1
S
318
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Using the table below, determine the proper “L” field code for bits 3-9.
“L” Field Code
Undo Bars BarContents
Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Symbol
Position
Shrink
1
1
Letterbox/Pillar Mode
Disabled
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Centered shrink w/black bars
top & bottom
Lcbb
Lcgb
Lcwb
Lcsp
Ltbb
Ltgb
Ltwb
Centered shrink w/gray bars
top & bottom
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Centered shrink w/white bars
top & bottom
Centered protected shrink
w/shot surround
Top shrink w/single black bar at
bottom
Top shrink w/single gray bar at
bottom
Top shrink w/white bar at bot-
tom
1. Bits 6 and 7 are used to sequence redundant AFD codes.
In the case of pixel repetition (NPPP not equal to 0), the color of the (extended) bars
on the left and right sides of the image are filled in accordance with the settings of bits
6 and 7—even when the letterbox/pillar fitting method is disabled (bit 3 = 0).
3. Use the following table to determine the proper “K” field code for bits 10-16.
“K” Field Code
Undo
Bars
BarContents Source
Save Area
(Keep) Safe Area Mode
None (w/safe area markers)
Bit 16 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Symbol
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Shrink coded frame to action area with opaque
black bar surround
Kabb
Kagb
Kawb
Kasp
Kaspa
Kaspt
Kaspb
Ktbb
Shrink coded frame to action area with opaque
gray bar surround
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
Shrink coded frame to action area with opaque
white bar surround
Coded frame has shot-protected action area with-
out graticules or bars
Coded frame has shot-protected action area with
action graticules without bars
Coded frame has shot-protected action area with
title graticules without bars
Coded frame has shot-protected action area with
action and title graticules without bars
Shrink coded frame to title area with opaque black
bar surround
Shrink coded frame to title area with opaque gray
bar surround
Ktgb
Video Test Generator User Guide
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“K” Field Code
Undo
Bars
BarContents Source
Save Area
(Keep) Safe Area Mode
Shrink coded frame to title area with opaque white
bar surround
Bit 16 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Symbol
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Ktwb
Coded frame has shot-protected title area without
graticules or bars
Ktsp
Coded frame has shot-protected title area with
action graticules without bars
Ktspa
Ktspt
Ktspb
Kcsp
Kcspa
Kcspt
Coded frame has shot-protected title area with title
graticules without bars
Coded frame has shot-protected title area with
action and title graticules without bars
Coded frame has shot-protected custom area with-
out graticules or border
Coded frame has shot-protected custom area with
action graticules without border
Coded frame has shot-protected custom area with
title graticules without border
320
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method
Binary Field Code
Decimal Code Symbol
Natural aspect ratio
00000000000000000
0
N0
00000000000010000
00000000000100000
00000000000000001
00000000000001000
00000000100001000
00000000100011000
01000100000000000
16
N1
32
N2
Squeeze (anamorphise)
1
S
Centered protected shrink with shot surround
Centered shrink with black bars top and bottom
Top shrink with single black bar at bottom
Shrink coded frame to title area w/ opaque black bar surround
8
Lcsp
Lcbb
Ltbb
Ktbb
264
280
34816
Example EXCX 8 // Use centered protected shrink w/shot surround mode
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FDTA
Font DaTA
Class
Description Writes font data. It takes as arguments table (the table from which to read), index (the
index of the item within the table), and value (the data to be written to the table).
The FDTA? query reads font data. It takes as arguments table (the table from which to
read) and index (the index of the item within the table). It returns value (the data to be
written to the table).
The table argument must be one of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
0 = The header, treated as an uint16[ ].
1 = The character pattern, an uint32[ ].
2 = The location table, an uint16[ ].
3 = The offset/width table, an uint16[ ].
4 = The image width table, an uint8[ ].
Note: The index range for table #0 must be: 0 = index 13. The index range for the other
tables depends on the font size.
Command syntax FDTA table index value
table
positive integer number
index
positive integer number
value
positive integer number
Query syntax FDTA? table index
table
positive integer number
index
positive integer number
322
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLSH
FLaSH new firmware via GPIB
Class System Level
Description Changes the firmware in the generator’s flash EPROM via the GPIB port. This is
accomplished by sending an IEEE 488.2 standard arbitrary block program data to the
generator. The generator temporarily places the block in picture memory and, if received
intact, eventually transfers the binary image to flash memory by internally executing the
VTOF function. Note that one does not have to send VTOF after a FLSH transfer.
FLSH initiates the data transfer. An arbitrary_block_program_data argument containing
either 512K or 2M bytes of binary data should follow this command per standard
IEEE-448.2 section 7.7.6 GPIB data transfer methods.
Command syntax FLSH arbitrary_block_program_data
arbitrary_block_program_data
IEEE-488.2 arbitrary block program data per standard IEEE-448.2 section 7.7.6 GPIB
data transfer method. The maximum number of bytes sent depends on the generator:
801requires a maximum of 524288 bytes, while 802 requires a maximum of 2097152
bytes.
Example FLSH #6524288 …EPROM data bytes…
Video Test Generator User Guide
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTA
ForMaT save As
Class Format memory management
Description Saves the current contents of the format edit buffer using the given name
Command syntax FMTA name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example FMTA MY_FMT // Save with the name "MY_FMT"
324
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTB
ForMaT editing Begin
Class Format editor control
Description Marks the beginning of a format editing session.
Command syntax FMTB
commands
Example FMTN // Initialize format edit buffer
FMTB // Start format editing session
// One or more format editing commands ...
FMTE // End format editing session
Video Test Generator User Guide
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTE
ForMaT editing End
Class Format editor control
Description Marks the end of a format editing session.
Command syntax FMTE
commands
Example FMTB
// Start format editing session
// One or more format editing commands ...
FMTA My_fmt1 // Save edited format as My_fmt1
FMTE
// End format editing session
326
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTG?
ForMaT in buffer Good
Class Format memory management
Description Tests the format in the format buffer for errors. If no errors are found, FMTG? returns zero.
Otherwise, if one or more errors exist, the number of the first error encountered is
returned. To test formats residing in format memory, use the FMTT? query.
Query syntax FMTG?
Query response Returns 0 if no errors are found; otherwise, returns the number of the first error
encountered.
Example FMTG? // Return format error status
Video Test Generator User Guide
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTJ
ForMaT Justify
Class Format memory management
Description Corrects some types of timing errors for the current data in the format buffer. The following
errors are corrected:
•
•
•
•
•
Pixel Rate errors 2071 and 2072
Video Memory Size error 2550
Horizontal Blanking errors 2140, 2141, 2150 and 2155
Horizontal Total errors 2090 and 2091
Horizontal Sync Pulse Width errors 2181 and 2201
The justification routine tries to keep the format close to your original specifications.
However, the format should be reviewed after it is justified to make sure it still meets your
timing requirements.
Command syntax FMTJ
commands
be used to see if any errors remain.
Example FMTJ
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
328
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTK
ForMaT Kill from memory by name
Class Format memory management
Description Erases the named format from memory. The FMTK? query checks to see if the named
format can be erased. The RAM location number is returned if it can be erased.
Otherwise, a zero is returned.
Command syntax FMTK name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax FMTK? name
name
valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or location
Example FMTK my_fmt1 // Erase format called my_fmt1
Video Test Generator User Guide
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTL
ForMaT Load from memory by name
Class Format memory management
Description Assigns a format to the current step of a sequence while between a set of SEQB and
SEQE commands. The FMTL command is context sensitive. The FMTL? query returns
the name of the format currently assigned to the step.
Outside of the sequence editor, the FMTL command reads the format having a name
equal to name from format memory (or EPROM) into the format. FMTL does not
reconfigure the signal generating hardware. This feature allows you to work on the
contents of any format memory location, while continuing to output a signal based on a
location in which a format having a name equal to name is found. If multiple formats exist
having name name, then the lowest numbered location containing a format with a
matching name name is returned. The format memory (RAM) is always searched first. If a
format with name name cannot be found anywhere in the format memory, then the
industry-standard formats located in EPROM (negative locations) are searched next.
The FMTL? query returns zero if a format with a name equal to name cannot be found in
either format space.
Command syntax FMTL name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax FMTL? name
Query response location (returns 0 if not found)
commands
image.
Example FMTL VGA_m3 // Load format called VGA_m3
ALLU
// Update hardware and redraw image
330
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTN
ForMaT New
Class Format memory management
Description Initializes the format editing buffer. Sending this one command is equivalent to sending all
of the following commands:
ASBG 0
GAMA 2.2
GAMC 0
HRAT 0
HRES 0
HSIZ 280
HSPD 0
HSPG 1
HSPP 0
HSPW 0
HTOT 0
SCAN 1
SSST 1
USIZ 2
ASCT 1
ASGG 1
ASSG 0, 1, 0
ASSS 0.286
AVPG 0
AVPS 0.0
AVSB 0.0
AVSS 0.714
AVST 0
XVSG 1, 1, 1
CSPG 1
CSPP 0
DCBM 0
DSEX 0
VRES 0
VSIZ 210
VSPD 0
VSPG 1
VSPP 0
VSPW 0
VTOT 0
DSST 1
DVSP 0
DVST 0
EQUA 0
EQUB 0
This should be the first command sent to the generator when creating a new format. The
command only resets to a known state. The command does not create a usable format.
The FMTN? query returns the current name of the format in the buffer.
Command syntax FMTN name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax FMTN?
Video Test Generator User Guide
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Query response name
Example FMTN // Initialize format buffer
or
FMTN Narf // Initialize format buffer and name the format "Narf"
332
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTP
ForMaT Path
Class Format memory management
Description Sets the current format path name to a given directory. The query will return the current
format path name.
Command syntax FMTP name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax FMTP?
Query response name
Example DIRQ?
// List directory objects
FMT
IMG
VGA_FMTS
SEQ
FMTP VGA_FMTS // Load a custom format knob list
FMTP FMT // Load the default format knob list
Video Test Generator User Guide
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTQ?
ForMaT Query pointer
Class Format memory management
Description Returns number format names from the list of all the formats stored in format memory
beginning at index. The formats are kept in alphanumeric order. The generator maintains
internal variables for the current index and number values. The value of index is
automatically incremented by number after the query is executed. Sending the query with
just an index parameter returns the same number of names as the last time, starting at the
given index. Sending the query with no parameters, returns the next set of names.
Query syntax FMTQ? [index [number]]
index
positive integer number
number
positive integer number
Query response List of specified format names
Example FMTQ? 1 9999 // List all formats in memory
or
FMTQ? 1 10
FMTQ? 21
FMTQ?
// List the first ten formats in memory
// List the 21st through the 30th FMTes in memory
// List the 31st through the 40th FMTes in memory
334
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTR
ForMaT Read from memory location (by number)
Class Format memory management
Description Reads format from the format memory location into the format buffer. The FMTR
command does not reconfigure the signal generating hardware. The FMTR? query returns
the name of the format stored in location location. FMTR? returns the string EMPTY if the
format memory location location is empty.
Command syntax FMTR location
location
1 through 300 (RAM)
-1 through -24 (EPROM)
Query syntax FMTR? location
Query response name
commands
image.
Example FMTR -5 // Load format from ROM location 5
ALLU
// Update hardware and redraw image
Video Test Generator User Guide
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTS
ForMaT Save
Class Format memory management
Description Saves the current format edit buffer contents into format memory using the current name
of the format in the edit buffer.
Command syntax FMTS
Example FMTL DMT0660 // Loads a format for editing
FMTB
// Begins and editing session
HRES 654
// Sets the horizontal resolution to 654 pixels
.
.
// other format parameters
.
HTOT 720
FMTE
FMTS
// Sets the horizontal total to 720 pixels
// Ends the format editing session
// Saves format
336
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTU
ForMaT Use
Class Format memory management
Description Checks the current contents of the format buffer for errors; if no errors are found, it
reconfigures the signal generating hardware in accordance with the contents. It does not
redraw the previously displayed test image. In some cases this may distort the old image.
The FMTU? query returns either a format memory location location or zero. If the signal
format currently being output by the signal generating hardware matches that originally
memory location, then the matching format memory location location is returned.
Otherwise, if the format contents have been used to update the signal generating
hardware since either an FMTR or FMTL command has been issued, then FMTU? query
returns zero.
Command syntax FMTU
Query syntax FMTU?
Query response location or 0
Video Test Generator User Guide
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTZ
ForMat Zap
Class Format memory management
Description Clears format storage memory starting at first and ending at last. The cleared locations are
then tagged as being empty. If no last parameter is given, only the first location is cleared.
The FMTZ? query is used to determine if a location contains a format or is empty.
Command syntax FMTZ first last
Query syntax FMTZ? location
338
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FORM
draw FORMat data block
Class Custom image primitive
Description Displays basic information about the format driving the display. The first line shows the
number of horizontal active pixels and vertical active lines. The last number on the line is
the number of fields per frame (1 for non-interlaced and 2 for interlaced). The second and
third lines show the horizontal and vertical rates, respectively. Text is on a black
rectangular background with a single pixel border.
FORM uses three (3) parameters. The first is the color of the text and border. The next two
are the X and Y coordinates for the top left corner of the block of text.
Command syntax FORM color x y
color
available colors
x
y
positive integer number
positive integer number
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example FORM blue 30 200 // Display format information
// in blue beginning at X=30, Y=200
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRAT?
Frame RATe Query
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Returns the current frame (vertical) rate setting.
Query syntax FRAT?
Query response frame rate
Example FRAT?
25.0000
340
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRGB
Foreground Red, Green and Blue levels
Class System parameter settings
Description Temporarily sets the portions of an image drawn with a color selection of foreground to the
given red, green and blue values. All three colors can be set to the same level using a
single parameter. The color selection for one or more primitives in a custom image must
be set to foreground in order to see the affect of this command on a custom image. The
setting is not global and is not saved. The FRGB? query returns the current red, green and
blue settings of FRGB.
Command syntax FRGB red_level green_level blue_level
or
FRGB common_gray_level
level
min = 0 (full off)
max = 255 (full on)
Query syntax FRGB?
Query response red_level green_level blue_level
Example FRGB 255 128 0 // Set foreground color to orange
or
FRGB 128 // Set foreground color to a mid-gray level
Video Test Generator User Guide
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FSPD
Frame Sync Pulse Delay
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Sets the delay of the frame sync pulse relative to the last line of active video in the current
format. The FSPD? query returns the current FSPD setting.
Command syntax FSPD delay
delay
min = 0 lines
max = (VTOT/SCAN) line
Query syntax FSPD?
Query response delay
commands
the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example FSPG 1
FSPP 1
// Enable Frame Sync
// Set for positive going pulse
// Make the pulse 20 pixels wide
// Pulse to occur 300 lines after
// the last line of active video
// Update hardware to new settings
FSPW 20
FSPG 300
FMTU
342
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FSPG
Frame Sync Pulse Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Enables and disables the digital horizontal sync output. The FSPG? query returns the
current FSPG mode.
Command syntax FSPG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax FSPG?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example FSPG 1
// Enable Frame Sync
FMTU
// Update hardware to new settings
Video Test Generator User Guide
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FSPP
Frame Sync Pulse Polarity
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital frame sync output. Setting polarity to one (1)
causes the leading edge of frame sync to be a low-to-high transition. Setting polarity to
zero (0) causes the leading edge of frame sync to be a high-to-low transition. The FSPP?
query returns the current polarity of FSPP.
Command syntax FSPP polarity
polarity
0 = active-low (negative going pulse)
1 = active-high (positive going pulse)
Query syntax FSPP?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example FSPG 1
FSPP 1
// Enable Frame Sync
// Set for positive going pulse
// Make the pulse 20 pixels wide
// Pulse to occur 300 lines after
// the last line of active video
// Update hardware to new settings
FSPW 20
FSPG 300
FMTU
344
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FSPW
Frame Sync Pulse Width
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the width of the frame sync pulse. The FSPW? query returns the current
setting of FSPW.
Command syntax FSPW pixels
pixels
min = 1
max = HTOT - 1
Query syntax FSPW?
Query response pixels
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example FSPG 1
// Enable Frame Sync
FSPP 1
// Set for positive going pulse
FSPW 20 // Make the pulse 20 pixels wide
FSPG 300 // Pulse to occur 300 lines after the last line of active video
FMTU
// Update hardware to new settings
Video Test Generator User Guide
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAMA
GAMmA correction factor
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Establishes the current video gamma correction factor. The GAMA? query returns the
current setting of the gamma correction factor.
Command syntax GAMA factor
factor
min = 0.1 (floating point accepted)
max = 10.0 (floating point accepted)
For HDMI video signals GAMA is always 2.222
Query syntax GAMA?
Query response factor
commands
ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example GAMC 1
GAMA 2.2 // Set correction factor in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
// Enable gamma correction in buffer
346
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAMC
GAMma Correction mode
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Enables or disables application of the video gamma correction factor. The GAMC? query
can be used to determine if the gamma correction factor is currently being applied.
Command syntax GAMC mode
mode
0 = disable (don't correct)
1 = enable (correct)
Query syntax GAMC?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example GAMC 1
// Enable gamma correction in buffer
GAMA 2.2 // Set correction factor in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GCET?
Get Component Error Tallies
Class DVI signal analyzer
Description Reads the number of errors in the red, green, and blue components along with the total
number of bad pixels.
Query syntax GCET?
Query response R, G, B, and bad pixels
Example PNAU
//Pseudo-random noise generated
//Stop pseudo-random noise
CR
GCET?
0,21,0,21 //Returns 21 Green pixel errors and a total of 21 bad pixels
348
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GETA?
GET data from Absolute memory location
Class Direct processor control
Description Returns the value of the data stored at the memory address specified. Up to 32 bits can be
Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by
Quantum Data.
Query syntax GETA? address
address
0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
Query response value
Other required GETAand GETA? expect and return parameters formatted according to the current radix
commands
Video Test Generator User Guide
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GETR?
GET data from Relative memory location
Class Direct processor control
Description Returns the value of the data stored at the memory location currently pointed to by the
SIZE bits after the current location has been read.
Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by
Quantum Data.
Query syntax GETR?
Query response value
Other required GETR and GETR? expect and return parameters formatted according to the current radix
commands
350
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GFED?
Get First Error Data
Class DVI signal analyzer
Description Returns information about the first error encountered.
Query syntax GFED?
Query response expected value followed by the errant value (in hex)
Example PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated
CR
//Stop pseudo-random noise
GFED? //Returns expected (40018C) and errant (FFFFFF) value of first
errored pixel
40018C,FFFFFF
Video Test Generator User Guide
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLUT
Get LUT from hardware
Class Lookup Table Memory Management
Description Copies the current values from the hardware lookup table to the lookup table edit buffer.
Command syntax GLUT
352
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GMAP
Get pixel MAP from frame buffer
Class Bitmap image control
Description The GMAP command
Command syntax GMAP width height x y name
width
height
x
y
name
Other required The contents of the temporary buffer can not be edited directly. The MAPL command must
commands
be used to copy the temporary buffer contents to the edit buffer.
Example GMAP 3 3 5 5 thismap // get a new map named thismap from frame buffer
MAPL mymap
MAPB
// load bitmap mymap into edit buffer
// begin map editing context
Video Test Generator User Guide
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GNPT?
Get Number of Pixel Tested
Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data
Description Returns the number of pixels being measured in billions after a pseudo noise
measurement has finished execution (that is, completed the PNAU command).
Query syntax GNPT?
Query response number of pixels
Example PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated
CR //Stop pseudo-random noise
GNPT? //Returns 4.255 billion pixels
4.255
354
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GPEL?
Get PixEL color components
Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data
Description Takes the (x, y) coordinates address of a pixel and returns the red, green, and blue color
components of the pixel at that address.
Query syntax GPEL? x y
Query response R, G, B
Possible errors Should this info be integrated into the Query response area, instead of creating a new
label?The GPEL? query may respond back with one of the following errors in case of a
parameter is not set correctly (or in case the setup is not correct).
PNSeedExceedsLimit
PNLengthExceedsLimit
PNNotSupported
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
NoInputSupported
XcoordOutOfRange
YcoordOutOfRange
Example PDSX 128
PDSY 256
PDSH 64
//sets patch starting at x-pixel 128
//sets patch starting at y-pixel 256
//sets patch height at 64 pixels
//sets patch width at 90 pixels
//captures patch of image
PDSW 96
PDAU
GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256
0,255,0
Video Test Generator User Guide
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GPER?
Get Pixel Error Rate
Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data
Description Returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion after a pseudo noise measurement has
finished execution (that is, completed the PNAU command).
Query syntax GPER?
Query response pixel error rate
Example PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated
CR
//Stop pseudo-random noise
GPER? //Returns 0.88 billion pixel errors
0.88
356
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GPIB
GPIB address
Class GPIB port control
Description Sets the address of the generator on the GPIB port. The address change takes affect as
soon as the command is issued. The new address setting will be maintained until 1) the
address is changed another GPIB command, 2) the unit is re-initialized with an INIT
command or 3) the unit is re-initialized because the power-up self-test found corrupted
data in battery backed system memory. In cases 2 and 3, the GPIB address will revert to
the address set on the GPIB address switches, if the unit has them. The address reverts to
15 if the unit does not have GPIB address switches. The GPIB? query returns the current
GPIB address of the unit.
Command syntax GPIB address
address
integer, 0-30
Query syntax GPIB?
Query response address
Example GPIB 5 // Set GPIB address to 5
Video Test Generator User Guide
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GRID
draw a centered GRID
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a crosshatch of a given color and forms a given number of boxes in each direction.
All lines are 1 pixel thick. All of the lines in a given direction are equally spaced. Any
remaining pixels are distributed as equally as possible around the perimeter of the grid.
This may cause the first and last lines in each direction not to be at the very edges of
video.
Command syntax GRID color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes
color
available colors
horizontal_boxes
number of horizontal boxes (half of number of pixels)
vertical_boxes
number of vertical boxes (half of number of lines)
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example GRID gray75 14 10 // Draw a gray75 grid with 14 horizontal
// and 10 vertical boxes
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
358
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GRIH
draw a GRIll pattern of Horizontal lines
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws equally spaced horizontal lines that form a grill over the entire active video area.
The primitive uses three parameters. The first is the color of the lines, the second is the
thickness of the lines, and the third is the thickness of the space between the lines.
Command syntax GRIH color line_width space_width
color
available colors
line_width
number of pixels in line
space_width
number of pixels in space
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example GRIH green 4 6 // Draw green grid with 4-pixel lines and 6-pixel spaces
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GRIV
draw a GRIll pattern of Vertical lines
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws equally spaced vertical lines that form a grill over the entire active video area. The
gaps are not touched and will show any previously drawn primitives. The primitive uses
three parameters. The first is the color of the lines, the second is the thickness of the lines,
and the third is the thickness of the space between the lines.
Command syntax GRIV color line_width space_width
color
available colors
line_width
number of pixels in line
space_width
number of pixels in space
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example GRIV cyan 16 16 // Draw cyan grill with 16-pixel lines
// and 16-pixel spaces
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
360
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GRNG
GRNe Gate
Class Video Gate
Description Toggles the green video signal gate.
Command syntax GRNG mode
mode
0 = disable
1 = enable
Query syntax GRNG?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
Example GRNG 0; ALLU // disable green video component
Video Test Generator User Guide
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GTLS
Go To Local State
Class System Control
Description Enables the use of the front panel keys and knobs (local operation) on the unit that may
current state of local operation.
Command syntax GTLS
Query syntax GTLS?
Query response 0 or 1
0 = local state disabled (local lockout enabled)
1 = local state enabled (local lockout disabled)
362
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HATI
draw a centered crossHATch from the Inside out
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a crosshatch from the inside-out of a given color and forms a given number of
boxes in each direction. The primitive has center lines that divide the active video exactly
in half in each direction. The vertical center line is 2 pixels thick if the format has an even
number of active pixels. The horizontal center line is 2 pixels thick if the format has an
even number of active lines. All other lines are 1 pixel thick. If you enter an odd number of
boxes, a half box is placed at each end of the crosshatch. All lines in a given direction are
spaced equally. Any remaining pixels are distributed as equally as possible around the
perimeter of the grid. This may cause the first and last lines in each direction not to be at
the very edges of video. In turn, this may cause any half boxes to be slightly larger.
Command syntax HATI color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes
color
available colors
horizontal_boxes
number of horizontal boxes (half of number of pixels)
vertical_boxes
number of vertical boxes (half of number of lines)
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example HATI green 15 9 // Draw a green grid with 15 horizontal
// and 9 vertical boxes
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HATO
draw a centered crossHATch from the Outside in
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a crosshatch from the outside-in of a given color and forms a given number of
boxes in each direction. All lines are 1 pixel thick. The first and last lines in each direction
are at the very edges of active video. All the lines in a given direction are spaced equally.
Any remaining pixels are added to the boxes along the horizontal and vertical centers of
the image.
Command syntax HATO color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes
color
available colors
horizontal_boxes
number of horizontal boxes (half of number of pixels)
vertical_boxes
number of vertical boxes (half of number of lines)
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example HATO yellow 15 9 // Draw a yellow grid with 15 horizontal
// and 9 vertical boxes
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
364
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDCP?
HDCP
Class HDCP
Description: The HDCP query is used to control HDCP tests.
Query syntax HDCP? [A1 | A2] [B1 | B2] [frames]
A1
runs the test with public keys A1
A2
runs the test with public keys A2
B1
runs the test with public keys B1
B2
runs the test with public keys B2
frames
The number of frames to be tested. The default is 512.
Example HDCP? 2000
// run test with production keys for 2000 frames
HDCP? a2 b1 2000 // run test with public keys a2, b1 for 2000 frames
Video Test Generator User Guide
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI
High-Definition Multimedia Interface protocol
Class Digital video signal control
Description Sets the current digital protocol. Restarting the generator does not change this setting.
The HDMI? query returns the current mode.
Command syntax HDMI mode
mode
0 to disable HDMI (use alternative protocol such as DVI 1.0)
1 to enable HDMI (default)
This command affects the DVPT parameter as shown below:
Interface hardware used
HDMI setting
DVPT setting
DVI only
0
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
HDMI
Query syntax HDMI?
Query response 0 or 1
Example HDMI 0
ALLU
366
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HRAT
Horizontal RATe
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Sets the line frequency. Pixel rate is equal to HTOT multiplied by HRAT. Frame rate is
equal to HRAT divided by VTOT. Field rate is equal to SCAN multiplied by the frame rate.
The HRAT? query returns the current horizontal frequency setting.
Command syntax HRAT frequency
frequency
typical min = 1000 Hz (floating point accepted)
typical max = 130000 Hz (floating point accepted)
Query syntax HRAT?
Query response frequency in Hz (floating point returned)
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example HRAT 32768 // Set 32.768 kHz rate in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
or
HRAT 32.768E3 // Set a 32.768 kHz rate
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HRES
Horizontal RESolution
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Establishes the number of active pixels per line. The HRES? query returns the current
setting of HRES.
Command syntax HRES pixels
pixels
min = 16
max depends on VRES and model of generator
Query syntax HRES?
Query response pixels
commands
Example HRES 480 // Set 480 active pixels line in buffer
ALLU
// Configure hardware and redraw image
368
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSIZ
Horizontal SIZe
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Establishes the horizontal physical size of the image on the display. Units expected (or
The HSIZ? query returns the current setting of HSIZ.
Note: Make sure that the USIZ parameter is properly set before using the HSIZ command.
Changing the USIZ setting after entering HSIZ will convert the size to match the new unit
of measure.
Command syntax HSIZ physical_size
physical_size
positive value (floating point accepted)
Query syntax HSIZ?
Query response Returns physical size (floating point returned)
commands
command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image, taking the
new size into account.
Example FMTB
USIZ 1
// Begin editing session One or more format editing commands
// ...
// Select inches as unit of measure in buffer
HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in buffer
VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer
ALLU
FMTE
// Test the new settings
// more format editing commands
// ...
// End of editing session
Video Test Generator User Guide
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSPD
Horizontal Sync Pulse Delay
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the delay between the leading edge of blanking and the leading edge of the
horizontal sync pulse. The HSPD? query returns the current setting of HSPD.
Command syntax HSPD pixels
pixels
min = 1
max = HTOT - HRES - HSPW
Query syntax HSPD?
Query response pixels
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example HSPD 16 // Set 16 pixel pulse delay in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
370
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSPG
Horizontal Sync Pulse Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Enables and disables the digital horizontal sync output. The HSPG? query returns the
current HSPG mode.
Command syntax HSPG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax HSPG?
Query response 0 or 1
Other required To use digital horizontal sync, digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the
commands
image.
Example HSPG 1 // Enable H sync output in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSPP
Horizontal Sync Pulse Polarity
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital horizontal sync outputs. Setting polarity to 1
causes the leading edge of horizontal sync to be a low-to-high transition. Setting polarity to
0 causes the leading edge of horizontal sync to be a high-to-low transition. The HSPP?
query returns the current polarity of HSPP.
Command syntax HSPP polarity
polarity
0 = active-low (negative going pulse)
1 = active-high (positive going pulse)
Query syntax HSPP?
Query response 0 or 1
Other required To use digital horizontal sync, it must be gated on with the HSPG command and digital
commands
hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example HSPP 0 // Set active low H sync in buffer
HSPG 1 // Enable H sync output in buffer
SSST 1 // Select H&V sync type in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
372
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSPW
Horizontal Sync Pulse Width
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the width of the horizontal sync pulse. The HSPW? query returns the current
setting of HSPW.
Command syntax HSPW pixels
pixels
min = 1
max = HTOT - HRES - HSPD
Query syntax HSPW?
Query response pixels
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example HSPW 32 // Set pulse width to 32 pixels in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSRS
Horizontal Sync Rate Shift
Class System parameter settings
801GC, 801GC-ISA, 801GF, 801GF-ISA and 801GX only
Description Temporarily shifts the horizontal sync frequency of the generator. The first parameter
controls the amount of shift (in Hz) and the second parameter controls the approximate
length of time (in seconds) that the frequency is shifted, before returning to nominal. Both
parameters can be entered as floating point numbers.
Command syntax HSRS shift_factor shift_period
shift_factor
should not exceed ±10% of normal horizontal rate to ensure stable operation of the
generator
shift_period
non-negative
Example HSRS -100 2.5 // Shifts the horizontal rate of the currently running
// format down by 100 Hz for about 2.5 sec.
374
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HSSC
Horizontal Sync Skew Calibration
Class System Level Parameter
Description Skews the horizontal pulse delay by the given number of pixels on all formats loaded after
The HSSC? query returns the current HSSC setting. Used for correcting HSPD errors on
the 801GC, 801GC-ISA and 801GX generators.
Command syntax HSSC skew
skew
min=-10 (integer)
max=+10 (integer)
Query syntax HSSC?
Query response skew
Example HSSC 2
Video Test Generator User Guide
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HTOT
Horizontal TOTal pixels per line
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Establishes the total number of pixels per horizontal line. The HTOT? query returns the
current setting of HTOT.
The pixel rate is equal to HRAT multiplied by HTOT.
Note: The current version of the firmware does not allow you to directly enter a specific
pixel rate when setting up a format. If your test specifications call for a specific pixel or dot
clock rate, enter suitable values for HRAT and HTOT to give you the desired pixel rate.
Command syntax HTOT pixels
pixels
min:
801GP = 2
801GC, GF, GX = 144
801GC-ISA, GF-ISA = 144
max:
801GP = 2048
801GC, GX = 4096
801GC-ISA = 4096
801GF, 801GF-ISA = 65,536
Query syntax HTOT?
Query response pixels
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example HTOT 800 // Set total to 800
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
376
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HVPD?
Horizontal Vertical Sync Pulse Delay
Class Format Parameter Setting - Synchronization
Description Returns the pixel delay between the horizontal and vertical sync pulses.
Query syntax HVPD?
Query response number of pixels
Example HVPD? // read pixel delay between HSYNC and VSYNC pulses
1
// one pixel delay
Related commands None
Video Test Generator User Guide
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HVSA
Horizontal Vertical Sync Adjustment
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Lengthens the serration period a given number of pixels from the format’s nominal default
value as required by certain military STANAG video formats. The HVSA? query returns the
current setting of HVSA.
Command syntax HVSA pixels
pixels
integer, 0 and less than HSPW
Query syntax HVSA?
Query response pixels
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example HVSA 30;
ALLU
378
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I2CR?
I2C port Read
Class EDID and DDC control
Description Automatically reads data using a specified I2C protocol. This command reads data from
the DDC port (if equipped), EDID, enhanced DDC (E-DDC) data, and VESA DDC/CI
2
(DDC2Bi) data using the I C bus. All numeric parameters are given in ASCII HEX.
Note: EDID-compatible receivers use EPROMs with single-byte or double-byte
addresses. The I2CR? query uses different parameters depending on the EPROM
type. To determine which EPROM type is used, try both syntaxes until you can read
data from the EPROM.
Query syntax I2CR? eprom i2c_address offset #_of_bytes
(EPROM with
single-byte
addresses)
Query syntax I2CR? eprom1 i2c_address offset #_of_bytes
(EPROM with
double-byte
addresses)
Query syntax I2CR? ddcci dst_address #_of_bytes
(DDC/CI protocol)
Query syntax I2CR? e_ddc ddc_pointer_addr segment# i2c_address offset #_of_bytes
(E-DDC protocol)
i2c_address (hex)
2
i c bus address (A0, A1,...)
offset (hex)
address offset (in bytes)
#_of_bytes (hex)
number of bytes
dst_address (hex)
destination address
ddc_pointer_addr (hex)
segment pointer address
segment# (hex)
segment pointer number
Video Test Generator User Guide
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1 This example reads a four page E-EDID, using the I2C e_ddc protocol, one page at a
time.
R:\>i2cr? e_ddc 60 0 a0 0 80
00FFFFFFFFFFFF004489B200050000000D0C010380502D780A0DC9A05747982712484C200
00001010101010101010101010101010101011D8018711C1620582C2500C48E2100009E8C
0AD08A20E02D10103E9600138E21000018000000FC0048444D492054560A2020202020000
000FD003B3D0F2E08000A2020202020200306
R:\>i2cr? e_ddc 60 0 a0 80 80
F002020000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000C
R:\>i2cr? e_ddc 60 1 a0 0 80
02031CF149850408020106141216230907078301000065030C001000011D007251D01E206
E285500C48E2100001ED60980A020E02D1010602200128E210000188C0AD090204031200C
405500C48E21000018011D80D0721C1620102C2580C48E2100009E8C0AA01451F01600267
C4300138E21000098000000000000000000A4
R:\>i2cr? e_ddc 60 1 a0 80 80
020308F1431113158C0AD090204031200C405500138E21000018011D00BC52D01E20B8285
540C48E2100001E8C0AA02051201810187E2300C48E210000980000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000000000000071
Example 2 This command returns 128 bytes of EDID from the connected device.
i2cr? e_ddc 60 0 a0 0 80
380
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I2CW
I2C port Write
Class EDID and DDC control
Description Writes raw binary data from the DDC port (if equipped), EDID, and VESA DDC/CI
2
(DDC2Bi) data using the I C bus.
Note: EDID-compatible receivers use EPROMs with single-byte or double-byte
addresses. The I2CW command uses different parameters depending on the EPROM type.
Command syntax I2CW eprom i2c_address offset #_of_bytes data
(EPROM with
single-byte
addresses)
Command syntax I2CW eprom1 i2c_address offset #_of_bytes data
(EPROM with
double-byte
addresses)
Command syntax I2CW ddcci dst_address src_address length [command+data+checksum]
(DDC/CI protocol)
i2c_address (hex)
2
i c bus address (A0, A1,...)
offset (hex)
address offset (in bytes)
#_of_bytes (hex)
number of bytes
data (hex)
data
command (hex)
command
checksum (hex)
checksum
Video Test Generator User Guide
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1 This command writes the first 8 bytes of EDID to the EPROM.
Note: Always confirm that you can successfully read an address (using the I2CR? query)
before writing to that address.
i2cw eprom a0 0 8 00FFFFFFFFFFFF00
Example 2 This command reads the EDID from a specified address.
i2cr? eprom a0 0 80
Example 3 This command writes DDC2Bi data.
i2cw ddcci 6E 51 81 B10F
Example 4 This commands reads the DDC2Bi data.
i2cr? ddcci 6F 5
382
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IDET
Initialization DETect
Class System Parameter
Description Stores the integer flag value in non-volatile memory. The value is not changed except by
1) another IDET command, 2) re-initializing the unit with an INIT command, or 3) the
system firmware because the power-up self test found corrupted data in battery backed
system memory. In cases 2 and 3, the IDET value will revert to 0. The IDET? query returns
the current IDET value. The IDET command and query are used by automated test
systems to determine if a particular unit has been replaced or reinitialized since it had its
IDET value set to unique number by that system.
Command syntax IDET integer flagNeed help with this syntax and parameter formatting.
-2,147,483,647 ??integer flag?? +2,147,483,647
Query syntax IDET?
Query response flag
Example IDET 19980616 // Set IDET to a non-zero value
Video Test Generator User Guide
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IFTG
InfoFrame Type Gate
Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter
Description Gates the InfoFrames by type. The mask value is a value ORed with the current setting.
Note: For more information about the InfoFrame structure, see the EIA Standard
EIA/CEA-861-B (Section 6).
Command syntax IFTG mask
mask
A bit mask based on these InfoFrame type values.
Type
Value
GIF
1
AVI
2
SPD
AUD
MPG
4
8
16
Example This example enables AUD (8), SPD (4), and AVI (2) InfoFrames (but not MPG and GIF
InfoFrames). The MPG and GIF InfoFrames are gated off, and loaded with zeros.
IFTG 14
IFGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IFTR
InfoFrame Type Repeat Mask
Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter
Description Specifies if an InfoFrame type is to be sent once (after the IFGU command is executed), or
sent in every vertical blanking period (frame).
Note: For more information about the InfoFrame structure, see the EIA Standard
EIA/CEA-861-B (Section 6).
Command syntax IFTR mask
mask
A bit mask based on these InfoFrame type values.
Type
Value
GIF
1
AVI
2
SPD
AUD
MPG
4
8
16
Example This example specifies that AUD (8) and AVI (2) InfoFrames should be repeated with
every frame, and other InfoFrame types should be sent once.
IFTR 10
IFGU
386
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGA
IMaGe save As
Class Image memory management
Description Saves the current contents of the image edit buffer using the given name.
Command syntax IMGA name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example IMGA MY_IMG // Save with the name "MY_IMG"
Video Test Generator User Guide
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGB
IMaGe editing Begin
Class Image editor control
Description Marks the beginning of an image editing session.
Command syntax IMGB
commands
Example IMGN // Initialize image edit buffer
IMGB // Start image editing session
// One or more image editing
// commands ...
IMGE // End image editing session
388
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGE
IMaGe editing End
Class Image editor control
Description Marks the end of an image editing session.
Command syntax IMGE
commands
Example IMGB
// Start image editing session
// One or more image editing commands ...
IMGA MYIMG_02 // Save edited image as "MYIMG_02"
IMGE
// End image editing session
Video Test Generator User Guide
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGK
IMaGe Kill
Class Image memory management
Description Deletes an image by name. The query returns a 1 if the named image can be deleted. If
the image is read-only or nonexistent, the query returns a 0.
Command syntax IMGK name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax IMGK? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or 1
Example IMGK MY_IMG // Delete dir called "MY_IMG"
390
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGL
IMaGe Load
Class Image memory management
Description Assigns an image to the current step of a sequence while between a set of SEQB and
SEQE commands. The IMGL command is context sensitive. The IMGL? query returns the
name of the image currently assigned to the step.
Outside of the sequence editor, the IMGL command copies the image having a name
equal to name from image memory into the image edit buffer. The query returns a one (1)
if the named image can be loaded, otherwise a zero (0) is returned.
Command syntax IMGL name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax IMGL? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or 1
commands
image in the edit to draw on the unit under test.
Example IMGL MY_IMG // Load "MY_IMG" dir in edit buffer
IMGU
// Draw contents of buffer
Video Test Generator User Guide
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGN
IMaGe New
Class Image editor control
Description Initializes the image edit buffer. The name name is assigned as the image's name. The
query will return the name that has been assigned as the image's name.
Command syntax IMGN name
name
optional valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax IMGN?
Query response name
Example IMGN
// Init edit buffer without assigning a new name
or
IMGN MY_IMG // Init edit buffer with name of "MY_IMG"
392
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGP
IMaGe Path
Class Image memory management
Description Sets the current image path name to a given directory. The query will return the current
image path name.
Command syntax IMGP name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax IMGP? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response name
Example IMGP FINAL // Sets image pathname to a directory called "FINAL".
Video Test Generator User Guide
393
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGQ?
IMaGe Query pointer
Class Image memory management
Description Returns number image names from the list of all the images stored in image memory
beginning at index. The images are kept in alphanumeric order.
Query syntax IMGQ? index number
index
positive integer number
number
positive integer number
Query response List of specified image names
Example IMGQ? 1 5
// List the first five images in memory
or
IMGQ? 1 9999 // List all images in memory
394
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGR
IMaGe Read image from image memory location
Class Image memory management
Description Copies the image residing in the image memory with location location into the image
buffer. The IMGR command does not cause the selected image to be drawn. See the
by name is the preferred method of selecting images.
Command syntax IMGR location
location
-1 through -26 (EPROM)
commands
setting and redraws the test image.
Example IMGR 1 // Select first custom image in memory
IMGU
// Draw the image
Video Test Generator User Guide
395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGS
IMaGe Save
Class Image memory management
Description Saves the current contents of the generator's custom image edit buffer back to the
memory location from which it was originally read.
Command syntax IMGS
396
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMGU
IMaGe Use
Class Image memory management
Description Draws an image based on the current contents of the image. The IMGU? query returns
the image memory location location from which the current contents of the image were
Command syntax IMGU
Query syntax IMGU?
Query response location
location
-1 through -26 (EPROM)
Example IMGL BriteBox // Select the BriteBox test image
IMGU
// Draw the selected test image
Video Test Generator User Guide
397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INIT
INITialize to factory default settings
Class Direct processor control
Description Restores the contents of all of the generator's RAM storage locations to factory-default
conditions. The generator then goes through a complete self-test and self-calibration
procedure.
Important: The INIT command permanently and irreversibly removes all user-created
formats, custom images, test sequences, and directories from memory.
Command syntax INIT
398
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISTP?
Image STep
Class Image editor control
Description Allows the contents of user created custom images to be copied out of a generator. The
contents of the firmware-based, built-in test images cannot be read out since they are not
created as a set of primitives.
Query syntax ISTP? returns the number of steps in the custom image in the edit buffer.
or
ISTP? step_number returns the contents of the given step in the custom image in the edit
buffer as a space delimited text string.
commands
Video Test Generator User Guide
399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISUB
Image Step Button
Class System parameter settings
Description Determines if the Image Step key is on or off to allow activation of alternate versions of
test images that have alternate versions.
The ISUB? query returns the current setting of ISUB.
Command syntax ISUB mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax ISUB?
Query response 0 or 1
Example IMGL SlideBox // Load image
ISUB 1
IVER 1
IMGU
// Enable alternate versions
// Load version 1
// Update display
400
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IVER
Image VERsion
Class System parameter settings
Description Determines which version of an image is used for the current step of a sequence while
between a set of SEQB and SEQE commands. The IVER command is context sensitive.
The IVER? query returns the version currently assigned to the step.
Outside of the sequence editor, the IVER command selects which version of the current
image is drawn when either an ALLU or IMGU command is executed. The IVER? query
returns the current setting of IVER.
Command syntax IVER mode
mode
0 = Normal
1 = Invert or display alternate version
Query syntax IVER?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
updates hardware and redraws the test image with the new setting.
Example IMGL Text_9 // Select image with white text on black
IVER 1
IMGU
// Select inverted with black on white
// Draw the image as selected
Video Test Generator User Guide
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JDVI
Justify pixel clock rate for DVI formats
Class Format editor control
Description Scales the horizontal timing parameters of the format currently in the edit buffer. The
parameters are scaled to produce the given pixel rate while keeping the horizontal scan
rate as close as possible to its original value. The following parameters are scaled:
horizontal total pixels, horizontal active pixels, horizontal sync delay in pixels, and
horizontal sync pulse width in pixels. The parameters are scaled so that their periods, in
microseconds, are as close as possible to their original values.
Command syntax JDVI pixel_rate
pixel_rate
floating point number equal to the desired pixel in MHz
Query syntax JDVI?
Query response pixel_rate
commands
402
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JLDI
Justify pixel clock rate for LDI formats
Class Format editor control
Description Scales the horizontal timing parameters of the format currently in the edit buffer. (For the
801LD used in digital mode, the default is set at 224 MHz.) The parameters are scaled to
produce the given pixel rate while keeping the horizontal scan rate as close as possible to
its original value. The following parameters are scaled: horizontal total pixels, horizontal
active pixels, horizontal sync delay in pixels, and horizontal sync pulse width in pixels. The
parameters are scaled so that their periods, in microseconds, are as close as possible to
their original values.
Command syntax JLDI pixel_rate
pixel_rate
floating point number equal to the desired pixel in MHz
Query syntax JLDI?
Query response pixel_rate
commands
Video Test Generator User Guide
403
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JRAT
Justify pixel clock RATe
Class Format editor control
Description Scales the horizontal timing parameters of the format currently in the edit buffer. The
parameters are scaled to produce the given pixel rate while keeping the horizontal scan
rate as close as possible to its original value. The following parameters are scaled:
horizontal total pixels, horizontal active pixels, horizontal sync delay in pixels, and
horizontal sync pulse width in pixels. The parameters are scaled so that their periods, in
microseconds, are as close as possible to their original values.
Command syntax JRAT pixel_rate
pixel_rate
floating point number equal to the desired pixel in MHz
commands
Example JRAT 202.000E6 // Adjust timing to a 202.000 MHz clock
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
404
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYY
KEY toggle
Class System parameter settings
Description Toggles the status of the following items: image version of the currently displayed image,
red, green and blue video gating, ACS, DCS, and DSS sync gating, and outputs gating.
The order of the keys matches the order of the keys found on the front panel of the
Command syntax KEYY key
key
1 = image (step) version
2 = red gating
3 = green gating
4 = blue gating
5 = ACS gating
6 = DCS gating
7 = DSS gating
8 = outputs gating
Example KEYY 8 // Toggle current status of output gates
Video Test Generator User Guide
405
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KNOB
rotate KNOB
Class System parameter settings
Description Mimics turning the Format or Image knob on the generator.
When a sequence is running, the Format knob loads sequences from the directory
directory. The Image knob is used to go back and forth through the sequence steps.
Clockwise rotation selects higher step numbers.
Command syntax KNOB number clicks
number
1 = upper Format knob
2 = lower Image knob
clicks
An integer representing the number of knob increments from the current active format
or image. A positive integer indicates a clockwise move to a higher index number. A
negative integer indicates a counterclockwise move to a lower index number.
Example KNOB 2 1 // Move Image knob 1 click CW
KNOB 1 -10 // Move the Format knob 10 clicks CCW
406
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCDS?
LCD Status
Class System parameter settings
Description Returns text displayed on LCD of the generator.
Query syntax LCDS?
Example LCDS? // Return text similar to text below
// H32 15=VGA_m3 crlf
// V60 51=SMPTE133
Video Test Generator User Guide
407
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEDS?
LED Status
Class System parameter settings
Description Returns the current status of the generator's signal generating hardware as a single
decimal number. The number corresponds to the status of the lighted key on the generator
in normal operation. The easiest way to interpret the number is to first convert it to an
8-digit binary number. A 1 in a given position, from MSB to LSB, corresponds to the
following hardware settings:
Master output control gated ON
(MSB)
Digital Separate (HS&VS) Sync selected
Digital Composite Sync selected
Analog Composite Sync selected
Blue video enabled
Green video enabled
Red video enabled
Alternate image version selected
(LSB)
Query syntax LEDS?
Query response decimal number from 0 to 255
Example LEDS?
// Returns the following number when the outputs are gated ON, separate
// HS & VS is selected, the red, green and blue video channels are
// enabled and the primary version of an image is selected.
206 // Binary equivalent = 11001110
408
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIMI
draw video LIMIts markers
Class Custom image primitive
Description Places nine markers that define the active video area. An L-shaped marker is placed at
each corner. T-shaped markers are centered along each edge of video, and a small cross
is placed at the center of video. The primitive uses a single parameter: color.
Command syntax LIMI color
color
available colors
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example LIMI white // Place white markers that define active video area
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
409
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LINE
draw a LINE
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a line between any two points. The line is 1 pixel thick. The primitive uses five
parameters: the color and x,y coordinates for both endpoints.
Command syntax LINE color x_start y_start x_end y_end
color
available colors
x_start, y_start, x_ end, y_end
positive integer number
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example LINE yellow 20 5 320 240
// Draw yellow line from X=20, Y=5 to X=320, Y=240
ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
410
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LLOS
Local Lock Out State
Class System Control
Description Enables the use of the front panel keys and knobs (local operation) on the generator that
the current local lockout state.
Command syntax LLOS
Query syntax LLOS?
Query response status
0 = local lockout disabled
1 = local lockout enabled
Example LLOS // Disable the use of front panel controls
Video Test Generator User Guide
411
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LMAX
Lut MAXimum level (Analog)
Class Lookup Table memory management
Description Establishes the maximum integer lookup table level representing full white.
Command syntax LMAX level
level integer
min = 0
max = 65,535
Query syntax LMAX?
Example LMAX 1024
412
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LMAX
Digital Video Maximum quantizing Level
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Sets the maximum quantizing level of the component video signal for white. The default
varies depending on the number of bits per color component. Some applications may
require that the maximum level be set lower than the maximum permissible. The query
reads the current setting for the maximum level.
Command syntax LMAX video_level
video_level
unsigned integer from 59 to 63 when NBPC is 6 gamuts; 235 to 255 when NBPC is 8
gamuts; 940 to 1023 when NBPC is 10 gamuts; 3760 to 4095 when NBPC is 12
gamuts.
Query syntax LMAX?
Example LMAX 254 // To set the maximum digital quantizing level to 254
Video Test Generator User Guide
413
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LMIN
Digital Video Minimum quantizing Level
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Sets the minimum quantizing level of the component video signal for black. The default is
0 for black; however, some applications may require that the minimum level be set higher.
The query reads the current setting for the minimum level.
Command syntax LMIN video_level
video_level
unsigned integer from 0 to 4 when NBPC is 6 gamuts; 0 to 16 when NBPC is 8
gamuts; 0 to 64 when NBPC is 10 gamuts; 0 to 256 when NBPC is 12 gamuts
Query syntax LMIN?
Example LMIN 16 // To set the minimum digital quantizing level to 16
414
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LSPG
Line Sync Pulse Gate
Class Format parameter settings
Description Enables and disables the digital horizontal sync output. The LSPG? query returns the
current LSPG mode.
Command syntax LSPG mode
mode integer
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax LSPG?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example LSPG 1
// Enable Line Sync
FMTU
// Update hardware to new settings
Video Test Generator User Guide
415
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LSPP
Line Sync Pulse Polarity
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital line sync output. Setting polarity to 1 causes the
leading edge of line sync to be a low-to-high transition. Setting polarity to 0 causes the
leading edge of line sync to be a high-to-low transition. The LSPP? query returns the
current polarity of LSPP.
Command syntax LSPP polarity
polarity
0 = active-low (negative going pulse)
1 = active-high (positive going pulse)
Query syntax FSPP?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example LSPG 1
LSPP 1
// Enable Line Sync
// Set for positive going pulse
// Make the pulse 20 pixels wide
// Pulse to occur 300 lines after
// the last line of active video
// Update hardware to new settings
LSPW 20
LSPG 300
FMTU
416
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTA
LUT save As
Class Lookup Table memory management
Description Saves the current contents of the lookup table edit buffer using the given name.
Command syntax LUTA name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example LUTA MY_LUT // Save with the name "MY_LUT"
Video Test Generator User Guide
417
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTB
LUT editing Begin
Class Lookup Table memory management
Description Marks the beginning of a lookup table editing session.
Command syntax LUTB
commands
Example LUTN // Initialize lookup table edit buffer
LUTB // Start lookup table editing session
// One or more lookup table editing commands
// ...
LUTE // End lookup table editing session
418
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTE
LUT editing End
Class Lookup table editor control
Description Marks the end of a lookup table editing session.
Command syntax LUTE
commands
Example LUTB // Start lookup table editing session
// One or more lookup table editing commands
// ...
LUTA My_LUT1 // Save edited lookup table as My_LUT1
LUTE // End lookup table editing session
Video Test Generator User Guide
419
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTK
LUT Kill
Class Lookup table memory management
Description Erases the named lookup table from memory. The LUTK? query checks to see if the
named lookup table can be erased. The RAM location number is returned if it can be
erased. Otherwise, a zero is returned.
Command syntax LUTK name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax LUTK? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or location
Example LUTK my_LUT1 // Erase lookup table called my_LUT1 LUTL
420
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTL
LUT Load
Class Lookup table memory management
Description Reads the lookup table having a name equal to name name from lookup table memory (or
EPROM) into the lookup table. LUTL does not re-configure the signal generating
hardware. This feature allows you to work on the contents of any lookup table memory
location, while continuing to output a signal based on a previously-used lookup table (see
having a name equal to name is found. If multiple lookup tables exist having name name,
then the lowest numbered location containing a lookup table with a matching name name
is returned. The lookup table memory (RAM) is always searched first. If a lookup table with
name name cannot be found anywhere in the lookup table memory, then the
industry-standard lookup tables located in EPROM (negative locations) are searched next.
LUTL? returns 0 if a lookup table with a name equal to name name cannot be found in
either lookup table space.
Command syntax LUTL name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax LUTL? name
Query response location (returns 0 if not found)
commands
Example LUTL my_lut // Load lookup table called my_lut
Video Test Generator User Guide
421
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTN
LUT New
Class Lookup table editor control
Description Initializes the lookup table editing buffer and optionally sets the filename.
Command syntax LUTN name
name
(optional) valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
commands
Example LUTN my_lut2 // Create new edit buffer for my_lut2
LUTB
// Begin editing
422
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTQ?
LUT Query pointer
Class Lookup table memory management
Description Returns number lookup table names from the list of all the lookup tables stored in lookup
table memory beginning at index. The lookup tables are kept in alphanumeric order.
Query syntax LUTQ? index number
index
positive integer number
number
positive integer number
Query response List of specified lookup table names.
Examples: LUTQ? 1 5 // List the first five lookup tables in memory
or
LUTQ? 1 9999 // List all lookup tables in memory
Video Test Generator User Guide
423
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTS
LUT Save
Class Lookup table memory management
Description Saves the current lookup table edit buffer contents into lookup table memory using the
current name of the lookup table in the edit buffer.
Command syntax LUTS
424
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LUTU
LUT Use
Class Lookup table memory management
Description Loads the lookup table hardware in accordance with the buffer contents.
The LUTU? query returns either a lookup table memory location location or 0. If the lookup
table currently in the hardware matches that originally loaded (using the LUTL command)
from a lookup table memory location, then the matching lookup table memory location
location is returned. Otherwise, if the hardware contents have changed since either an
LUTR or LUTL command has been issued, then LUTU? query returns 0.
Command syntax LUTU
Query syntax LUTU?
Query response location or 0
Example LUTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
425
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAPA
bitMAP save As
Class Bitmap memory management
Description Saves the current contents of the bitmap edit buffer using the given name.
Command syntax MAPA name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example MAPA MY_MAP // Save with the name "MY_MAP"
426
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAPB
bitMAP editing Begin
Class Bitmap editor control
Description Marks the beginning of a bitmap editing session.
Command syntax MAPB
commands
Example MAPN // Initialize bitmap edit buffer
MAPB // Start bitmap editing session
// One or more bitmap editing commands ...
MAPE // End bitmap editing session
Video Test Generator User Guide
427
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAPE
bitMAP editing End
Class Bitmap editor control
Description Marks the end of a bitmap editing session.
Command syntax MAPE
commands
Example MAPB
// Start bitmap editing session
// One or more bitmap editing commands ...
MAPA My_map1 // Save edited bitmap as My_map1
MAPE
// End bitmap editing session
428
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAPK
bitMAP Kill from memory by name
Class Bitmap memory management
Description Erases the named bitmap from memory. The MAPK? query checks to see if the named
bitmap can be erased. The RAM location number is returned if it can be erased;
otherwise, a 0 is returned.
Command syntax MAPK name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax MAPK? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or location
Example MAPK my_map1 // Erase bitmap called my_map1
Video Test Generator User Guide
429
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAPL
bitMAP Load from memory by name
Class Bitmap memory management
Description Reads the bitmap having a name equal to name from bitmap memory into the bitmap
buffer. MAPL does not change what is being displayed from the video memory. The
MAPL? query returns the location location in which a bitmap having a name equal to name
is found. If multiple bitmaps exist having name name, then the lowest numbered location
containing a bitmap with a matching name name is returned. MAPL? returns 0 if a bitmap
with a name equal to name cannot be found.
Command syntax MAPL name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax MAPL? name
Query response location (returns 0 if not found)
Example MAPL SHAPE01 // Load bitmap called SHAPE01 into the buffer
430
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAPN
bitMAP New
Class Bitmap editor control
Description Initializes the bitmap editing buffer.
Command syntax MAPN name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example MAPN
// Intialize bit-map buffer
or
MAPN Cool // Initialize format buffer and name the format "Cool".
Video Test Generator User Guide
431
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAPQ?
bitMAP Query pointer
Class Bitmap memory management
Description Returns bitmap names from the list of all the bitmaps stored in bitmap memory beginning
at index. The bitmaps are kept in alphanumeric order. The generator maintains internal
variables for the current index and number values. The value of index is automatically
incremented by number after the query is executed. Sending the query with just an index
parameter returns the same number of names as the last time, starting at the given index.
Sending the query with no parameters returns the next set of names.
Query syntax MAPQ? index number
index
positive integer number
number
positive integer number
Query response List of specified bitmap names.
Example MAPQ? 1 9999 // List all bitmaps in memory
or
MAPQ? 1 10
MAPQ? 21
MAPQ?
// List the first ten bitmaps in memory
// List the 21st through the 30th MAPes in memory
// List the 31st through the 40th MAPes in memory
432
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAPS
bitMAP Save
Class Bitmap memory management
Description Saves the current bitmap edit buffer contents into bitmap memory using the current name
of the bitmap in the edit buffer.
Command syntax
MAPS
Video Test Generator User Guide
433
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMC
MEMory Compact
Class MEM
Description Consolidates free memory into contiguous blocks.
Command syntax MEMC?Is this a command or query. If query, what is the response?
Example MEMC
// Compact the system memory
434
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMF?
MEMory Free
Class MEM
Description Returns the number of free blocks in managed memory.
Query syntax MEMF?
Example MEML? // to determine the amount of free memory block
818088 // lists the number of contiguous free memory blocks
Video Test Generator User Guide
435
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEML?
MEMory Largest free
Class MEM
Description Returns the largest free contiguous block in managed memory.
Query syntax MEML?
Example MEML? // to determine the largest contiguous block of free memory
816568 // lists the amount of contiguous free memory
436
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMT
MEMory Test
Class MEM
Description Runs a memory manager test to detect corruption or inconsistencies. The MEMT? query
returns the results of the most recent run of the memory manager test command.
Command syntax MEMT
Query syntax MEMT?
Query response 0 or 1
0 = no memory corruptions or inconsistencies were discovered
1 = a memory corruption or inconsistency was found
Example MEMT // to run the memory manager test
MEML? // to view the results of the memory manager test
Video Test Generator User Guide
437
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MMAP
Move a rectangular bitMAP area
Class Video Frame Buffer manipulation
Description Copies a rectangular area of pixels from one location of the video frame buffer to another.
The size of the area, in pixels, is defined by the width and height parameters. The top left
corner of the source location is specified by xs, ys pixel coordinates. The top left corner of
the destination location is specified by the xd, yd pixel coordinates.
Command syntax MMAP width height xs ys xd yd
width, height
size of the area, in pixels
xs, ys
top left corner of the source location
xd, yd
top left corner of the destination location
Query syntax MMAP?
Example MMAP 40 30 0 0 50 50 // Copies a 40 pixel wide by 30 pixel high area
// in the top left corner of active video to an
// area 50 pixel below and to the right of the top
// left corner.
438
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MODE
communications MODE
Class System parameter settings
Description Sets the serial port communications parameters of a stand-alone model generator. The
changes take effect as soon as the command is entered. The factory default settings are
2400 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, no stop bits, no handshake, and no protocol.
Command syntax MODE baud parity data stop handshake protocol
baud rate
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bits/sec
parity
N = None, E = Even or O = Odd
data
number of data bits: 7 or 8
stop
number of stop bits: 1 or 2
handshake
N = None
H = Hardware (CTS/RTS)
protocol
N = None
Y=Y-Modem
Example MODE 9600 N 8 1 H N // Set a stand alone generator to
// communicate at 9600 Baud, No parity, 8 data bits,
// 1 stop bit, RTS//CTS handshaking and No protocol
or
MODE 2400 // Change only the baud rate
Video Test Generator User Guide
439
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSIZ
light Meter SIZe
Class System parameter settings
Description Establishes the physical size of the light meter boxes displayed in the BriteBox test image.
The unit of measure used is based on the current setting of the system level USIZ
command. It also affects the size of the cursor boxes in the Persist image. Changing the
size will not change the currently displayed image. The MSIZ? query returns the current
settings of MSIZ based on the current setting of the system level USIZ command.
Command syntax MSIZ width height
or
MSIZ common_size
size
positive floating point number
common_size
square box
Query syntax MSIZ?
Query response width, height
Other required The correct unit of measure should be selected with the USIZ command prior to setting
commands
the size.
Example USIZ 1
MSIZ 2.0
// Select inches for units
// Set size to 2.0 inches
IMGL BriteBox // Select BriteBox image
IMGU
// Draw selected image using new size
440
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MUTE
Audio/Video Mute
Class Sonic data generator
Description Enables and disables the HDMI Audio/Video Mute (AVMUTE) feature. When enabled,
audio and video are muted by the generator.
Command syntax MUTE flag
flag
0 = disable (AVMUTE_clear_flag sent repeatedly)
1 = enable (AVMUTE_set_flag sent repeatedly)
Query syntax MUTE?
Query response 0 or 1
Related commands
Example To enable AVMUTE:
MUTE 1
MUTE?
Use the MUTE? to continuously check until the AVMUTE state is changed (may not take
place right away).
Video Test Generator User Guide
441
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NAMF?
NAMe Find
Class Directory editor control
Description Returns the index number of the entry with name name in the directory edit buffer. The first
name in the buffer has an index value of 1. If name is not found, a value of 0 is returned.
Query syntax NAMF? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response index
Example NAMF? VGA_m4 // Return position of VGA_m4 in directory
442
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NAMI
NAMe Insert
Class Directory editor control
Description Moves all the names with index values equal to or greater than index to the next higher
index value in the directory edit buffer, and then inserts the name name in the directory
edit buffer at position index. A negative number or a 0 used for index will put name at
index position 1. Using a number for index beyond the last name in the buffer will add
name to the index position just beyond the last name. The command does not check if a
file called name is stored in the generator.
Command syntax NAMI index name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example 1 This example inserts the DMT0660A format on the knob list at location 1:
DIRL FMT
DIRB
NAMI 1 DMT0660A
DIRE
DIRS
Example 2 NAMI 5 FOCUS1 // Put FOCUS1 in fifth position
Example 3 NAMI -6 BARS // Put BARS at beginning of dir
Example 4 NAMI 999999 HATCH // Put HATCH at end of dir
Video Test Generator User Guide
443
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NAMK
NAMe Kill
Class Directory editor control
Description Deletes the given name from the directory edit buffer. All names with index values greater
than the index of the deleted name are moved to the next lower index value in the buffer.
Nothing happens if name is not found in the buffer.
Command syntax NAMK name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example NAMK VGA_m4 // Remove VGA_m4 from dir
444
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NAMQ?
NAMe Query
Class Directory editor control
Description Returns number names from the list of names in the directory edit buffer beginning at
index. The generator maintains internal variables for the current index and number values.
The value of index is automatically incremented by number after the query is executed.
Sending the query with just an index parameter, will return the same number of names as
the last time, starting at the given index. Sending the query with no parameters will return
the next set of names in the directory buffer.
Query syntax NAMQ? index number
index
positive integer number
number
positive integer number
Query response List of specified entry names from directory edit buffer.
Example 1 NAMQ? 1 9999 // List the entire buffer
Example 2 NAMQ? 1 10 // List the first ten names in the buffer
NAMQ? 21
NAMQ?
// List the 21st through the 30th names in the buffer
// List the 31st through the 40th names in the buffer
Video Test Generator User Guide
445
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NAMY
NAMe Yank
Class Directory editor control
Description Deletes the name at the given index number from the directory edit buffer. All names with
index values greater than the index of the deleted name are moved to the next lower index
value in the buffer. Nothing happens if index is beyond the index number of last name in
the buffer.
Command syntax NAMY index
Example NAMY 2 // Remove second item from dir
446
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NBPA
Number Bits Per Audio sample
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Sets the number of bits per audio sample for an audio signal. This sets the SS parameter
of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 20).
Command syntax NBPA bits
bits
0 (let incoming external audio stream determine the number of bits per sample)
16
Example NBPA 16
IFGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
447
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NBPC
Number Bits Per Component
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Sets the number of bits per color component (color depth).
Command syntax NBPC bits
bits
6, 8, 10, or 12 depending on output.
Output
NBPC
DVI
8
TV
12
LVDS
6 (18-bit encoding) or 8 (24-bit
encoding)
HDMI Digital RGB or YCbCr 4:4:4 output
HDMI YCbCr 4:2:2 output
8
8, 10, or 12.
Example NBPC 10
FMTU
448
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NCPP
Number Clocks Per Pixel
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Specifies the number of clocks per pixel (double-clocking factor for whole line). Some
industry standard formats (e.g. 480i) have pixel rates that are below the minimum pixel
rate restriction (of 25 MHz) required by the TMDS interface. In these cases, a feature
known as “double-clocking” is used to raise the TMDS clock rate to an acceptable
frequency.
Double-clocking is controlled by the NCPP format parameter. When NCPP is set to 1
(normal single-clocked), each pixel, output by the generator, is paired with one clock
pulse. In this case, the pixel rate is equal to the TMDS clock rate. By setting NCPP to 2
(double-clocked), two clocks are send during each pixel period and the TMDS clock rate is
raised to 2 times the pixel rate.
Note that double clocking with NCPP and pixel repetition (NPPP) cannot be applied at the
same time.
Command syntax NCPP factor
factor
1 or 2
Example NCPP 2
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
449
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NDAC
Number Digital Audio Channels
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Sets the number of digital audio channels for an audio signal. This sets the CC parameter
of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 20).
Note: Currently, only two audio channels are supported.
Command syntax NDAC channels
channels
2
Example NDAC 2
IFGU
450
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NDAS
Number Digital Audio Streams
Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal
Description Sets the number of digital audio streams.
Note: Currently, only one audio stream is supported.
Command syntax NDAS streams
streams
1 (default)
Example NDAS 1
IFGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
451
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NERR?
Number of ERRors in queue
Class System memory management
Description Returns the number of errors waiting to be reported in the error queue.
Query syntax NERR?
Query response number of errors
452
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NLNK
Number of digital LiNKs
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Determines the number of links used by the LVDI digital outputs on generators that
support LVDI outputs. The NLNK? query returns the current setting of NLNK.
Command syntax NLNK links
links integer
0 = Default, let the generator decide
1 = Single link
2 = Dual link
Query syntax NLNK?
Query response links
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example NLNK 2; FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
453
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOGA
use NO GAmma correction
Class Custom image primitive
Description Temporarily disables any gamma correction that may be selected in a format. All color
intensity levels in all parts of the custom image are output without gamma correction.
Gamma correction is disabled only for as long as the image is displayed.
Command syntax NOGA
454
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTU
NOT Until communication is complete
Class System Level
Description Temporarily holds-off any ongoing command execution until communication is complete
Command syntax NOTU
Query syntax NOTU?
Query response 0 if not enabled
non-zero when enabled
commands
Video Test Generator User Guide
455
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NPPP
Number Pixels Per Pixel
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Specifies repetition factor for active portion of line.
Command syntax NPPP factor
factor
0 to disable repetition mode (removes extra left and right repetition bars)
1 to 10 enables pixel repetition mode (inserts extra left and right repetition bars)
Example NPPP 4; FMTU
456
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NSTP?
Number of STePs in sequence
Class Sequence editor control
Description Returns the number of steps in a sequence in the buffer.
Query syntax NSTP?
Query response steps
Video Test Generator User Guide
457
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OERR?
ERRor queue Overflow
Class System memory management
Description Checks for overflow in the error queue. Overflow occurs when an attempt is made to add
more errors to the queue than it can hold.
Query syntax OERR?
Query response overflow status
0 = No Overflow
1 = Overflow
458
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFX
image OFFset X
Class Image editor control
Description Sets the horizontal offset used for the large patch in the Regulate test image. It may also
control other images. The OFFX? query returns the current OFFX setting.
Command syntax OFFX x_offset
x_offset integer
number of pixels
Query syntax OFFX?
Query response X offset
Example OFFX 20
Video Test Generator User Guide
459
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFFY
image OFFsetY
Class Image editor control
Description Sets the vertical offset used for the large patch in the Regulate test image. It may also
control other images. The OFFY? query returns the current OFFY setting.
Command syntax OFFY y_offset
y_offset integer
number of pixels
Query syntax OFFY?
Query response Y offset
Example OFFY 20
460
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OUTG
OUTputs Gate
Class System parameter settings
Description Gates all video and sync outputs of the generator ON and OFF. Gating the outputs OFF
forces all outputs to be turned off. Gating the outputs ON turns on all outputs whose
individual gating settings are turned ON. The OUTG? query returns the current status of
the outputs of the generator.
Command syntax OUTG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax OUTG?
Query response mode
Example OUTG 0
ALLU
Video Test Generator User Guide
461
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OVAL
draw an OVAL
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws an oval whose axes are parallel to the vertical and horizontal axes of displayed
video. The size and position of the oval are defined by its framing rectangle. The framing
rectangle is a rectangle whose sides are both tangent to the oval at four points and are
parallel to the vertical and horizontal axis of video. It is not drawn as part of the primitive.
The figure below shows the relationship of an oval to its framing rectangle.
height
left, top
width
OVAL uses six parameters. The first is color. The next two are the pixel width and height of
the framing rectangle in pixels. The fourth and fifth parameters are the x, y coordinates for
the top left corner of the framing rectangle. The last parameter is the fill.
Command syntax OVAL color width height x y fill
color
available colors
width
total number of horizontal pixels
height
total number of lines
x, y
positive integer numbers
available fill patterns
fill
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example OVAL red 240 150 20 10 GrayPat0 // Draw a red oval 240 pixels wide
// by 150 pixels high. Start framing
// rectangle at X=20, Y=10.
// Fill = none
462
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
draw PAGE of repeating characters
Class Custom image primitive
Description Fills a rectangular area (page or block) with a character that repeats horizontally and
vertically. The color parameter sets the color used to draw the character. The width and
height parameters determine the size of the block to be filled. The x and y parameters
determine the top left corner of the block. The font parameter selects which font is used to
draw the character. The character parameter selects a specific character (by number). For
full alphanumeric fonts, the character number is the same as the character's ASCII code
number. The spacing between the characters is fixed by the character block size in the
font and cannot be changed. Partial characters are not drawn to completely fill the
rectangular area; rather, the largest possible block of full characters is centered in the
rectangular area.
Command syntax PAGE color width height x y font character
color
available colors
width
width of page in pixels
height
height of page in lines
x
position of left edge of page in pixels
y
position of top edge of page in pixels
font
available fonts
character
min = 0
max = 255
Example PAGE blue 40 30 10 10 opix9 69
// Draw a small block of blue E characters in the upper left corner
Video Test Generator User Guide
463
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCPG
Pixel Clock Pulse Gate
Class Format parameter settings
Description Enables and disables the pixel clock pulse output on generators that have a pixel clock
output available. The PCPG? query returns the current setting of PCPG.
Command syntax PCPG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax PCPG?
Query response mode
commands
Example PCPG 1 // Enable pixel clk output in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware with format data
464
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDAU
Pixel Data Analyzer Use
Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data
Description Loads the hardware required and copies the patch (static image) from the DVI source to
memory. This command is used for the Delta Error Patch test.
Command syntax PDAU
Example PDAU //copies patch from external source to generator memory
Video Test Generator User Guide
465
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDSH
Pixel Data Signal Height
Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data
Description Sets the height of the patch of pixel data to be analyzed.
Note: The maximum area (width multiplied by height) of the patch is 1024 pixels.
Command syntax PDSH height
height
pixel height of patch
Query syntax PDSH?
Query response pixel height of patch
Example PDSX 128
PDSY 256
PDSH 64
//sets patch starting at x-pixel 128
//sets patch starting at y-pixel 256
//sets patch height at 64 pixels
//sets patch width at 90 pixels
//captures patch of image
PDSW 96
PDAU
GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256
0,255,0
466
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDSW
Pixel Data Signal Width
Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data
Description Sets the width of the patch of pixel data to be analyzed.
Note: The maximum area (width multiplied by height) of the patch is 1024 pixels.
Command syntax PDSW width
width
pixel width of patch
Query syntax PDSW?
Query response pixel width of patch
Example PDSX 128
PDSY 256
PDSH 64
//sets patch starting at x-pixel 128
//sets patch starting at y-pixel 256
//sets patch height at 64 pixels
//sets patch width at 90 pixels
//captures patch of image
PDSW 96
PDAU
GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256
0,255,0
Video Test Generator User Guide
467
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDSX
Pixel Data Signal X Location
Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data
Description Controls the x location of the patch data to be analyzed.
Command syntax PDSX x
x
x-coordinate number for patch
Query syntax PDSX?
Query response x-coordinate number
Example PDSX 128
PDSY 256
PDSH 64
//sets patch starting at x-pixel 128
//sets patch starting at y-pixel 256
//sets patch height at 64 pixels
//sets patch width at 90 pixels
//captures patch of image
PDSW 96
PDAU
GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256
0,255,0
468
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDSY
Pixel Data Signal Y Location
Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data
Description Controls the y location of the patch data to be analyzed.
Command syntax PDSY y
y
y-coordinate number for patch
Query syntax PDSY?
Query response y-coordinate number
Example PDSX 128
PDSY 256
PDSH 64
//sets patch starting at x-pixel 128
//sets patch starting at y-pixel 256
//sets patch height at 64 pixels
//sets patch width at 90 pixels
//captures patch of image
PDSW 96
PDAU
GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256
0,255,0
Video Test Generator User Guide
469
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PELD
PixEL Depth
Class Format parameter settings
Description Establishes the number of data bits that represent each active pixel in video memory
(frame buffer). The PELD? query returns the current setting of PELD.
Command syntax PELD depth
depth integer
0 = use generator default
4 = 4 bits-per-pixel (16 colors)
8 = 8 bits-per-pixel (256 colors)
32 = 24 bits-per-pixel (16,777,216 colors)
Query syntax PELD?
Query response depth
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example PELD 8 // Select 8 bits-per pixel
ALLU
// Configure hardware and redraw image
470
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PENH
PEN Height
Class Image editor control
Description Sets a variable used establish line thicknesses to draw EeRise, NAWC, and Slider test
images.
Command syntax PENH height
height integer
Query syntax PENH?
Query response height
Example PENH 4
Video Test Generator User Guide
471
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PENW
PEN Width
Class Image editor control
Description Sets a variable used to establish line thicknesses to draw EeRise, NAWC and Slider test
images.
Command syntax PENW width
width integer
Query syntax PENW?
Query response width
Example PENW 4
472
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNAU
Measure Pseudo Noise
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Loads the hardware required to generate the pseudo noise and measures all the related
required parameters.
Command syntax PNAU
Example PNSF 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal format set to CURRENT (internal)
PNST 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal type set to QDI-BCM
PNSA 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal advance set to ACTIVE PIXELS
PNSM 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal mode set to AUTO
PNSP 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal procedure set to CONTINUOUS
PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated
CR
//Stop pseudo-random noise
GPER? //Returns the pixel error rate (in errors per billion)
0.88
GNPT? //Returns the number of pixels measured (in billions)
4.255
GCET? //Returns the total number of errors detected on the red, green,
and blue components along with the total number of bad pixels
0,21,0,21
GFED? //Returns data related to any error (first error only)
40018C,FFFFFF
474
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNGU
Pseudo Noise Generator Use
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Loads the hardware required to generate pseudo-random noise (per the latest
pseudo-random noise signal settings).
Command syntax PNGU
Example 1 PNSF 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal format set to CURRENT (internal)
PNST 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal type set to QDI-BCM
PNSA 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal advance set to ACTIVE PIXELS
PNSM 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal mode set to AUTO
PNSP 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal procedure set to CONTINUOUS
PNSG 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal gate set to ON
PNGU //Output Pseudo-random noise using latest parameters
Example 2 To stop pseudo-random noise output:
PNSG 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal gate set to OFF
PNGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
475
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNSA
Pseudo Noise Signal Advance
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Controls how often pseudo-random noise pixels are calculated.
Command syntax PSNA value
value
0 = every pixel clock
1 = every active pixel clock
Query syntax PNSA?
Query response 0 or 1
Example PNSA 1 //Set calculation to pixel every clock
PNGU
476
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNSF
Pseudo Noise Signal Format
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Selects the source of timing information used by the various pseudo-random noise
parameters.
Command syntax PNSF source
source
0 = CURRENT (timing parameters are based on the internally-generated DVI signal)
1 = MEASURED (timing parameters are based on a measurement of the DVI signal
received at the DVI Input connector from an external signal source)
Query syntax PNSF?
Query response 0 or 1
Example PNSF 0 // timing parameters are based on internal DVI signal
PNGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
477
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNSG
Pseudo Noise Signal Gate
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Gates on or off the output of pseudo-random noise.
Command syntax PNSG gate
gate
0 = Pseudo-random noise is not output (the selected image is output)
1 = Pseudo-random noise is output (replacing the selected image output)
Query syntax PNSG?
Query response 0 or 1
Example PNSG 1 //Output pseudo-random noise from the generator
PNGU
478
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNSL
Pseudo Noise Signal Length
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Sets the run-length value of the pseudo-random noise sequence.
Command syntax PNSL length
length
hexidecimal number
Query syntax PNSL?
Query response run-length value
Example PNSL 4AFFF //set the pseudo-random noise sequence run-length
PNGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
479
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNSM
Pseudo Noise Signal Mode
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Determines how the pseudo-random noise sequence seed and run-length are determined.
Command syntax PNSM mode
mode
0 = Auto mode. The sequence seed and run-length parameters are set automatically.
The seed is automatically set to 0x08000001. Noise values are advanced according to
sequence length is automatically set to the total number of pixels (per frame) minus
one. Alternately, if PNSA is set to 1, noise is advanced every active pixel, and the
length is set to the size of the HRES*VRES active area (per frame) minus one.
1 = Manual mode. The sequence seed and run-length must be manually set using the
Query syntax PNSM?
Query response 0 or 1
Example PNSM 0 //set pseudo-random noise seed and run-length values automatically
PNGU
480
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNSP
Pseudo Noise Signal Procedure
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Selects the procedure used when making pseudo-random noise measurements.
PNSP procedure
procedure
0 = CONTINUOUS (stop after key press, knob turn, or any I/O). In this mode, noise
testing continues until either a key-press, a knob-turn, or serial/GPIB/host I/O port
activity is detected. To stop the CONTINUOUS mode remotely via the I/O ports, a “\r”
is recommended.
1 = SINGLE SHOT (stop after one run-length). In this mode, a single run-length is
executed before the pseudo-random noise measurement is stopped.
n = MULTI SHOT (stop after n run-length shots). In this mode, a number of run-lengths
(n) are executed before pseudo-random noise measurement is stopped and results
become available.
Query syntax PNSP?
Query response 0 - 2
Example PNSP 23 // run 23 sequences of the pseudo-random noise measurement
PNGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
481
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNSS
Pseudo-Noise Signal Seed
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Sets the seed value of the pseudo-random noise sequence. A seed value represents a
specific pseudo-random noise sequence.
Command syntax PNSS seed
seed
hexidecimal number
Query syntax PNSS?
Query response seed value
Example PNSS 8000001 //set pseudo-random noise seed value
PNGU
482
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PNST
Pseudo Noise Signal Type
Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise
Description Selects the pseudo-random noise algorithm to be used.
Command syntax PNST algorithm
algorithm
0 = T & M algorithm (not supported)
1 = QDI-BCM algorithm
Query syntax PNST?
Query response 0 or 1
Example PNST 1 //set QDI-BCM algorithm for pseudo-random noise
PNGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
483
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREG
PRE-emphasis Gate
Class Format parameter settings
Description Enables and disables adding pre-emphasis to the Open LVDI digital outputs on generators
that support LVDI outputs. The PREG? query returns the current setting of PREG.
Pre-emphasis is used to add compensation for signal loss in long cables.
Command syntax PREG mode
mode
0 = Pre-emphasis OFF
1 = Pre-emphasis ON
Query syntax PREG?
Query response mode
commands
Video Test Generator User Guide
485
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PSHD
Probe Sync Pulse Horizontal Delay
Class Special Sync Probe Pulse
Description Sets the delay (in pixels) of the line(s) on which the probe pulse occurs on the special sync
output. The PSHD? query returns the current PSHD value.
Command syntax PSHD width
width integer
0=PSVD(HTOT - PSPW-1)
Query syntax PSHD?
Query response width
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example PSPG 1
PSPP 1
// Enables probe pulse on special sync
// Sets probe pulse polarity to positive
// Sets probe pulse width to 10 pixels
// Sets probe pulse horizontal delay to 200 pixels
// Sets probe pulse vertical delay to 300 pixels
// Applies the settings
PSPW 10
PSHD 200
PSVD 300
ALLU
486
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PSPG
Probe Sync Pulse Gate
Class Special Sync Probe Pulse
Description Enables and disables the probe pulse on the special sync output. The PSPG? query
returns the current PSPG mode.
Command syntax PSPD mode
mode integer
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax PSPG?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example FSPG 0
PSPG 1
// Disables frame sync
// Enables probe pulse on special sync
// Applies the settings
ALLU
Video Test Generator User Guide
487
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PSPM
Probe Sync Pulse Mode
Class Special Sync Probe Pulse
Description Determines what lines in the frame or field the probe pulse occurs on the special sync
output. The PSPM? query returns the current PSPM value.
Command syntax PSPM mode
mode integer
0 = once per frame
1 = every active line in frame
3 = every line in frame
Query syntax PSPM?
Query response 0, 1, or 3
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example PSPG 1
PSPP 1
// Enables probe pulse on special sync
// Sets probe pulse polarity to positive
// Sets probe pulse width to 10 pixels
PSPW 10
PSHD 200
PSVD 300
PSPM 1
// Sets probe pulse horizontal delay to 200 pixels
// Sets probe pulse vertical delay to 300 pixels
// Sets probe pulse to occur on each active line in a frame
// Applies the settings
ALLU
488
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PSPP
Probe Sync Pulse Polarity
Class Special Sync Probe Pulse
Description Sets the polarity of the probe pulse on the special sync output. The PSPG? query returns
the current PSPP value.
Command syntax PSPP polarity
polarity integer
0 = negative
1 = positive
Query syntax PSPP?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example PSPG 1
PSPP 1
// Enables probe pulse on special sync
// Sets probe pulse polarity to positive
// Applies the settings
ALLU
Video Test Generator User Guide
489
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PSPW
Probe Sync Pulse Width
Class Special Sync Probe Pulse
Description Sets the width in pixels of the probe pulse on the special sync output. The PSPW? query
returns the current PSPW value.
Command syntax PSPW width
width integer
1 pixel to (HTOT - 1))
Query syntax PSPW?
Query response width
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example PSPG 1
// Enables probe pulse on special sync
PSPP 1
PSPW 100
ALLU
// Sets probe pulse polarity to positive
// Sets probe pulse width to 100 pixels
// Applies the settings
490
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PSVD
Probe Sync Pulse Vertical Delay
Class Special Sync Probe Pulse
Description Sets the line in the frame or field that the probe pulse occurs on the special sync output.
The PSVD? query returns the current PSVD value.
Command syntax PSVD line
line integer
0 = PSVD(VTOT-1)
Query syntax PSVD?
Query response line
commands
updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.
Example PSPG 1
PSPP 1
// Enables probe pulse on special sync
// Sets probe pulse polarity to positive
// Sets probe pulse width to 10 pixels
// Sets probe pulse vertical delay to 300 pixels
// Applies the settings
PSPW 10
PSVD 300
ALLU
Video Test Generator User Guide
491
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUTA
PUT Absolute
Class Direct processor control
Description Writes the specified value value into memory at the specified address address. The two
parameters address and value are interpreted according to the current setting of BASE
Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by
Quantum Data. Indiscriminate use of this command can cause the generator to stop
operating and the loss of stored data in non-volatile RAM.
Command syntax PUTA address value
address
0 to 4,294,967,295 unsigned decimal (BASE = 10)
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)
0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)
-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)
value
0 to 2^(SIZE)-1
commands
command.
492
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUTR
PUT Relative
Class Direct processor control
Description Writes the specified value value into the location pointed to by the address register (see
incremented by SIZE bits after the current location has been written to.
Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by
Quantum Data. Indiscriminate use of this command can cause the generator to stop
operating and the loss of stored data in non-volatile RAM.
Command syntax PUTR value
value
0 to (2^(SIZE))-1
commands
command.
Video Test Generator User Guide
493
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PXAR?
Pixel Aspect Ratio Query
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Reads the aspect ratio of pixels in active regions of the raster image.
Query syntax PXAR?
Query response aspect ratio
Example PXAR?
+1.00000E+00
494
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RATC
pixel RATe Calibration factor
Class System parameter settings
Description Sets an internal multiplication factor used in setting the pixel clock frequency. The
multiplication factor can be set to compensate for the frequency error of the internal
reference crystal. Having to use a factor outside of the typical range may indicate a failure
of generator's hardware. Reinitializing the generator's memory sets the calibration factor
to a factory-default setting of 1.00000.
Note: The RATC parameter is a system level parameter that will affect the pixel clock
frequency of all formats that are recalled. The RATC value will be retained when the
generator is powered down and back up again. Query the current setting of RATC if you
are experiencing problems with the pixel clock or scan rate being off in frequency.
Command syntax RATC factor
factor
floating point number equal to calibration factor
typical min = 0.99990
typical max = 1.00010
Query syntax RATC?
Query response factor
Example RATC 1.00007 // Increases pix clk by factor of 1.00007
Video Test Generator User Guide
495
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RCTL
Reset masked ConTroL bits
Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal
Description Resets the masked control bits for the Broadcom or Silicon Image chip to low. The bits to
be reset are (one byte mapped as follows):
CTL13 CTL12 CTL11 CTL10 CTL03 CTL02 CTL01 CTL00
To reset a specific control bit, the mask must account for the current setting of the
remaining bits. See example below.
Note: CTL03 is not part of this resetting. It controls the HDCP.
Command syntax RCTL mask
mask
hexidecimal
Example SCTL 23 // sets CTL00, CTL01, CTL11 to high
RCTL 22 // resets CTL00 bit to low (0)
496
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECT
draw a RECTangle
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a rectangle whose sides are parallel to the vertical and horizontal axes of displayed
video. It uses six parameters. The first is the color of the line. The next two parameters are
the pixel width and height of the rectangle. The fourth and fifth parameters are the x and y
coordinates for the top left corner of the rectangle. The last parameter is the fill.
Command syntax RECT color width height x y fill
color
available colors
width
total number of horizontal pixels
height
total number of lines
x, y
positive integer numbers
fill
available fill patterns
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example RECT gray50 15 20 50 40 GrayPat50
// Draw a 50% gray rectangle 15 pixels wide and 20 pixels high
// with top left corner at X=50, Y=40 Fill with 50% active pixels
ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
497
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REDG
RED Gate
Class Video Gate
Description Toggles the red video signal gate.
Command syntax REDG mode
mode
0 = disable
1 = enable
Query syntax REDG?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
Example REDG 0; ALLU // disable red video component
498
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RFLD
Repeat FieLD
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Determines if identical video information is output for each field of an interlaced (SCAN =
2) format. The RFLD? query returns the current setting of RFLD.
Command syntax RFLD mode
mode
0 = disabled
1 = enabled
Query syntax RFLD?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
Example SCAN 2 // Set Interlaced scanning
RFLD 1 // Enable repeat field buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware with format data
Video Test Generator User Guide
499
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RGBQ?
RGB lut Query
Class LUT Management
Description Returns the current lookup table buffer contents when a lookup table editing session is
active (between LUTB and LUTE) and returns the actual lookup table values in the
hardware LUT when a lookup table editing session is not active (between LUTE and
LUTB).
Query syntax RGBQ? first_slot slots_returned
first_slot
first slot number
slots_returned
number of slots to be returned
Query response slot_number red_level green_level blue_level crlf
Example LUTB;RGBQ? 0 16
500
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RGBW
RGB Write
Class LUT Management
Description Writes RGB levels to the slot location specified within the current lookup table buffer when
a lookup table editing session is active, and writes the levels directly to the LUT hardware
when a lookup table editing session is not active.
Command syntax RGBW slot red_level green_level blue_level
slot integer
0 to 15 when PELD = 4
0 to 255 when PELD = 8
red_level, green_level, blue_level integer
min = 0
max = LMAX setting (255 nominal)
Example LUTE;RGBW 1 255 128 0 // Set slot 1 to an orange color
Video Test Generator User Guide
501
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RMAP
Render MAP
Class Bitmap image control
Description Renders a map (icon) at the user-specified coordinates.
Command syntax RMAP x y map
x, y
starting coordinates, positive integer number
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example RMAP 20 5 MyMap
// Renders MyMap at X=20, Y=5
ALLU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
502
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROWI
ROW Insert
Class Bitmap editor function
Description Inserts a row of pixel data into the bitmap that is being edited. The existing pixel data in the
selected row and higher number rows are bumped up one row to make room for the new
pixel data.
Command syntax ROWI row hexstring
row integer
min =
max =
hexstring
hexadecimal number
commands
Example ROWI 1 FFDE54F // insert new row 1
Video Test Generator User Guide
503
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROWQ?
bitmap row Query pointer
Class Bitmap editor function
Description Returns the pixel data for the given row for the current contents of the bitmap editor buffer.
Query syntax ROWQ? row max
row
positive integer number
max
positive integer number
Query response Hexstring of one or more characters consisting of 0-9 and A-F.
commands
Example ROWQ? 1 // Returns pixel data for row 1
504
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ROWY
ROW Yank
Class Bitmap editor function
Description Deletes a row of pixel data in the bitmap that is being edited. The pixel data in the higher
number rows are bumped down one row to fill in the gap.
Command syntax ROWY row
row
positive integer
commands
Example ROWY 2 // Delete the pixel data for row 2
Video Test Generator User Guide
505
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAMP
Digital Audio Sinewave Amplitude
Class Sonic data generator
Description Sets the amplitude in decibels of the audio stream sinewave output by the generator.
Command syntax SAMP amplitude (sets all channels)
amplitude
-120.4 to 0.0 (if NBPA is 20-bits)
-144.5 to 0.0 (if NBPA is 24-bits)
Query syntax SAMP?
Query response amplitude
Example SAMP -60.0
// Sets all channels to -60 amplitude
FMTU
506
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN
SCAN fields per frame
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Establishes the number of fields scanned per frame. Set to 1 for progressive
(non-interlaced) scan and 2 for interlaced scan. The SCAN? query returns the current
setting of SCAN.
Command syntax SCAN fields
fields
1 = progressive (non-interlaced)
2 = interlaced
Query syntax SCAN?
Query response fields
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example SCAN // Select interlace in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
508
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCTL
Set masked ConTroL bits
Class DVI TMDS
Description Sets the masked control bits for the Broadcom or Silicon Image DVI transmitter chip. The
bits to be set are (one byte mapped as follows):
CTL13 CTL12 CTL11 CTL10 CTL03 CTL02 CTL01 CTL00
Note: CTL03 is not part of this setting. It controls the HDCP.
Command syntax RCTL mask
mask
hexidecimal
Example SCTL 23 // the 23 in hex sets the CTL00, CTL01 and CTL11 to 1's
Video Test Generator User Guide
509
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDIR
Sort DIRectory
Class Directory editor control
Description Sorts the names in a directory by alphabetical order.
Command syntax SDIR
commands
510
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDLY
Sequence step DeLaY
Class Sequence editor control
Description Sets how long a sequence step will pause before advancing to the next step in the auto
run mode. A sequence step will use the last value set by the SDLY command. The SDLY?
query returns the current setting of SDLY.
Command syntax SDLY delay | -frames
delay
Delay time in seconds as a floating point number.
frames
Delay in frames. Type minus (-) character before integer.
min = 0.0 seconds; -1 frame
max = 1.70E38 seconds (infinite)
Query syntax SDLY?
Query response delay
commands
sequence operation.
Example SDLY 5.0 // Set delay to five seconds per step
SDLY -3 // Set delay to three frames per step
Video Test Generator User Guide
511
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDMG
Sonic Data Mixer Gate
Class Sonic data generator
Description Configures the generator to use either an internal or external audio source.
Note: Setting the mask “external” bit to 1 causes the SPDIF audio signal to be passed
through the generator. In this case, the Audio InfoFrame CT, CC, SF, and SS parameters
are set to 0, indicating that the stream header should be used to determine audio coding
type, channel type, sampling frequency, and sample size, respectively. If both “external”
and “sdg” bits are set to 1 simultaneously, then an error is generated as the generator’s
sonic data mixer does not currently support proportional mixing of internal and external
sources.
Important: Restarting the generator does not change this setting.
Command syntax SDMG mask
mask
1 = sdg (internal)
2 = external
Example SDMG 1
FMTU
512
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEOS
Set End Of String
Class GPIB port control
Description Controls how a generator reads strings, when reading multi-line responses. In GPIB
communication both the sender and receiver first have to agree on end-of-string parsing.
The SEOS command enables users to determine if the generator should use line feed for
end-of-string parsing.
Command syntax SEOS integer
integer
0 = Configures the generator to not test end-of-strings, and to send EOI only on the
last character of the entire response. Use this option to receive an entire multi-line
response in a single read operation. Leave the VISA “Enable Termination Character”
option set to FALSE.
1 = Use end-of-string testing (default).
Query syntax SEOS?
Video Test Generator User Guide
513
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQA
SEQuence save As
Class Sequence memory management
Description Saves the current contents of the sequence edit buffer using the given name.
Command syntax SEQA name
name
A valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Example SEQA MY_SEQ // Save with the name "MY_SEQ"
514
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQB
SEQuence editing Begin
Class Sequence editor control
Description Marks the beginning of a sequence editing session.
Command syntax SEQB
commands
Example SEQN // Initialize sequence edit buffer
SEQB // Start sequence editing session
// One or more sequence editing commands ...
SEQE // End sequence editing session
Video Test Generator User Guide
515
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQE
SEQuence editing End
Class Sequence editor control
Description Marks the end of a sequence editing session.
Command syntax SEQE
commands
Example EQB
// Start sequence editing session
// One or more sequence editing commands ...
// End sequence editing session
SEQE
SEQA MYSEQ_02 // Save edited sequence as "MYSEQ_02"
516
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQK
SEQuence Kill
Class Sequence memory management
Description Deletes a sequence by name. The query returns a 1 if the named sequence can be
deleted. If sequence is read-only or non-existent, the query returns a 0.
Command syntax SEQK name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax SEQK? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or 1
Example SEQK MY_SEQ // Delete seq called "MY_SEQ"
Video Test Generator User Guide
517
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQL
SEQuence Load
Class Sequence memory management
Description Copies the sequence having a name equal to name from sequence memory into the
sequence edit buffer. The query returns a 1 if the named sequence can be loaded;
otherwise, a 0 is returned.
Command syntax SEQL name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax SEQL? name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query response 0 or 1
commands
sequence.
Example SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" dir in edit buffer
SEQU
// Start running the sequence in the buffer
518
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQN
SEQuence New
Class Sequence editor control
Description Initializes the sequence edit buffer. The name name is assigned as the sequence's name.
The query will return the name that has been assigned as the sequence's name.
Command syntax SEQN name
name
optional valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax SEQN?
Query response name
Example SEQN
// Init edit buffer without assigning a new name
or
SEQN MY_SEQ // Init edit buffer with name of "MY_SEQ"
Video Test Generator User Guide
519
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQP
SEQuence Path
Class Sequence memory management
Description Sets the current sequence path name to a given directory. The query will return the current
path name.
Command syntax SEQP name
name
a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)
Query syntax SEQP?
Query response Current sequence path name.
Example SEQP BURN // Sequences in BURN directory will be listed
520
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQQ?
SEQuence Query pointer
Class Sequence memory management
Description Returns number sequence names from the list of all the sequence names stored in
sequence memory beginning at index. The directories are kept in alphanumeric order. The
generator maintains internal variables for the current index and number values. The value
of index is automatically incremented by number after the query is executed. Sending the
query with just an index parameter, will return the same number of names as the last time,
starting at the given index. Sending the query with no parameters will return the next set of
names in the directory buffer.
Query syntax SEQQ? index number
index
positive integer number
number
positive integer number
Query response List of specified sequence names.
Example 1 SEQQ? 1 9999 // List the names of all sequences stored in memory
Example 2 SEQQ? 1 10 // List names of the first ten sequences stored in memory
SEQQ? 21
SEQQ?
// List names of the 21st through the 30th sequences
// List names of the 31st through the 40th sequences
Video Test Generator User Guide
521
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQR
SEQuence Read
Class Sequence memory management
Description Reads a sequence from the sequence memory location into the sequence buffer. The
SEQR command does not run the sequence. The SEQR? query returns the name of the
sequence stored in location location or returns the string EMPTY if the sequence memory
location location is empty.
Command syntax SEQR location
location integer
Query syntax SEQR? location
Query response name
commands
Example SEQR 5 // Load sequence from RAM location 5
ALLU
// Start using the sequence
522
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQS
SEQuence Save
Class Sequence memory management
Description Saves the current contents of the generator's sequence edit buffer back to the memory
location from which they were originally read.
Command syntax SEQS
Video Test Generator User Guide
523
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQU
SEQuence Use
Class Sequence memory management
Description Runs the sequence currently stored in the sequence edit buffer. The SEQU? query returns
the sequence name currently set in the sequence edit buffer.
Command syntax SEQU
Query syntax SEQU?
Query response name
commands
Example SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" dir in edit buffer
SEQU
// Start running the sequence in the buffer
524
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIZE
SIZE of bit field
Class Direct processor control
Description Sets the field size (in base 10) used in connection with the GETA, GETR, PUTA, and
PUTR commands. If a negative size is specified, then values given (or returned) are sign
extended to 32 bits. For example, if SIZE = -16 and a 16 bit field containing FFFF hex is
fetched, then the value FFFFFFFF hex is returned. The SIZE? query returns the current
setting of SIZE in base 10. SIZE is preset to 16 each time the generator is powered on.
Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by
Quantum Data.
Command syntax SIZE size
size
-32 to -1 or 1 to 32 bits
Query syntax SIZE?
Query response size
Video Test Generator User Guide
525
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SLUT
Set Look-Up Table
Class LUT Management
Description Sets up the color look-up-table (LUT) for rendering and displaying selected colors from
defined sets. This command is made available for testing low-level drawing firmware and
is not intended for use by end users.
Command syntax SLUT colorset
colorset integer
Bit mask indicating desired color sets
Example SLUT 65536 // Setup for HUERGB colorset.
526
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SMAX?
Digital Audio Sinewave Maximum
Class Sonic data generator
Description Returns the maximum amplitude of the digital audio sinewave output from the generator.
Query syntax SMAX?
Query response maximum amplitude (0 - 65,535)
Video Test Generator User Guide
527
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SMIN?
Digital Audio Sinewave Minimum
Class Sonic data generator
Description Returns the minimum amplitude of the digital audio sinewave output from the generator.
Query syntax SMIN?
Query response minimum amplitude (0 - 65,535)
528
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SMOD
Sequence operating MODe
Class Sequence editor control
Description Sets the sequence mode. The SMOD? query returns the current setting of SMOD.
Command syntax SMOD mode
mode
0 = disable
1 = enable manual step mode that stops at last step
2 = enable manual step mode that wraps to first step after last step
3 = enable continuous auto stepping
Query syntax SMOD?
Query response mode
commands
Example SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" in edit buffer
SEQU
SMOD 3
// Start running the sequence in the buffer
// Set the sequence mode
Video Test Generator User Guide
529
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNUM
draw sequence Step NUMber
Class Custom image primitive
Description Displays the sequence step number to an image when drawn as part of a test sequence.
The number, along with the word “Step,” appears in a small box. The SNUM command
uses three parameters. The first is the color used for the text and box border. The next two
parameters are the x and y coordinates for the position of the box.
Command syntax SNUM color x y
color
available colors
x, y
positive integer numbers
commands
and the custom image must have been loaded as part of a sequence in order for this
primitive to be drawn.
Example SNUM white 50 50 // Display seq. num. in box with top left corner at
// X=50, Y=50
530
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPAX
slider image SPAcing X
Class Image editor control
Description Sets the horizontal spacing of certain elements in some built-in test images. The SPAX?
query returns the current SPAX setting.
Command syntax SPAX x_spacing
x_spacing integer
number of pixels
Query syntax SPAX?
Query response x_spacing
Example SPAX 20
Video Test Generator User Guide
531
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPAY
slider image SPAcing Y
Class Image editor control
Description Sets the vertical spacing of certain elements in some built-in test images. The SPAY?
query returns the current SPAY setting.
Command syntax SPAY y_spacing
y_spacing integer
number of pixels
Query syntax SPAY?
Query response y_spacing
Example SPAY 20
532
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SRAT
Digital Audio Sinewave Rate
Class Sonic data generator
Description Sets the frequency of the audio sinewave from the generator.
Command syntax SRAT rate
rate
20.0 to 20.0E3 (Hz)
Query syntax SRAT?
Query response rate
Example SRAT 10.0E3
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
533
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SROP
Set/Reset OPeration
Class
Description Sets or resets one or multiple power-on special modes (see GenOps image).
Command syntax SROP set_mask reset_mask
set_mask
Value to set.
reset_mask
Value to reset. Use this parameter to establish all bits with one command, or to
individually set, or reset bits without changing others.
The mask value is constructed as follows:
Mask value
Description
1
Old format names. Enabling or disabling this mode with re-ini-
tialize the generator.
2
Digital friendly
4
Analog friendly
8
Display status on LCD
Reset HDCP Rx (Silicon Image friendly mode)
Calibrate
16
32
64
Clone
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
65536
Key pad
Sony baud rate 9600
Programmable key pad
Program mode
Digital YC C mode
b
r
DCS Priority mode
HDCP Test mode
Use hot-plug special format mode
DVI mode (disables HDMI mode)
Bypass “hot-plug” format special mode (for DVI and HDMI out-
puts).
534
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Query syntax SROP?
Query response Returns current SROP mode. If multiple special modes are enabled, the SROP? value is
the sum of the mask values for the enabled modes.
Example 1 R:\SROP 8
R:\SROP 2
R:\SROP?
10
Example 2 SROP 2 // set digital friendly mode
SROP 4 // set analog mode
Example 3 For generators with HDMI option:
SROP 32768 // Enable DVI mode (disable HDMI mode)
SROP 0 32768 // Enable HDMI mode
Video Test Generator User Guide
535
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSST
Select Sync Signal Type
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Selects the type of sync signal used to synchronize the display. In general, any one of
three different types of sync can be selected to synchronize the display. The availability of
different sync types is specified using the ASCT, DSCT, and DSST commands. Some
displays may not accept one (or more) types of sync. For example, a digital video monitor
cannot accept analog composite sync because analog signal transmission is not used.
Also, a PGA display cannot accept digital separate HS and VS because only one sync
wire is provided in the cabling. In these cases, one (or more) of the sync types (ASCT,
DSCT, or DSST) is set to 0, indicating that they are not supported. If a non-supported sync
type is selected using the SSST command, then the corresponding sync outputs of the
generator will remain disabled. The SSST? query returns the type of sync (if any) that is
currently selected.
Command syntax SSST type
type
0 = no sync
1 = digital separate horizontal and vertical sync ( DHS & DVS )
2 = digital separate composite sync ( DCS )
3 = analog composite sync ( ACS )
4 = analog composite sync ( ACS )
5 = DSS and ACS
6 = DCS and ACS
7 = DSS, DCS, and ACS
8 = DPMS-OFF (DSS)
9 = DPMS-SUSPEND (DSS)
10 = DPMS-STANDBY (DSS)
11 = DCS & DSS
Query syntax SSST?
Query response type
536
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
commands
commands. To actually output the selected sync signal, it must be gated on with the
Example DSST 1 // Set Amer. H&V in buffer
HSPG 1 // Enable H sync in buffer
VSPG 1 // Enable V sync in buffer
SSST 1 // Select sep H&V sync in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
537
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STRG
STRetchinG SCL Low Signal
Class EDID and DDC control
Description Enables a stretching capability for the receiver of the HDMI analyzer. Each time a host
accesses the I2C receiver bus (for example, to read the EDID), the receiver stretches the
SCL low signal for 5 ms.
Enable stretching for testing purposes only.
Command syntax STRG value
value
0 = deactivate stretching
1 = activate stretching of SCL low signal for 5 ms
Query syntax STRG?
Query response 0 or 1
Example STRG 1
DIDU
Related commands DIDU
538
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP
sequence STEP number
Class Sequence editor control
Description Selects a step in the sequence edit buffer. It is context sensitive. While editing a sequence
(between SEQB and SEQE commands), the STEP command selects a step to be edited.
Outside of the sequence editor and while running a sequence, the command selects a
step to be executed.
The STEP? query returns the current setting of STEP.
Command syntax STEP step
step
min = 1
max = See description
Query syntax STEP?
Query response step
commands
command to load the format and display the image selected in the step.
Example STEP 5 // Select fifth step in current sequence
SEQU
// Load format and draw image in current step
Video Test Generator User Guide
539
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SVSG
Single Video Signal Gating
Class Video Gate
Description Determines which output colors are enabled. The SVSG? query returns the current SVSG
setting.
Command syntax SVSG gate_mask
gate_mask
Gate Mask
Red
Green
Blue
0
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Query syntax SVSG?
Query response gate_mask
Example SVSG 7
540
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SXAR
Signal Aspect Ratio
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Sets the natural aspect ratio of the video signal format (or “coded frame”) that transports
images to the display.
Command syntax SXAR aspect_ratio
aspect_ratio
0.75 to ˜2.39
command).
Example SXAR 1.33 // Sets 4:3 video signal aspect ratio for source content
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
541
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SXCX
Signal-From-Content Aperture Map
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Sets the proper parameters to values necessary to fit CXAR-shaped image content to the
SXAR-shaped aperture of the signal interface timing format.
Upon executing this command, the following actions are performed:
1. The EXAR value is set to the CXAR value (EXAR=CXAR).
2. The EXCX value is set to 0 (EXCX=0).
3. The SXEX value is set to value entered for this command (SXEX=SXCX).
Command syntax SXCX code
code
0 to 131071 (in decimal)
Example SXCX 264 //Use centered shrink w/black bars top & bottom
FMTU
542
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SXEX
Signal-From-Extended Aperture Map
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Maps EXAR-shaped image content into the SXAR-shaped signal interface.
Command syntax SXEX code
code
0 to 131071 (in decimal)
The mapping code is made up of three binary field codes as follows:
•
•
•
Bits 0-2 are the Squeeze/Stretch (“S”) field code
Bits 3-9 are the Letterbox/Pillar (“L”) field code
Bits 10-16 are the Safe Area (“K”) field code
Example SXEX 264 //Use centered shrink w/black bars top & bottom
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
543
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TBOX
draw information Text BOX
Class Custom Image Primitive
Description Renders an information text box that can be added to custom images. This command
allows color, position, information, and box type to be customized.
Command syntax TBOX color %x %y info type
color
valid color name
%x
0.0 to 1.0 normalized positioning of box center in the x direction
%y
0.0 to 1.0 normalized positioning of box center in the y direction
info
0 = format, image, line-rate, and frame-rate (default =
1 = format
2 = image
3 = sequence
4 = step number
5 = format and image
6 = sequence and step
7 = line-rate and HRES X VRES
8 = pixel-rate and HRES X VRES
9 = format, image, sequence, and step
10 = format, image, HRES X VRES, and pixel rate
11 = line-rate, frame-rate, sequence, and step
12 = pixel-rate, HRES X VRES, sequence, and step
13 = line-rate, frame-rate, pixel-rate, and HRES X VRES
14 = format, image, line-rate, frame-rate, sequence, and step
15 = format, image, HRES X VRES, pixel-rate, sequence and step
544
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
type
0 = text only
1 = text w/ border
2 = text w/ black background
3 = text w/ border and black background
Query syntax TBOX?
Query response color %x %y info type
commands
Example TBOX white 0.5 0.5 8 3
Video Test Generator User Guide
545
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TBXG
Text BoX Gating
Class
Description Enables and disables the displaying of the text box defined by the TBOX command. The
TBXG? query returns the current TBXG mode.
Command syntax TBXG mode
mode integer
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax TBXG?
Query response mode
commands
Example TBXG 1
546
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEXT
draw TEXT string
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a user-defined text string. It uses five parameters. The first is color. The next two
are the x and y coordinates for the upper left corner of the starting position of the string.
The fourth parameter selects the font. The last parameter is the text string. If the string is
longer than one word, it must be contained inside quotation marks.
All of the characters in the text string must have matching characters in the font selected
by font name.
Command syntax Text color x y font "text "
color
available colors
x, y
coordinates of top left corner of page in pixels
font
text
available fonts
approximately 30 characters (must be enclosed by quotes)
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example TEXT red 50 40 opix9 "HELLO WORLD"
// Draw red "HELLO WORLD" at x=50 y=40 in opix9 font
Video Test Generator User Guide
547
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TMAU
Timing Measurement Analyzer Use
Class DVI signal analyzer
Description Initiates a measurement of the timing received from an external DVI source (via the DVI
parameters are written into the format buffer.
Note: If PNSF is set to CURRENT, then the TMAU command leaves the parameters of the
currently selected format in the format buffer.
The timing parameters can be read back via queries using the following commands
SCAN?
HTOT?
HRES?
HSPD?
HSPW?
HSPP?
VTOT?
VRES?
VSPD?
VSPW?
VSPP?
Returns the scan type
Returns the pixel rate (in Hz)
Returns the frame rate (in Hz)
Returns the vertical (field) rate (VRAT = FRAT * SCAN)
Returns the horizontal total (in pixels)
Returns the horizontal active (in pixels)
Returns the horizontal sync pulse delay (in pixels)
Returns the horizontal sync pulse width (in pixels)
Returns the horizontal sync pulse polarity
Returns the vertical total (in lines)
Returns the vertical active (in lines)
Returns the vertical sync pulse delay (in lines)
Returns the vertical sync pulse width (in lines)
Returns the vertical sync pulse polarity
Returns the pixel delay between the H and V sync pulses.
Command syntax TMAU
548
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example PNSF 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal format set to MEASURED
PNST 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal type set to QDI-BCM
TMAU //Measure external signal’s timing format parameters
HTOT? //Read external signal’s total number of horizontal pixels
800
HRES? //Read external signal’s total number of active horizotan pixels
640
Video Test Generator User Guide
549
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOBL
set levels relative TO BLanking
Class Custom image primitive
Description Temporarily changes how the signal levels are determined for a given color intensity level.
The default method uses black as the 0% reference level and peak video as the 100%
level. Inserting TOBL moves the 0% reference point to the blanking (blacker than black)
pedestal level. The reference point remains shifted only for as long as the image is
displayed.
Command syntax TOBL
550
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIA
draw a TRIAngle
Class Custom image primitive
Description Draws a triangle defined by its three end points. The primitive uses eight parameters. The
first is line color. The next three pairs of parameters are the x and y coordinates for the
three points. The last parameter is the fill. More complex filled polygons can be built up
using a series of joined filled triangles.
Command syntax TRIA color x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 fill
color
available colors
x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3
positive integer number
fill
available fill pattern
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example TRIA red50 10 5 10 25 40 15 GrayPat50
// Draw a red50 triangle at x=10,
// y=5; x=10, y=25; x=40, y=15 with
// 50% active pixel fill
ALLU // Update hardware to current
// buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
551
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TTLL
Class:
Description Sets the output voltage of the TTL interface on the 802R-PCI generator. The query reads
the current value.
Command syntax TTLL voltage
voltage
3.3
5.0
Query syntax TTLL?
Example TTLL 5.0 // sets the output voltage to 5V on the TTL interface
552
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UIDN
User IDeNtification
Class System parameter settings
Description Sets up the text string that is placed in the upper portions of the SMPTE133 and Cubes
images. The command can be used to add a company name or other identification to the
images. The command will not change the text in a currently displayed image; it must be
redrawn to use the new text. The factory default string is “Quantum Data.” The UIDN?
query returns the current text string.
Command syntax UIDN string
string
text string 80 characters in length
Query syntax UIDN?
Query response string
commands
hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example UIDN "XYZ Monitor Mfg." // Change text string
IMGL SMPTE133
IMGU
// Select image that uses the text string
// Draw the image using new string
Video Test Generator User Guide
553
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USIZ
Unit of measure used for physical SIZes
Class System control
FMTE). The USIZ? query returns the current setting of USIZ.
Note: Changing the USIZ parameter between inches and millimeters will convert the
current HSIZ and VSIZ values to match the new unit of measure. For example, if USIZ is in
inches and the current HSIZ is 10 (inches), changing USIZ from inches to mm will change
HSIZ to 25.4 (mm). The USIZ command should be sent before specifying physical sizes in
format command files.
Command syntax USIZ units
units
0 = sizes not given (use default)
1 = inches
2 = mm
Query syntax USIZ?
Query response units
commands
taking the new units into account.
Example FMTB
// Begin editing session
// One or more format editing commands ...
// Select inches as unit of measure in buffer
USIZ 1
HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in buffer
VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer
ALLU
// Test the new settings
// One or more format editing commands ...
// End editing session
FMTE
Video Test Generator User Guide
555
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNPK
UnPacK operation related to DMA
Class
locations
Command syntax UNPK
556
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNPK
UnPacK operation related to DMA
Class
locations
Command syntax UNPK
Video Test Generator User Guide
557
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VERF?
VERsion Firmware
Class Miscellaneous system parameters
Description Returns the firmware version number for the runtime code and the boot code. The digits to
the left of the decimal point represent the major release level. The digits to the right of the
decimal point represent the revision number of the release. A second decimal point
followed by more digits indicates the revision is at a given beta test level.
Query syntax VERF?
Query response version runtime code: version boot code
Example VERF?
20.0882002,01.03.03
558
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VERG?
VERsion Gateware
Class Miscellaneous system parameters
Description Returns the gateware version number for the programmable devices. The digits to the left
of the decimal point represent the major release level. The digits to the right of the decimal
point represent the revision number of the release. A second decimal point followed by
more digits indicates the revision is at a given beta test level.
Query syntax VERG?
Query response product code, revision, date code: product code, revsion, date code: product code,
revsion, date code
Example VERG?
250C,16,8022004:250F,60,10052004:0,0,0
Video Test Generator User Guide
559
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VERH?
VERsion Hardware
Class Miscellaneous system parameters
Description Returns a five-digit hardware version number. The number indicates when a major
modification to the hardware was last implemented. The significance of each digit is
interpreted as follows:
560
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VRAT?
Vertical RATe Query
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Returns the current vertical (field) rate. This is equal to the product of the FRAT (frame
rate) and SCAN (scan type) settings (FRAT * SCAN).
Query syntax VRAT?
Query response vertical field rate
Example VRAT? //read the product of FRAT and SCAN settings
50.0000
Video Test Generator User Guide
561
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VRES
Vertical RESolution
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Establishes the number of active lines per frame. The VRES? query returns the current
setting of VRES.
Command syntax VRES lines
lines
min =
•
•
1 (when SCAN = 1) or
2 (when SCAN = 2)
max = the lesser of
•
•
VTOT-1 (when SCAN = 1) or
VTOT-3 (when SCAN = 2)
Must be an even number when SCAN = 2.
Query syntax VRES?
Query response lines
commands
Example VRES 480 // Set 480 active lines in buffer
ALLU
// Configure hardware and redraw image
562
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VSIZ
Vertical SIZe
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Establishes the vertical physical size of the image on the display. Units expected (or
The VSIZ? query returns the current setting of VSIZ.
Note: Make sure that the USIZ parameter is properly set before using the VSIZ command.
Changing the USIZ setting after entering VSIZ will convert the size to match the new unit
of measure.
Command syntax VSIZ size
size
physical size; positive value (floating point accepted)
Query syntax VSIZ?
Query response size
commands
command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image, taking the
new size into account.
Example FMTB
// Begin editing session
// One or more format editing commands ...
// Select inches as unit of measure in buffer
USIZ 1
HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in buffer
VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer
ALLU
// Test the new settings
// One or more format editing commands ...
// End editing session
FMTE
Video Test Generator User Guide
563
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VSPD
Vertical Sync Pulse Delay
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the delay between leading edge of blanking in the first (or even) field and the
leading edge of the vertical sync pulse. When interlacing, delay between end of video and
leading edge of vertical sync before second (or odd) field is 0.5 line shorter than the
whole-line delay specified. The VSPD? query returns the current setting of the vertical
sync pulse delay.
Command syntax VSPD lines
lines
min =0 (when SCAN = 1) or 1 (when SCAN = 2)
max = VTOT-VRES-VSPW (when SCAN = 1) or [(VTOT-VRES-1) /2]-VSPW (when
SCAN = 2)
Query syntax VSPD?
Query response lines
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example VSPD 11 // Set V sync delay to 11 lines in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
564
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VSPG
Vertical Sync Pulse Gate
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Enables and disables the digital vertical sync output. The VSPG? query returns the
current mode of VSPG.
Command syntax VSPG mode
mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Query syntax VSPG?
Query response 0 or 1
Other required To use digital vertical sync, digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the SSST
commands
command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example VSPG 1 // Enable V sync output in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
565
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VSPP
Vertical Sync Pulse Polarity
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital vertical sync outputs. Setting polarity to 1 causes
the leading edge of vertical sync to be a low-to-high transition. Setting polarity to 0 causes
the leading edge of vertical sync to be a high-to-low transition. The VSPP? query returns
the current polarity of VSPP.
Command syntax VSPP polarity
polarity
0 = high-to-low transition
1 = low-to-high transition
Query syntax VSPP?
Query response 0 or 1
commands
hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example VSPP 1 // Set active hi V sync in buffer
VSPG 1 // Enable V sync output in buffer
SSST 1 // Select H&V sync type in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
566
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VSPW
Vertical Sync Pulse Width
Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization
Description Establishes the width of the vertical sync pulse in lines. If the type specified for the
types, then the actual sync pulse width output by the generator will be 1/2 line shorter than
the whole number specified. The VSPW? query returns the current setting of VSPW.
Command syntax VSPW lines
Query syntax VSPW?
Query response lines
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example VSPW 3 // Set V sync width to 3 lines in buffer
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
Video Test Generator User Guide
567
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VTOF
Vdram transfer To Flash
Class
Description Transfers the current contents (no matter what they are) of the video frame buffer to the
Flash EEPROM (if equipped) used to store the operating system firmware.
EPROM data sent to the generator is normally stored temporarily in video VDRAM. If the
file transfer is successful, a loader code segment will be placed in CMOS SRAM and
jumped to. This code segment will, in turn, transfer the image of the firmware in VDRAM to
flash memory, thereby replacing the entire flash memory contents. Following this, the
generator will reboot and re-initialize using the new firmware.
Important: Improper use of the VTOF command will cause permanent malfunctioning of
the video generator.
The VTOF command should be executed only by the Quantum Data ARCHIVE.EXE utility
as part of a firmware update operation. On stand-alone generators, the ARCHIVE.EXE
utility first copies the new firmware file to the video frame buffer via the serial port. Once
the file has been successfully copied to the buffer, the buffer contents are then used to
update the Flash EEPROM.
Executing the VTOF command when the video frame buffer does not contain a valid
firmware file will cause a permanent malfunctioning of the generator. There is no way to
restore the firmware on stand-alone models via the serial or GPIB ports once this has
occurred. The stand-alone generator must be returned to Quantum Data or a Quantum
Data authorized repair center for reprogramming.
Note: The firmware may be replaced at least 10,000 times. After that, the generator may
require service to replace the flash ROMs.
Important: In the unlikely event the power fails while the loader is transferring data from
VDRAM to flash memory (this process taking approximately 20 seconds to complete), the
generator will appear to be inoperable at the next power-on. To restore operation, the
generator must be removed from the system, opened, connected to a computer having a
special adapter, and reprogrammed from a binary image file using a special executable
program.Is this something the customer can do himself? Or should we advise him to return
the generator to the repair center?
Command syntax VTOF
commands
568
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VTOT
Vertical TOTal lines per frame
Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution
Description Establishes the total number of lines per frame. When interlacing (SCAN=2), VTOT must
be odd. The VTOT? query returns the current setting of VTOT.
The frame or picture refresh rate is equal to HRAT divided by VTOT.
The field or vertical rate is equal to the frame rate when SCAN = 1 (non-interlaced
operation).
The field or vertical rate is equal to twice the frame rate when SCAN = 2 (non-interlaced
operation).
Note: The current version of the firmware does not allow you to directly enter a specific
field or frame rate when setting up a format. If your test specifications call for a specific field,
frame or vertical refresh rate, enter suitable values for HRAT, SCAN and VTOT to give you
the desired rate.
Command syntax VTOT lines
lines
must be an odd number when SCAN = 2
min =
•
2 @ SCAN=1
5 @ SCAN=2
•
max =
•
•
•
•
•
801GC-ISA = 4096 @ SCAN=1; 4097 @ SCAN=2
801GF-ISA = 4096 @ SCAN=1; 8191 @ SCAN=2
801GP = 2048
801GC, GX = 4096 @ SCAN=1; 4097 @ SCAN=2
801GF = 4096 @ SCAN=1; 8191 @ SCAN=2
Query syntax VTOT?
Query response lines
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Video Test Generator User Guide
569
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example VTOT 525 // Set total lines//frame to 525 in buffer
FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents
570
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XACR
Audio Clock Recovery Data
Class Sonic data generator
Description Sets the N value, and optionally sets the CTS value.
The XACR command takes effect (the new N and CTS values are encoded and
transmitted to the receiver) after the packet is gated on (DPTG command) and the
hardware has been updated (DPGU command).
Command syntax XACR n cts
n
value of audio clock regeneration
cts
Cycle Time Stamp. If not specified, the hardware will calculate the CTS value.
Video Test Generator User Guide
571
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XAFD
AFD Mode Setting
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Sets the SXCX, SXEX, EXAR, EXCX, and CXAR parameters to values necessary to
support a given AFD code.
Command syntax XAFD afd_code
afd_code
0 to 15
The following table provides a listing of AFD codes and corresponding parameter settings.
Note: This command will not change the value of SXAR (which remains fixed by the
current format). Therefore, the range of allowed AFD values are determined by the value
of SXAR in the current format.
1
AFD Code
SXAR
CXAR
EXCX
EXAR
SXEX
2
1.33
1.77
0
CXAR
280
1.77
1.33 or 1.77
1.33 or 1.77
1.33
1.77
1.55
> 1.77
1.33
1.33
1.33
1.33
1.77
1.77
1.55
1.55
1.55
1.55
1.55
1.55
1.33
1.33
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
0
8
0
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
CXAR
1.33
16
280
264
0
3
4
8
1.77
0
9
1.33
16
1.77
264
264
32
10
11
13
14
15
1.33
1.77
1.33
264
264
8
1.77
1.33
1.77
264
264
8
1.33
1.77
1.77
CXAR
1.77
1.33
264
8
1.77
1.33
572
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Compound maps involving the EXAR extended aperture and both mapping methods SXEX & EXCX are shown in bold. In
these cases, an EXCX–L operation is first used to place CXAR-shaped content into the EXAR-shaped extended aperture.
csp
This operation is then followed by a SXEX-L
SXAR-shaped output signal aperture.
operation which finally places the EXAR-shaped extended aperture into the
cbb
Example XAFD 11 //set parameters for AFD code 11
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
573
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XAUD
Audio InfoFrame Data
Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter
Description Writes Audio InfoFrame packet data.
Command syntax XAUD:audparameter value
(individual
parameter)
Command syntax For uncompressed audio coding type:
(complete packet)
XAUD type version length [CC [1 [SS [SF [CA [LSV [DMI ]]]]]]]
For compressed audio coding types:
XAUD type version length [CC [CT [SS [SF [MBR [CA [LSV [DMI ]]]]]]]]
type
4
version
1
length (bytes)
10
The remaining are Audio Infoframe data parameters (audparameter) as specified in
EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Section 6.3:
VERS (same as Version)
Infoframe version
CC
Channel count (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 19 for settings)
CC2 CC1 CC0 Audio channel count
0
0
0
Refer to Stream
Header
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2ch
3ch
4ch
5ch
6ch
7ch
8ch
574
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CT
Audio coding type (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 19 for settings)
CT3 CT2 CT1 CT0 Audio Coding Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Refer to Stream Header
IEC60958 PCM [26, 27]
AC-3
MPEG1 (Layers 1 & 2)
MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3)
MPEG2 (multichannel)
AAC
DTS
ATRAC
SS
Sample size (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 20 for settings)
SS1 SS0 Sample Size
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Refer to Stream Header
16 bit
20 bit
24 bit
SF
Sampling frequency (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 20 for settings)
SF2 SF1 SF0 Sampling Frequency
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Refer to Stream Header
32 kHz
44.1 kHz (CD)
48 kHz
88.2 kHz
96 kHz
176.4 kHz
192 kHz
MBR
Maximum bit rate (this setting multiplied by 8KHz represents the maximum bit rate of
the audio stream)
CA
Channel assignment code (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 22 for settings)
CA
Channel Number
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Video Test Generator User Guide
575
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CA
Channel Number
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
LFE
-
FC
FC
-
RC
RC
RC
RC
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
-
-
FC
FC
-
1
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
RR
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
FC
FC
-
RC
RC
RC
RC
RLC
RLC
RLC
RLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
FLC
-
0
FC
FC
-
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
RRC
RRC
RRC
RRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
FRC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
FC
FC
-
-
-
-
-
FC
FC
-
1
RC
RC
RC
RC
RL
RL
RL
RL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
FC
FC
-
RR
RR
RR
RR
-
LFE
-
LFE
FC
FC
LSV
Level shift value (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 23 for settings)
LSV3 LSV2 LSV1 LSV0 Level Shift Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0dB
1dB
2dB
3dB
4dB
5dB
6dB
7dB
8dB
9dB
10dB
11dB
12dB
13dB
576
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LSV3 LSV2 LSV1 LSV0 Level Shift Value
1
1
1
0
14dB
1
1
1
1
15dB
DMI
Down-mix inhibit (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 24 for settings)
DM_INH Describes whether the down mixed stereo output is permitted
0
Permitted or no information about any assertion of this
1
Prohibited
Query syntax XAUD:audparameter?
Query response value
Example 1 The following example sets the number of audio channels (CC parameter) to 2 in the
Audio Infoframe.
XAUD:CC 2
IFGU
Example 2 The following example sets an Audio InfoFrame with these properties:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seven channels (CC parameter)
MPEG1 coding type (CT parameter)
16-bit sample size (SS parameter)
88.2KHz frequency (SF parameter)
72KHz maximum bit rate (MBR parameter)
All but channel 3 (LFE) are allocated (CA parameter)
10dB attenuation during source device down-mixing (LSV parameter)
Down-mixing permitted (DMI parameter)
XAUD 4 1 10 6 3 1 4 9 18 10 0;IFGU
Example 3 The following example reports the current setting for the Member Bit Rate parameter in
the Audio Infoframe.
XAUD:MBR?
Video Test Generator User Guide
577
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XAVI
Auxiliary Video Information InfoFrame Data
Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter
Description Writes Auxiliary Video Information (AVI) InfoFrame packet data.
Command syntax XAVI:aviparameter value
(individual
parameter)
Command syntax XAVI type version length [S [B [A [Y [R [M [C [SC [ETB [SBB [ELB [SRB ]]]]]]]]]]]]
(complete
packet–version 1)
Command syntax XAVI type version length [S [B [A [Y [R [M [C [SC [ETB [SBB [ELB [SRB [VIC [PR]]]]]]]]]]]]
(complete
packet–version 2)
type
2
version
1 = version 1
2 = version 2
length (bytes)
13
The remaining are AVI Infoframe data parameters (aviparameter) as specified in
EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Section 6.1:
VERS (same as Version)
Infoframe version:
1 = version 1
2 = version 2
S
Scan information (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 8 for settings)
S S
1
0
Scan Information
0
0
No Data
0
1
1
0
Overscanned (television)
Underscanned (com-
puter)
1
1
Future
578
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Bar information (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 8 for settings)
B B
1
0
0
0
Bar Information
Bar data not valid
0
1
1
1
0
1
Vertical Bar info valid
Horizontal Bar info valid
Vertical & Horizontal Bar info
valid
A
Active Format Information (AFD) present (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 8 for
settings)
A Active Format Information
0
Present
0
No data
1
Active format information valid
Y
Video type (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 8 for settings)
Y
1
0
Y
0
0
RGB or YCbCr
RGB (default)
0
1
1
1
0
1
YCbCr 4:2:2
YCbCr 4:4:4
Future
R
Active Format Aspect Ratio (ADF value) (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 9 for
settings)
R R R R
3
2
1
0
Active Format Aspect Ratio
1
0
0
0
Same as picture aspect ratio
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
4:3 (Center)
16:9 (Center)
14:9 (Center)
other val-
ues
Per DVB AFD active_format
field
M
Picture Aspect Ratio (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 9 for settings)
M M Picture Aspect
1
0
Ratio
0
0
No data
4:3
0
1
1
0
16:9
Video Test Generator User Guide
579
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M M Picture Aspect
1
0
Ratio
1
1
Future
C
Colorimetry (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 9 for settings)
C C
1
0
0
0
Colorimetry
No data
0
1
1
1
0
1
SMPTE 170M ITU601
ITU709
Future
SC
Non-uniform Picture Scaling (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 11 for settings)
SC SC
1
0
0
0
Non-Uniform Picture Scaling
No known non-uniform scaling
0
1
1
1
0
1
Picture has been scaled horizontally
Picture has been scaled vertically
Picture has been scaled horizontally and vertically
ETB
Line number of end of top bar representing the last line of a horizontal letterbox bar
area at the top of the picture (0 = no horizontal bar present at top of picture).
SBB
Line number of start of bottom bar representing the first line of a horizontal letterbox
bar area at the bottom of the picture.
ELB
Pixel number of end of left bar representing the last horizontal pixel of a vertical
pillar-bar area at the left side of the picture (0 = no vertical bar present at left of
picture).
SRB
Pixel number of start of right bar representing the first horizontal pixel of a vertical
pillar-bar area at the left side of the picture.
VIC
PR
Pixel repetition for “2x” and “4x” formats (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 14 for
PR PR PR PR
3
2
1
0
Pixel Repetition for Optional (2880)
0
0
0
0
No Repetition (i.e. pixel sent once)
0
0
0
1
Pixel sent 2 times (i.e. repeated
once)
580
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PR PR PR PR
3
2
1
0
Pixel Repetition for Optional (2880)
0
0
1
0
Pixel sent 3 times
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Pixel sent 4 times
Pixel sent 5 times
Pixel sent 6 times
Pixel sent 7 times
Pixel sent 8 times
Pixel sent 9 times
Pixel sent 10 times
Query syntax XAVI:aviparameter?
Query response value
Example 1 The following example sets the scan information (S parameter) to overscanned in the AVI
Infoframe.
XAVI:S 1
IFGU
Example 2 The following example sets the AFD flag (A parameter) to not present and the picture
aspect ratio (M parameter) to 4:3 in the AVI Infoframe.
XAVI: A 0; M 1;IFGU
Example 3 The following example sets an Audio InfoFrame (version 2) with these properties:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Overscanned (S parameter)
Bar information not valid (B parameter)
Active format information valid (A parameter)
YC C video type (Y parameter)
b
r
Active format aspect ratio same as picture format ratio (R parameter)
4:3 picture aspect ratio (M parameter)
SMPTE 170M colorimetry (C parameter)
No known non-uniform scaling (SC parameter)
No specified line number for horizontal bar (ETB and SBB parameters)
No specified pixel number for vertical bar (ELB and SRB parameters)
480p59 video format (VIC format)
No pixel repetition (PR format)
XAVI 2 1 13 1 0 1 2 8 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0;IFGU
Video Test Generator User Guide
581
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 4 The following example reports the current settings for the following AVI Infoframe
parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
Video Type
Active Format Information present
Bar information present
Scan information
Colorimetry
XAVI:Y?
XAVI:A?
XAVI:B?
XAVI:S?
XAVI:C?
582
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XBBH
Arbitrary Bottom Border Height
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Establishes the first line of a horizontal letterbox bar area at the bottom of the image.
Command syntax XBBH line_number
line_number
0 to 65535 (in decimal)
Example XBBH 769
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
583
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XDID
EDID Data Write
Class EDID and DDC control
Description Writes new EDID structure for DVI Analyzer receiver.
Command syntax XDID offset bytes data
offset (hex)
address offset (in bytes)
bytes
number of bytes (hex)
data
data (hex)
Example 1 To change the first 3 bytes of the EDID structure (after the header):
XDID 8 3 DE33FF
DIDU
Example 2 To write at offset 256 (start of block 2):
XDID 100 8 1122334455667788
XDID 108 8 8899AABBCCDDEEFF
DIDU
Related commands DIDU
584
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XGCP
General Control Parameter Data
Class Data island packet generator
Description Enables and disables the HDMI Audio/Video Mute (AVMUTE) feature. When enabled,
audio and video are muted by the generator.
Important: You can set either the AVMUTE set flag (to turn mute on) or the AVMUTE clear
flag (to turn mute off) to 1 (but not both).
example below).
Command syntax XGCP AVMUTE_set_flag AVMUTE_clear_flag
AVMUTE_set_flag
0 = off
1 = on
AVMUTE_clear_flag
0 = off
1 = on
Example 1 To enable AVMUTE:
DPTG 7
DPTR 1
XGCP 1 0
DPGU
Once executed, use the MUTE? to continuously check until the AVMUTE state is changed
(may not take place right away).
Example 2 To disable AVMUTE:
DPTG 7
DPTR 1
XGCP 0 1
DPGU
Again, use the MUTE? command to continuously check until the AVMUTE state is
changed.
586
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XGDP
Generic Data Packet Data
Class Data island packet generator
Description Writes a generic data packet for sourcing highly-customized arbitrary data.
Command syntax XGDP:gdpparameter value
(individual
parameter)
Command syntax XGDP data
(complete packet)
data (ASCII)
hexidecimal payload data in the form of ASCII characters (“0” through “F”)—each
representing one 4-bit nibble of data (if less than 60 ASCII characters, which is less
than 30 bytes of data, are specified, then the remaining bytes are set to zero)
The following are data island packet parameters (gdpparameter) as specified in HDMI
specification, Section 5.3.
hb0
Packet type (see HDMI specification, Section 5.3.1 through 5.3.6 for settings)
hb1
Packet-specific data (see HDMI specification, Section 5.3.1 through 5.3.6 for settings)
hb2
Packet-specific data (see HDMI specification, Section 5.3.1 through 5.3.6 for settings)
pb0 – pb27
InfoFrame packet data (see HDMI specification, Section 5.3.5 for settings)
Example
Video Test Generator User Guide
587
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XGIF
Generic InfoFrame Data
Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter
Description Writes generic InfoFrame packet data. This allows you to emulate any InfoFrame type
(including vendor-specific).
Note: The HDMI specification (section 5.2.3.2) requires that an HDMI packet must be
transmitted at least every two VSYNC periods, or the receiver will drop out of HDMI mode.
A Generic InfoFrame packet can be used for this purpose by enabling its repeat bit (see the
IFTR command).
Command syntax XGIF type version length data
type
0 to 255
version
0 to 255
length (bytes)
0 to 25 (bytes)
data (ASCII)
hexidecimal payload data in the form of ASCII characters—each representing one
4-bit nibble of data (if less than 50 ASCII characters, which is less than 30 bytes of
data, are specified, then the remaining bytes are set to zero)
Example The following example writes 10 bytes of generic InfoFrame data. The remaining bytes
11-25 will be set to zero.
XGIF 6 1 20 1122EE4455BB77FF99AA
588
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XLBW
Arbitrary Left Border Width
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Establishes the last horizontal pixel of a vertical pillar-box bar area at the left side of the
image.
Command syntax XLBW pixel_number
pixel_number
0 to 65535 (in decimal)
Example XLBW 64
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
589
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XMPG
MPEG InfoFrame Data
Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter
Description Writes MPEG InfoFrame packet data.
Command syntax XMPG: mpgparameter value
(individual
parameter)
Command syntax XMPG type version length [MB [MF [FR]]]
(complete packet)
type
5
version
1
length (bytes)
10
The remaining are MPEG Infoframe data parameters (mpgparameter) as specified in
EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Section 6.4:
VERS (same as Version)
Infoframe version
MB
MPEG bit rate (Enter rate in Hertz [Hz]) [In decimal or hex??]
MF
MPEG frame (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 26 for settings)
FR
Field repeat (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 26 for settings)
Query syntax XMPG:mpgparameter?
Query response value
590
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XRBW
Arbitrary Right Border Width
Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video
Description Establishes the first horizontal pixel of a vertical pillar-bar area at the right side of the
image.
Command syntax XRBW pixel_number
pixel_number
0 to 65535 (in decimal)
Example XRBW 961
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
591
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XRES
X axis RESolution for custom images
Class Image editor control
Description Sets the width factor used to scale horizontal size and position parameters in the
primitives of a custom image in the image editor buffer. The XRES? query returns the
current XRES setting.
Command syntax XRES width
width integer
16 to 65,536
Query syntax XRES?
Query response width
Example XRES 1600 // Set horizontal scaling factor to 1600
YRES 900 // Set vertical scaling factor to 900
592
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XSPD
Source Product Description InfoFrame Data
Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter
Description Writes Source Product Description InfoFrame packet data.
Command syntax XSPD: spdparameter value
(individual
parameter)
Command syntax XSPD type version length [VNS [PDS [SDI]]]
(complete packet)
type
3
version
1
length (bytes)
25
The remaining are Source Product Description Infoframe data parameters (spdparameter)
as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Section 6.2:
VERS (same as Version)
Infoframe version
VNS
Vendor name string
PDS
Product description string
SDI
Source device information (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 17 for settings)
Query syntax XSPD:spdparameter?
Query response value
Example The following example sets the vendor name string (VNS parameter) to “QDI” in the
Source Product Description Infoframe.
IFGU
XSPD:VNS QDI
Video Test Generator User Guide
593
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2 The following example specifies a Source Product Description InfoFrame with these
properties:
•
•
•
Vendor name is QDI
Product description is HDMI-Analyzer
Source device is Digital STB (1)
XSPD 3 1 25 QDI HDMI-Analyzer 1
Example 3 The following example reports the current setting for the Product Description parameter in
the Source Product Description Infoframe.
XSPD:PDS?
594
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XTBH
Arbitrary Top Border Height
Class AFD control parameter
Description Establishes the last line of a horizontal letterbox bar area at the top of the image.
Command syntax XTBW line_number
line_number
0 to 65535
Example XTBH 15
FMTU
Video Test Generator User Guide
595
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XVSG
Video Signal Gating
Class Format parameter settings
Description Determines which video outputs are active when the format is selected. The same
command controls both the analog and digital video outputs.
Command syntax XVSG red_mode, green_mode, blue_mode
red_mode, green_mode, blue_mode
0 = OFF
1 = ON
commands
updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.
Example XVSG 1 1 1 // Enable all color channels
FMTU
// Update hardware to current buffer contents
596
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
YMDI
Y MoDem Input
Class System Level
Description Initiates the YMODEM-BATCH file-upload protocol.
Customization data stored in a battery-powered NVRAM should be backed-up on a PC so,
if a battery failure or other problem occurs, recovery will be possible without having to
re-enter data by hand.
Restoration can be accomplished in three ways:
•
•
•
By sending parameters one-at-a-time
By host port binary data transfer
By standard YMODEM-BATCH file-upload protocol.
The YMDI command is used to initiate the YMODEM-BATCH file-upload protocol. The
protocol allows one (or more) data structures to be reinstated in the generator from a
binary file. A file contains all instances of a particular type of data. For example, sending
the FORMAT.MEM file to the generator will restore all user-defined formats. Note that you
should not attempt to restore the system parameters by sending SYSTEM.SYS. The
YMDI command internally executes UNPK after all files have been received, so UNPK
does not need to be sent after YMDI. The YMDI command can also be used to change the
firmware in the generator’s flash EPROM via the serial port. This is accomplished by
sending the FIRMWARE.BIN file to the generator using a YMODEM-BATCH. The
generator temporarily places the FIRMWARE.BIN data in picture memory and, if received
intact, eventually transfers this binary image to flash memory by internally executing the
VTOF function. Note that you do not have to send VTOF after a YMDI firmware upload.
Command syntax YMDI filenamesIs this the correct representation of the syntax? It doesn’t match the
example.
filenames
valid YMODEM-BATCH filenames:
DIR.MEM
PATH.MEM
IMAGE.MEM
SEQUENCE.MEM
FONT.MEM
FORMAT.MEM
FIRMWARE.BIN
Video Test Generator User Guide
597
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
YMDO
Y MoDem Output
Class System Level
Description Initiates the YMODEM-BATCH file extraction protocol.
Customization data stored in a battery-powered NVRAM should be backed-up on a PC so
that, if a battery failure or other problem occurs, recovery will be possible without having to
re-enter data by hand.
Backup can be accomplished in three ways:
•
•
•
By loading and querying parameters one-at-a-time
Extracting binary data using the host port
By standard YMODEM-BATCH file-extraction protocol
The YMDO command is used to initiate the YMODEM-BATCH file extraction protocol. The
protocol allows one (or more) data structures to be extracted from the generator as binary
files. Each file contains all instances of a particular type of data. For example, the
FORMAT.MEM file contains all of the user-defined formats stored in the generator. Note
that ALL will cause all files except SYSTEM.SYS and FIRMWARE.BIN to be extracted.
YMDO internally executes PKUP before sending files, so PKUP does not need to be sent
before YMDO.
Command syntax YMDO filename [filename [ … ] ] | ALL YMODEM-BATCH download
filename
Valid filename (listed below) or ALL
DIR.MEM
PATH.MEM
IMAGE.MEM
SEQUENCE.MEM
FONT.MEM
FORMAT.MEM
SYSTEM.SYS
FIRMWARE.BIN
Example YMDO ALL YMODEM-BATCH download
Video Test Generator User Guide
599
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
YRES
Y axis RESolution for custom images
Class Image editor control
Description Sets the height factor used to scale vertical size and position parameters in the primitives
of a custom image in the image editor buffer. The YRES? query returns the current YRES
setting.
Command syntax YRES height
height integer
16 to 65,536
Query syntax YRES?
Query response height
Example XRES 1600 // Set horizontal scaling factor to 1600
YRES 900 // Set vertical scaling factor to 900
Example dirn mydir
// create a directory named mymap
// begin directory context
dirb
nami 1 smpte133 // insert the name smpte133 at index 1
nami 2 flat // insert the name flat at index 2
nami 3 raster // insert the name raster at index 3
dire
dirs
// end directory context
// save map named mymap
dirl mydir
dirb
namq? 1 10
namy 2
// load directory mydir into edit buffer
// begin directory context
// list mydir names
// yank name at index 2
nami 1 colorbar // insert new name at index 1
dire
// end directory context
dira newdir
dirq? 1 10
// save modified mydir as newdir
// list available directories
// (up to 10 maps starting with the 1st)
600
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Test Generator User Guide
601
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
602
Appendix A Command Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard image descriptions
Acer1
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Consists of two sets of color
bars and five blocks of “#” characters on a white crosshatch with a black background.
Acer2
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Consists of colorbars, lines of
“#” characters, and a green border.
604
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acer3, Acer4, Acer5 and Acer6
Description Special test images developed per customer specifications. Consists of large and small
white circles centered on either a yellow (Acer3), magenta (Acer4), cyan (Acer5), or white
(Acer6) crosshatch on a black background. The Acer3 image is shown below.
Acer7 and Acer8
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. In the primary version, five
blocks of either white “#” (Acer7) or “H” (Acer8) characters on a black background are
displayed. A secondary version displays black characters on a white background. The
Acer7 image is shown below.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
605
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acer9
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. In the primary version, a mostly
white field is displayed with two rows of color bars at the bottom. A secondary version
displays a black field with the two rows of color bars at the bottom.
AFDtest
Description Used to test HDMI content mapping using different EIA/CEA-861-B formats. There are 10
Analyzer
606
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AnsiLght
Description The primary version displays a white background with a small black pixel in the center fills
the active video area. A secondary version displays a black background with a small white
pixel in the center.
Apple1
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. A secondary version shows
reverse (black characters on white background).
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
607
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio LR, AudioLRf, AudioRAT, Audio_L, Audio_Lf, Audio_R, Audio_Rf
Description Used to configure HDMI audio output signal. The AudioLR is shown below. For more
BarBlack
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
A secondary version shows reverse (black lines on white background).
BLU_EM, GRN_EM, RED_EM, WHT_EM, MEME1111, MEMESony, MESony_B,
MESony_G, and MESony_R
Description In the primary version, the screen is filled with blue (BLU and B), green (GRN and G), red
(R), or white (WHT, MEME1111, MEMEPlus, and MEMESony) EM character blocks on a
black background. Only the white character has a secondary version. It is drawn with black
characters on a white background.
608
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A bitmap of a single character block is shown here. The BLU_EM image is shown below.
Test Focus
Purpose This pattern is specified by some display manufacturers for checking and adjusting focus
one color at a time.
BLU_EM+, GRN_EM+, RED_EM+, WHT_EM+, MEMEPlus, MEPlus_B,
MEPlus_G, and MEPlus_R
Description In the primary version, the screen is filled with blue (BLU and B), green (GRN and G), red
(R), or white (WHT and Sony) EM character blocks on a black background. Only the white
character has a secondary version. It is drawn with black characters on a white
background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
609
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A bitmap of a single character block is shown here. The BLU_EM+ image is shown below.
Test Focus
Purpose This pattern is specified by one or more display manufacturers for checking and adjusting
focus one color at a time.
BLU_PIC, GRAY_PIC, GRN_PIC, RED_PIC, WHT_PIC
Description A solid blue (BLU), gray, green (GRN), red, or white (WHT) box fills the active video area.
Only the white fill has a secondary version. It can be changed to a black fill by pressing the
Step key. The BLU_PIC image is shown below.
Test Purity adjustment
610
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Purpose To produce correct colors in a displayed image, the electron beams from each of the three
(3) guns in the CRT should strike only their matching phosphors. A white image shows
patches of various colors on a monitor with bad purity. The purity adjustment(s) should be
performed before doing any brightness or color tests. In some cases, purity adjustments
involve loosening and repositioning the yoke, in which case purity should be adjusted prior
to doing any geometry tests.
Method The methods used for adjusting purity on a color monitor depend on the type of monitor
and CRT (for example; Delta, In-Line or Single Gun). In most cases, the first step is to
degauss the CRT.
Note: For a Delta Gun CRT, turn on only the red output. A solid uniform field of red should
appear. If the color is not uniform, adjust the yoke and the Purity Tabs assembly.
If purity cannot be corrected to acceptable limits, the monitor may not have been properly
degaussed or there may be a defect in the CRT or purity assembly.
Test Shadow mask warping
Purpose The purity characteristics of your CRT can change over time if you leave it on with a lot of
video being displayed. This may be due to the CRT’s electron beams striking its shadow
mask with enough energy to cause the mask to heat. This internal heating may be enough
to cause the shadow mask to warp and give bad purity.
Method Set the purity image to white and allow the monitor to run for a few minutes. Any mask
warping shows up as a change in purity. You can use a color meter to measure the
change. The BriteBox pattern may also be useful for measuring shadow mask warping.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
611
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bosch
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. This image has 6 versions.
Box_50mm, Box_64mm, Box100mm, Box150mm, Box200mm, Box250mm
Description The primary version has a solid white box in the center of the active video. Depending on
the image selected, the box is sized by square millimeters. If there is room, information on
the current format appears below and to the left of the box. This shows the number of
active pixels and lines as well as the horizontal and vertical scan rates. A forward slash (I)
after the number of active lines indicates the format is interlaced.
612
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: The box will be the correct size only if the correct physical active video size is set in
the format.
The Box_50mm image is shown below. The secondary version draws a black box and
black text on a white background.
Test Brightness control adjustment
Purpose The wrong brightness setting may cause other tests such as Contrast, Focus, and Beam
Size to be invalid. An accurate brightness setting helps give repeatable measurements
throughout other tests.
Method Center your light meter probe within the center square and adjust the monitor’s brightness
control to obtain the required light meter reading.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
613
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BriteBox
Description The primary version has a single white box in the center of active video. The box size is
controlled by the MSIZ system parameter. The secondary version adds four boxes in the
corners of active video.
Test Brightness control adjustment
Purpose The wrong brightness setting may cause other tests such as Contrast, Focus, and Beam
Size to be invalid. An accurate brightness setting helps give repeatable measurements
throughout other tests.
Method Center your light meter probe within the center square and adjust the monitor’s brightness
control to obtain the required light meter reading.
Test Brightness uniformity
Purpose The light output of most picture tubes varies slightly when measured across the CRT face.
This test can be used to verify that the light output variation is within your specification
limits.
Method Select the inverted version and perform the Brightness Control Adjustment test on the
center box. Then, center the light meter probe in each of the corner squares and note the
reading you get for each square. The deviation between each of the corner readings and
the center reading should be within your specification limits.
614
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Burst (TV formats only)
Description The left side starts with reference white (+100 IRE) and black (+7.5 IRE) levels. This is
followed by six bursts of sine waves. Each burst is at a different frequency, forming vertical
lines of various widths. The frequencies, going from left to right, are 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 3.58, and
4.43 MHz.
Test Frequency response
Method When viewed on a TV screen, the peak intensities of all of the bursts should match the
white reference level. The darkest portions between the peaks should match the black
reference level.
The image can also be used with a TV waveform analyzer to check the frequency
response of a video system. One scan line of the image, as it would appear on a waveform
analyzer, is shown at the top of the next page . High frequency roll-off (loss) would show
up as a decrease in the peak-to-peak swings on the right side of the waveform. Low
frequency roll-off would show up as a decrease in the peak-to-peak swings on the left side
of the waveform.
Some waveform analyzers can be set to detect and display the amplitude of the peaks. A
typical amplitude waveform for a good system is shown at the bottom of the next page.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
615
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BurstTCE
Description Fills screen with a 0.5 MHz frequency. This can be increased in 0.5 MHz increments by
pressing the Step key, and then turning the Image knob.
CardBMP
Description Selecting this image loads the BMP image stored on the PCMCIA card inserted into the
616
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check511
Description Consists of five small boxes in the corners and at the center of the active video. The boxes
are on a black background. Each box consists of alternating black and white pixels that
form a very fine checkerboard. The secondary version inverts the image, creating a white
background. The colors of the individual pixels in the boxes also are inverted.
Test Verify monitor resolution
Purpose The resolution of your monitor should meet or exceed the design specifications.
Method First adjust the brightness, contrast, and focus to their correct settings. You should be able
to see individual and distinct pixels in each of the boxes. Failure to see distinct pixels may
indicate you have a defective video amplifier, focus correction circuit, or picture tube.
Note: If multi-colored areas appear on a mask-type color picture tube, you may have a
problem with convergence or you may be exceeding the resolution of the picture tube.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
617
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CheckBy3
Description The active video area is equally divided into a 3x3 checkerboard of black and white boxes.
The primary version has four white boxes as shown in the image below. The secondary
version has five white boxes (reverse).
Test Contrast ratio
Purpose The pattern is based on a proposed ANSI method of measuring the contrast ratio of video
projection systems.
Method Using a light meter probe, measure and record the light-level reading (in foot lamberts) in
the center of each of the black and white boxes. The contrast ratio is expressed as the
average of all of the white readings divided by the average of all of the black readings.
618
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check_02
Description Primary version is shown below. The secondary version has reverse (black lines on white
background).
Check_11
Description In the primary version, the active video area is filled with alternating black and white pixels
that form a very fine checkerboard, as shown below. The secondary version inverts the
colors in the image. The inverted image looks almost the same as the non-inverted
version.
Test Verify monitor resolution
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
619
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Purpose The resolution of your monitor should meet or exceed the design specifications.
Method Adjust the brightness, contrast, and focus to their correct settings first. You should be able
to see individual and distinct pixels in each of the boxes. Failure to see distinct pixels may
indicate you have a defective video amplifier, focus correction circuit, or picture tube.
Note: If multi-colored areas appear on a mask-type color picture tube, you may have a
problem with convergence, or you may be exceeding the resolution of the picture tube.
CirclesL
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. In the primary version (shown
below), the image consists of five large white circles on a black background. The circles
are positioned in the center and in the corners of the active video area. The secondary
version inverts the image to black circles on a white background.
Purpose This pattern is specified by some monitor manufacturers for checking and adjusting video
scan size, linearity, and over scanning.
620
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CirclesS
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. In the primary version (shown
below), the image consists of eight small white circles on a black background. The circles
are positioned in the corners of the active video area and centered on each edge of the
active video area. The secondary version inverts the image to black circles on a white
background.
Purpose This pattern is specified by some monitor manufacturers for checking and adjusting video
scan size, linearity, and over scanning.
ColorBar
Description The primary version (shown below) has 16 full-height vertical color bars. The secondary
version splits the field into a top and bottom half. The bars in the bottom half of the screen
are in reverse order.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
621
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: When outputting digital video, 33% Gray changes to 50% Gray, and 67% Gray
becomes either Black or some gray level depending on how the display interprets the video
information.
Test Verify that all video channels are functional
Purpose To verify that none of the video channels are bad or connected incorrectly.
Method Compare the sequence of color bars with the table. Missing bars may indicate a dead or
unconnected channel. The transition between the bars should be sharp and distinct. Each
bar should also be uniform in color and intensity across its entire width. Non-uniformity
may indicate problems with the response of the video amplifiers. If all the bars are present
but in the wrong order, one or more inputs may be swapped.
622
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ComFocus
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
Cubes
Description This is an animated image consisting of one small multicolored cube orbiting around a
larger multicolored cube. Each cube also is spinning on its own axis. The default text string
is Quantum Data, which can be changed using commands. The primary version (shown
below) has a black background and a thick green border. The secondary version uses a
white background.
Purpose Can be used for show demonstrations with your own text.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
623
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom
Description This image has a white border around the active video, a centered smaller yellow box, and
green diagonals.
Purpose This image is an example of some of the available drawing primitives. It is not intended to
be an image suitable for testing or adjusting a display. Rather, it can be used as a starting
point for developing a custom image of your own.
DeltaErr
Description Use with analyzer to test for flickering pixels in a static image. For more information, see
624
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diamond1
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
Dot1606, Dot1610, Dot1612, Dot1615, Dot1812, Dot1815, Dot2016
Description The primary version has white pixel dots on a black background. The secondary version
has black pixel dots on a white background.
The primary version of the Dot2016 image is shown below.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
625
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dot_10, Dot_12, Dot_24
Description The active video area is filled with multiple rows of white, single pixel dots. The dots define
the corners of what would appear to be square boxes if all connecting pixels were lit. The
number of rows of boxes and the number of boxes per row depends on which version of
the image is selected and the screen aspect ratio of the currently-loaded format. The
number in the image’s name refers to the number of boxes that will be formed along the
minor axis for most aspect ratios. The generator calculates the ratio and then finds the
closest match from the following table.
Aspect Ratio
Dot_10
Dot_12
Dot_24
W : H
Decimal
Number
of Rows
Boxesper Number
Boxesper Number
Boxesper
Row
Row
of Rows
Row
of Rows
16 : 9
5 : 3
4 : 3
1 : 1
3 : 4
1.777 É
1.666 É
1.333 É
1.000
10
10
10
10
14
16
10
16
18
32
30
32
24
24
16
10
16
18
14
12
16
24
10
12
12
24
0.750
10
16
12
32
The primary version has white pixel dots on a black background. A secondary version has
black pixel dots on a white background.
The primary version of the Dot_24 image is shown below.
Purpose To accurately produce an image on a color monitor, the three electron beams in the CRT
must meet (converge) at the same location at the same time. Small dots displayed on a
misconverged monitor appear as a group of multi-colored dots.
626
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method The convergence adjustments of most color monitors fall into two main categories. The
first set of adjustments, usually called Static Convergence, aligns the three beams in the
center of the display. This method involves turning on all three guns and adjusting the
various magnets on the convergence assembly to produce all white dots in the center of
the display. The convergence assembly is located on the neck of the CRT. Different
monitors and CRT types may each require their own magnet-adjustment sequence.
After the center of the display is properly converged, the outer areas are adjusted by using
the monitor’s Dynamic Convergence controls. The number of controls, the area of the
screen they affect, and their adjustment procedure depends on the monitor under test.
Test Focus adjustments
Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy pixels which, in turn, result in poorly formed and
hard-to-read characters.
Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average
focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations should be within specified
limits.
Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for
adjusting them and the areas of the screen they affect depend on the monitor under test.
DV_Swing
Description This image is only available with DVI and HDMI. The DV_Swing image is used to
temporally change the digital video swing (DVSS format parameter) between 90 and 1620
mVp-p of the HDMI and DVI digital output for the active format. This image displays the
current video swing value over a graduated (ramp) background. This image is supported
by HDMI boards (revision F or later), and DVI boards with FPGA F1 or later.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
627
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: The DVSC command can be used to set the swing value between 150 and 1500
mVp-p.
Method To adjust the swing in 4 mV increments, press the Step key, then turn the Image knob.
Press the Step key again to reset the digital swing value to the default value, which is 1000
mVp-p for all formats.
Dyna
Description This image has multiple versions that display different sizes of the same pattern. Version 0
is shown below.
628
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EdidData
Description Displays EDID from the display connected with the generator. For more information, see
Elbit
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. This image has 19 versions.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
629
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMITest1, EMITest2, EMITest3, EMITest4, EMITest5
Description Special test images used for electro-magnetic interference (EMI) testing of displays. The
entire active video area is filled with an “H” character. The primary versions of these
images draw white characters on a black background. The secondary versions draw black
characters on a white background. The EMITest1 image is shown below.
The EMITest2 image is the same as EMITest1, but with the bottom row of characters
constantly drawn left-to-right and then cleared.
The EMITest3 image is the same as EMITest1, but with a larger version of the “H”
character.
The EMITest4 image is the same as EMITest3, but with the bottom row of characters
constantly drawn left-to-right and then cleared.
630
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The EMITest5 image is shown below.
FlashGry
Description This image flashes a flat gray image at a high-frequency rate.
The image flashed on the display is shown below.
FlashRGB
Description This image flashes RGB colors at a high frequency rate.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
631
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The image used as a background on the display is shown below.
Flat, Flat07, Flat13, Flat20, Flat27, Flat33, Flat40, Flat47, Flat53, Flat60, Flat67,
Flat73, Flat80, Flat87, Flat93, FlatGray, Flat_01, Flat_02, Flat_03, Flat_04,
Flat_05, Flat_06, Flat_07, Flat_08, Flat_09, Flat_10, Flat_11, Flat_12, Flat_13,
Flat_14, Flat_15, Flat_16
Description The entire active video area is filled with a shade of gray. Each image displays a different
shade of gray. The FlatGray image is shown below.
632
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flat_B, Flat_G, Flat_R
Description The screen is filled with blue (B), green (G) or red (R). The Flat_B image is shown below.
Focus20
Description Primary version shown below. The secondary version has black characters on a white
background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
633
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FocusC14
Description Primary version shown below.The secondary version has black characters on a white
background.
FocusCCx
Description Primary version shown below. The secondary version has black characters on a white
background.
634
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FocusEM
Description Primary version shown below. The secondary version has black characters on a white
background.
FocusEMP
Description Primary version shown below. The secondary version has black characters on a white
background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
635
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FocusM00 - FocusM15
Description The FocusM00 image is shown below.
Focus_@6, Focus_@7, Focus_@8, Focus_@9
Description In the primary versions, the screen is filled with white “@” characters on a black
background. The secondary versions are drawn with black characters on a white
background. The primary version of the Focus_@6 image is shown below.
Test Focus adjustments
Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read
text characters.
636
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average
focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within
specified limits.
Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for
adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under
test.
Focus_Cx
Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white Cx characters on a
black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white
background.
Test Focus adjustments
Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read
text characters.
Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average
focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within
specified limits.
Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for
adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under
test.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
637
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus_H
Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white H characters on a
black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white
background.
Test Focus adjustments)
Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read
text characters.
Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average
focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within
specified limits.
Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for
adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under
test.
638
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus_MM
Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white M characters on a
black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white
background.
Focus_Oo
Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white Oo characters on a
black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white
background.
Test Focus adjustments
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
639
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read
text characters.
Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average
focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within
specified limits.
Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for
adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under
test.
Format
Description A listing of the data contained in any format. The primary image lists the settings of the
format driving the display. The secondary image can be used to list the contents of any
stored format (via the Location field).
This pattern works best at display resolutions of at least 640 pixel by 480 lines.
FormatRx
Description Used by analzyer to view timing parameters measured from external signal. For more
640
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GenOps
Description Provides key sequences and status of special operating modes. For more information, see
GenStats
Description Provides detailed information about the generator. For more information, see “Displaying
Geom_1 - Geom_5
Description The primary version of the Geom_1 image is shown below. Secondary version is drawn
with black lines on a white background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
641
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gray25, Gray40
Description The Gray25 image is shown below.
GrayBar
Description The primary version (shown below) has 16 full-height vertical graybars. The intensity of
the bars is shown below. The secondary version splits the field into a top and bottom half.
The bars in the bottom half of the screen are in reverse order.
Test Video color tracking (color monitors)
Purpose To verify that a color monitor accurately reproduces colors at all intensities.
642
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method Perform the Brightness Control Adjustment and Brightness Uniformity tests first.
Changes in brightness from bar to bar should be uniform. All of the bars should appear as
an untinted gray at all levels.
Test Video gain linearity (monochrome monitors)
Purpose To check the video linearity (grayscale modulation)
Method Perform the Brightness Control Adjustment and Brightness Uniformity tests first.
Changes in brightness from bar to bar should be visible and uniform.
GrayL1, GrayL3
Description The GrayL1 image is shown below.
Grays5, Grays9, Grays11, Grays16, Grays32, Grays64
Description These images have the designated number of full-height vertical graybars.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
643
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Grays11 image is shown below.
GraysAll
Description Contains 256 grayscale versions, from 0 (full black) to 255 (full white).
Grill_11, Grill_15, Grill_22, Grill_33, Grill_44
Description The entire active video area is filled with alternating black and white stripes. The stripes
are drawn at different resolutions. Each of the stripes is four (4) pixels wide in the Grill_44
image and three (3) pixels wide in the Grill_33 image. Each of the stripes is two (2) pixels
wide in the Grill_22 image and one (1) pixel wide in the Grill_11 image.
644
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The primary versions draw vertical stripes. The secondary versions draw horizontal
stripes. The primary version of the Grill_44 image is shown below.
Test Verify monitor resolution
Purpose The resolution of your monitor should meet or exceed the design specifications.
Method First adjust the brightness, contrast, and focus to their correct settings. You should be able
to see individual and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions. Failure
to see distinct lines at the highest resolution (Grill_11) may indicate you have a defective
video amplifier or picture tube.
Note: If multi-colored lines appear on a mask-type color picture tube, you may have a
problem with convergence or you may be exceeding the resolution of the picture tube.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
645
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HalfArea
Description Primary version shown below. Secondary version is drawn with black boxes and white
background.
HalfClk
Description
646
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hat1606, Hat1610, Hat1612, Hat1615
Description Primary version of Hat1606 is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.
Hat1606A, Hat1610A, Hat1612A, Hat1615A
Description Primary version of Hat1606A is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
647
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hat1812, Hat1815
Description Primary version of Hat1812 is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.
Hat1812A, Hat1815A
Description Primary version of Hat1812A is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.
648
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hat2016
Description Primary version is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.
Hat2016A
Description Primary version is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
649
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatch_6, Hatch_10i, Hatch_10o, Hatch_12i, Hatch_12o, Hatch_24i,
Hatch_24o, Hatch_24s, Hatch_G, Hatch_M, GRN_HTCH, and MAGENTA
Description The primary versions consist of a white, green (G and GRN), or magenta (M) crosshatch
drawn on a black background. The lines form square boxes. A single pixel dot is located in
the center of each crosshatch box. The number of boxes formed depends on the version
of the image selected and the screen aspect ratio of the currently loaded format. The
number in the image’s name refers to the number of boxes that are formed along the minor
axis for most aspect ratios. The generator calculates the ratio and then finds the closest
match from the table on the next page. Version names indicate the drawing method, as
follows:
•
•
•
Versions ending in “i” draw from the inside (center) out. Any partial boxes are placed
around the perimeter of the image.
Versions ending in “o” draw from the outside in. Any partial boxes are placed along the
centerlines of the image.
Versions ending in “s” are the “i” version plus a 1-pixel thick border.
The secondary versions invert the images to black lines and dots on a white background.
Hatch_G, Hatch_M, GRN_HTCH and Magenta do not have secondary versions.
The primary version of the Hatch_10i image is shown below.
Aspect Ratio
Dot_10
Dot_12
Dot_24
W : H
Decimal
Boxes
Vertically Horizon-
tally
Boxes
Boxes
Vertically
Boxes
Horizon-
tally
Boxes
Vertically
Boxes
Horizon-
tally
16 : 9
5 : 3
4 : 3
1.777 É
1.666 É
1.333 É
10
10
10
16
16
14
10
10
12
16
16
16
18
18
24
32
30
32
650
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aspect Ratio
Dot_10
Dot_12
Dot_24
1 : 1
3 : 4
1.000
0.750
10
10
10
12
12
12
24
24
24
14
16
32
Test Convergence adjustment (color monitors only)
Purpose To accurately produce an image on a color monitor, the three electron beams in the CRT
must meet (converge) at the same location at the same time. Lines displayed on a
misconverged monitor appear as several multi-colored lines, and the transitions between
different colored areas contain fringes of other colors.
Method The convergence adjustments of most color monitors fall into two main categories. The
first set of adjustments, usually called Static Convergence, aligns the three beams in the
center of the display. This method involves turning on all three guns and adjusting the
various magnets on the convergence assembly to produce all white dots in the center of
the display. The convergence assembly is located on the neck of the CRT. Different
monitors and CRT types may each require their own magnet adjustment sequence.
After the center of the display is properly converged, the outer areas are adjusted by using
the monitor’s Dynamic Convergence controls. The number of controls, the area of the
screen they affect, and their adjustment procedure depend on the monitor under test.
Hatch_16, Hatch_20
Description The primary version of the Hatch_16 image is shown below. The secondary versions draw
black lines on a white background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
651
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatch20
Description Primary version...The secondary version draws black lines on a white background.
Hatch4x3, Hatch5x4 and Hatch8x8
Description These are different versions of a crosshatch pattern that may be called for by some display
manufacturers’ test procedures. The primary version consists of white crosshatch and
circles on a black background. The secondary version inverts the image to black lines on a
white background.
The primary version of the Hatch4x3 image is shown below.
Purpose This is a general purpose test image that can be used to check and adjust video scan
linearity and geometry and color convergence.
652
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatch64W
Description This is a crosshatch pattern that may be called for by some manufacturers’ test
procedures. The primary version (shown below) consists of an 8x8 white crosshatch on a
black background. A white rectangular patch is added in the center. The secondary
version inverts the image to black lines and box on a white background.
Purpose
Method This is a general purpose test image that can be used to check and adjust video scan
linearity and geometry, and color convergence. The large white rectangle also allows for
checking a display’s high voltage regulation. This is done by observing the vertical lines at
the left and right edges of the image. They should be fairly straight and not pull in the area
of the white rectangle.
HdcpA1B1, HdcpA1B2, HdcpA2B1, HdcpA2B2, HdcpProd
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
653
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitachi1
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. The image consists of a 2x2
cluster of Microsoft Windows® screen simulations using Japanese characters.
HSVnRGB
Description
654
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Imex1
Description
InFocus1
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
655
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
InFocus2
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
KanjiKAN
Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white Japanese Kan
characters on a black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters
on a white background.
Test Focus adjustments
656
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LGLCDTVB, LGLCDTVG, LGLCDTVR, LGLCDTVW
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Each image has three versions.
The primary version of the LGLCDTVB image is shown below.
LGRamp
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. The image provides a
grayscale of two objects. The secondary version of the LGRamp image is shown below.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
657
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linearty (Linearity)
Description This image has three parts. The first part consists of six (6) white circles. A large circle is
drawn in the center of the screen. Its diameter equals the lesser of the video height or
width of the display. A smaller circle is drawn at half the diameter and concentric with the
larger circle. A circle also is drawn in each of the corners of the screen. The diameter of
the corner circles equals one-fifth of the display width.
The second part of the image consists of a white crosshatch. The number of boxes in the
crosshatch depends on the physical size of the display.
The last part of the image consists of white tic marks on the horizontal and vertical center
lines of the image. The marks are one pixel thick at every other pixel location. Every fifth
mark is slightly longer. The color of the pattern can be changed with the individual video
output controls.
Test Linearity adjustment
Purpose To present an undistorted display, the horizontal and vertical sweeps of the electron beam
across the face of the CRT should be at uniform speeds. Any non-uniformity in the sweep
causes portions of an image to stretch while other portions are compressed. Non-linearity
in a monitor shows up in several ways. It may be present across the entire screen, in a
large portion of the screen, or localized in a very small area.
Method The circles in the image can be used to do a general adjustment of a monitor’s linearity
controls. Adjust the controls to form perfectly round circles. The crosshatch image can be
used to measure linearity and to make finer control adjustments. All the full boxes in the
crosshatch should be identical in size. Measure them with a ruler or a gauge made for the
monitor under test. Any deviation should be within your specification limits. Use the tic
658
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
marks and a ruler or gauge to measure linearity over a small portion of the display.
Compare the number of tic marks per unit of measure with an adjacent or overlapping
area.
LinFocus
Description This image has several parts. The first part consists of a large circle in the center of the
screen. Its diameter equals the lesser of the video height or width of the display.
The second part is a 10x10 box crosshatch. The crosshatch is drawn in from the outside
edges, with any extra pixels in the boxes placed along the vertical and horizontal axis. The
vertical centerline is two pixels thick if the format has an even number of active pixels per
line. The horizontal centerline is two pixels thick if the format has an even number of active
lines per frame. A smaller box is added at the center of the image. The box is one-half the
height and two-fifths the width of one of the crosshatch boxes. Current format data is
shown in the lower left quadrant of the image. It shows the number of active pixels (H) and
lines (V) as well as the vertical and horizontal scan rates.
The primary version (shown below) consists of a white pattern on a black background. The
secondary version has a black pattern on a white background.
The image also includes blocks of focus-checking characters at various locations. The
blocks are positioned inside the crosshatch boxes and are up to 3x3 characters in size.
The size of the blocks is limited by the number of characters that can fit in one box.
Test Linearity adjustment
on measuring linearity.
Test Focus adjustment
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
659
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read
characters when text is displayed on the screen.
Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average
focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within
specified limits.
Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for
adjusting them and the areas of the screen they affect depend on the monitor under test.
Master
Description
660
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MoireX, MoireX33, MoireY, MoireY33
Description The MoireX and MoireY images consist of black lines on a white background across the
active video area. MoireX provides vertical lines; MoireY provides horizontal lines. The
MoireX image is shown below.
The primary version of the MoireX33 and MoireY33 images provide a black frame around
the black lines. The secondary version draws a white frame around black lines. The
primary version of the MoireX33 image is shown below.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
661
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monoscop
Description
MSony7, MSony8
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Primary version of the MSony7
image is shown below. The secondary version draws white boxes and characters with a
black background.
662
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MulBurst
Description
Orion
Description This image provides a color bar that rotates (shifts) the bars to the right on an incremental
basis.
The color bars are shifted to the right at 3 second intervals. After pressing the Step key,
turn the Image knob to adjust the interval between 3, 10, 30 and 60 seconds.
Outline0, Outline1, Outline2, Outline3
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
663
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description The primary version of the Outline0 image consists of a rectangular white border on a
black background. The border is one (1) pixel wide and defines the active video area. Two
(2) diagonal lines join the opposite corners. A-full size cross is centered in the image. The
horizontal line of the cross is one (1) pixel thick for formats with an odd number of active
lines and two (2) pixels thick for formats with an even number of active lines. The vertical
line of the cross is one (1) pixel thick for formats with an odd number of active pixels per
line and two (2) pixels thick for formats with an even number of active pixels.
The secondary version of these images draw black lines on a white background.
In the Outline1 version, the two diagonal lines are removed and short marker lines are
added to the border lines near to where the cross lines meet the border lines. The markers
appear at both sides of the cross lines. The distance between the marker lines and the
cross lines is the greater of either two (2) pixels or one (1) millimeter.
664
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the Outline2 version, the two diagonal lines are removed and short marker lines are
added to the corners, and where cross lines meet and end.
In the Outline3 version, the two diagonal lines are removed, cross lines are shortened, and
short marker lines are added.
Test Yoke tilt correction
Purpose The horizontal axis of a displayed image should line up with the horizontal axis of your
monitor. Any tilt is likely due to the yoke being rotated on the neck of the CRT. A rotated
yoke makes any displayed image appear rotated.
Method Place your monitor on a flat surface so the face of the CRT is perpendicular to the surface.
Use a ruler or gauge to measure the height of each end of the image’s horizontal center
line from the surface. The difference between the two readings should be within
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
665
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
specification for the monitor. If it is out of specification, the yoke must be adjusted. Loosen
the hardware that clamps the yoke to the neck of the CRT and rotate the yoke until the line
is horizontal. Tighten the yoke-clamp hardware.
Test Yoke winding orthogonality check
Purpose The horizontal and vertical deflection coils on the yoke should have their axes cross at
exactly 90 degrees. Improper orientation of the windings causes displayed rectangles to
look more like nonorthogonal parallelograms. This type of defect is almost impossible to
correct with adjustments. It is usually easier to replace the defective yoke.
Method First, perform the yoke tilt correction described above. The vertical center line of the image
should be perpendicular to the work surface. If the deviation is beyond specification, the
monitor should be rejected and sent back for repair, rather than trying to magnet a
defective yoke.
Test Display size correction
Purpose A too-large active video size adjustment on a monitor may cause information to be lost
around the edges of the screen. A too-small active video size adjustment may make some
displayed information hard to read. The correct size is needed to obtain the correct aspect
ratio. You need the correct aspect ratio to get round circles and square squares.
Method First, determine the correct physical size of the active video area for the display. This
information usually is given in a display’s specification sheet or service manual. The size
should match the sizes in the format you are using. The size setting of the current format
Place a ruler or gauge along the horizontal line of the image and adjust the monitor's
horizontal size control until the distance between the end points matches the specified
value.
Move the ruler or gauge to the vertical line and adjust your monitor's vertical size control
until the distance between the end points matches the specified value.
Test Parallelogram distortion check
Purpose Parallelogram distortion is very difficult to correct with magnets because the correction
often causes barrel distortion. Therefore, you should decide early whether your monitor
meets this specification. The problem usually can be traced to the improper winding of the
yoke coils. If the problem is not too severe, it may be corrected by adding or adjusting
magnets on the yoke. However, if the distortion is excessive, it may be an indication of a
defective yoke which cannot be corrected with magnets.
666
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method Measure the lengths of the two (2) diagonal lines. Any difference is an indication of
parallelogram distortion. The difference in readings should be within the specifications of
the monitor.
If the difference in the readings is too far beyond specification, the monitor should be
rejected and sent back for repair, rather than trying to magnet a defective yoke.
Test Trapezoid distortion correction
Purpose This image gives you a way to measure trapezoid distortion in your monitor. If the
distortion is not too severe, you may be able to correct it by adding or adjusting magnets
on the yoke.
Method Perform the yoke winding orthogonality check and parallelogram distortion check first to
avoid wasting time on a monitor with a defective yoke.
Measure the width of the image at the top and bottom of the display. Any difference in
readings should be within the specification limits. Measure the height of the image at both
sides of the display. Again, any difference in readings should be within specification limits.
If either of the differences is out of specification, the trapezoid distortion of the monitor is
out of specification.
Add or adjust magnets on the yoke to correct the problem. The pin and barrel distortion
correction should be repeated to make sure that it is still in specification.
Test Pin and barrel distortion correction
Purpose If perfectly linear sweep signals are sent to a perfectly wound deflection yoke mounted on
a perfect CRT, you would not necessarily get a perfectly formed raster. Instead you would
likely get a raster that had its corners stretched away from the center, resembling a pin
cushion. This distortion occurs because the geometry of the deflected electron beam does
not match the geometry of the tube face plate. Also, imperfections in the yoke or CRT may
affect this problem. In some cases one or more corners may be pulled towards the center
of the raster causing it to look like a barrel. Uncorrected raster distortion carries over as
distortion of the displayed image.
Method A slot gauge may be used to determine if the amount of pincushion or barrel distortion is
within limits. A basic slot gauge may consist of a piece of opaque film with at least two (2)
transparent slots in it. One slot is used for top and bottom distortion and the other is used
for the sides. By positioning the correct slot over each portion of the border line, the entire
line should be visible. If this cannot be done at all four sides, the monitor requires
correcting.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
667
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are two main ways of correcting pincushion distortion. The first involves placing or
adjusting magnets on the yoke. This is a trial-and-error method. However, skilled operators
develop a feel for how strong a magnet to use and how to place it in order to get the
desired correction. If any correction is performed, the trapezoid distortion correction
should be repeated.
The other correction method involves adding correction signals to the deflection signal
driving the yoke. This method is usually found in color monitors, where adding magnets to
the yoke would cause problems with convergence and purity. The type and number of
adjustments depends on the monitor being tested.
P1
Description This image is a 6x6 white crosshatch without a border on a black background.
668
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P2
Description This image is a 4x4 white crosshatch with a border on a black background.
P3
Description This image is a 4x4 white crosshatch with a border and a small, centered white patch on a
black background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
669
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P4
Description This image is an 8x8 white crosshatch with a border on a black background.
P5
Description This image is an 8x8 white crosshatch with a border and a small, centered white patch on
a black background.
670
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P6
Description 16x12 pixel white crosshatch with a border on a black background.
P6_Sony
Description 6x12 pixel white crosshatch with a border on a black background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
671
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P7
Description 16x12 white crosshatch with a border and a small, centered white patch on a black
background.
P8
Description This image is an all black active video area. The secondary version draws an all white
video area.
672
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P9
Description This image is an all white active video area. The secondary version draws an all black
video area.
P10
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. There are four versions of this
image.
After pressing the Step key, turn the Image knob to select up to 4 different versions of this
image.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
673
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PacketRx
Description Displays the InfoFrame data received by HDMI receiver. For more information, see
PacketTx
Description Displays the InfoFrame data transmitted from the HDMI transmitter. For more information,
PdsCrt1
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
674
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PdsCrt2
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
Persist
Description In the primary version, 15 small white boxes move back and forth between diagonal guide
lines. The lines form 15 side-by-side tracks. The size of each box is scaled to the light
meter box size set by the MSIZ system parameter. The image does the following:
•
•
•
The box in the center track (marked “1X”) moves one scan line vertically and one pixel
horizontally for each vertical frame of refresh.
The seven boxes to the right of the center track (marked “2X” through “8X”) move 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 pixels and lines per frame, respectively.
The seven boxes to the left of the center track (marked “/2” through “/8”) move one scan
line vertically and one pixel horizontally for every 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 vertical frames
of refresh, respectively. These boxes are at the bottom of the tracks.
In cases where the next move would cause the box to move beyond the end of its track, it
immediately reverses and moves the correct distance in the opposite direction for the next
frame.
A continuously-running counter appears in the upper left corner of the image. The number
shown is the number of vertical frame refreshes that have occurred since the generator
was first powered up.
The secondary version draws a black image on a white background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
675
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An example of the primary version of the Persist image is shown below:
Test Phosphor persistence
Purpose The phosphors on the face of most CRTs continue to glow for a short period of time after
the electron beam has stopped energizing them. This phenomenon is called persistence.
A certain amount of persistence is desirable in most applications. It prevents a flickering of
a displayed image that most users would find objectionable. On the other hand, a CRT
with an overly long persistence time causes moving objects to leave a blurred trail.
Method A flickering in the slower moving boxes indicates that the combination of refresh rate and
phosphor persistence is not suitable for long-term viewing.
A fading tail left behind by the faster moving boxes indicates that the display may not be
suitable for viewing animated images.
676
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PgBar64H, PgBar64V
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. The PgBar64H image is shown
below.
PgCB, PgCG, PgCR, PgCW, PgCWrgb
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Primary version of PgCB is
shown below. The secondary versions draw all white over the last bar.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
677
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PGCWrgb is shown below.
Philips1
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
PixelRep
Description Used to test HDMI pixel repetition. There are 10 different versions of this image to support
678
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRN24bit
Description This image displays pseudo-random noise using 24-bits-per-pixel color depth.
PRN_5, PRN_9
Description Used with analyer to verify the analyzer’s pseudo-random noise analysis capability. The
PRN_5 image introduces 5 pixel errors per color component, while the PRN_9 image
The PRN_5 image is shown below.
‘
PulseBar
Description This image is intended for TV formats, but can be displayed with any format up to 100
MHz. The image looks like two vertical lines followed by a wide vertical bar on a display’s
screen. The first line is a sine-squared modulated pulse that fades from black to red and
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
679
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
back to black. The pulse is 20 T for PAL and 12.5 T for NTSC formats. The second
narrower line is a 2 T white sine-squared pulse. T = 100 nSec for PAL and 125 nSec for
NTSC formats. The wide bar is white with sine-squared edges.
Test Video system testing
This multi-purpose pattern can be used with other instruments to check television K
factors. The modulated pulse can be used to check chrominance-to-luminance delay and
gain. The narrow white line can be used to measure short term linear distortion (K2T).
680
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QuartBox
Description The primary version (shown below) has a single white box in the center of active video.
The size of the box is one-half the width and height of the active video area (a quarter of
the entire active video area). The secondary version draws a black box on a white
background.
Test Brightness control adjustment
Purpose The wrong brightness setting on your monitor may cause other tests such as Contrast,
Focus, and Beam Size to be invalid. An accurate brightness setting helps give repeatable
measurements throughout other tests. This version of the brightness box should be used if
the display’s specifications call for the brightness to be set with one-fourth of the screen lit.
Method Place your light meter probe within the center box and adjust the monitor’s brightness
control to obtain the required light meter reading.
can be used to change the default color of foreground to any RGB value.
IMGL quartbox: ALLU
FRGB 122 122 122
// loads QuartBox image
// sets RGB color of box
After loading a different format, send the FRGB command again to set the box fill color.
If you want to draw your own box, use foreground as the fill color, and then use the FRGB
command to define the color of “foreground.” For example:
IMGL raster; ALLU
// clears display
RECT foreground 100 100 100 100 dither100
FRGB 128 128 0
FRGB 192 192 64
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
681
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FMTL DMT0660; ALLU
FRGB 192 192 64
Ramp
Description This image provides an active video area starting from full black (+7.5 IRE) at one edge of
the screen to full white (+100 IRE) at opposite end of the screen.
There are 4 versions of this image—one for each edge of the display.
When selected, this image is displayed.
After pressing the Step key, turn the Image knob to change the image starting point to left,
right, top, or bottom.
RampX
Description This image provides a ramp image that continuously sweeps (moves) to the right on an
adjustable time basis.
682
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When selected, this image is displayed.
After pressing the Step key, the image moves to the right. Adjust the speed using the
Image knob (turn clockwise to slow down the image).
Ramp_B, Ramp_G, and Ramp_R
Description The active video area goes from full black (+7.5 IRE) at the left edge of the screen to full
blue (_B), green (_G), or red (_R) at the right edge. The Ramp_B image is shown below.
Test Video gain linearity
Method When viewed on a TV screen, the full range of grays should be visible. There should be no
color shifts visible.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
683
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raster
Description The primary version shows a totally black display (nothing being displayed). The
secondary version shows a totally white display.
Test Raster centering
Purpose Many monitor applications require that the displayed image or text fit completely within a
bezel that surrounds the CRT. This usually requires that you first center the blank raster on
the face of the CRT, and then center the image within the raster. Use this image for
centering the raster on the CRT.
Method Turn up your monitor’s brightness control until the raster is just visible. Adjust the raster’s
position and size using the size and raster centering controls. The raster centering
adjustment for many monochrome monitors consists of moving magnetic rings on the
deflection yoke.
Regulate
Description The image cycles between two (2) patterns. In the primary version, the first pattern is a
white outline that defines the edges of displayed video. The other pattern has the same
outline plus a solid white rectangle in the center. The size of the solid rectangle equals
95% of the height and width of displayed video. The speed of the cycle cannot be
changed. The secondary version has a thick white frame with a black center for the first
pattern and a solid white active video area for the other pattern.
684
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The first pattern of the primary version is shown below.
Test High voltage regulation
Method The size of the border should not change for each half of the image. The change in border
size between the two images should be within the specification limits of the monitor.
Samsung1, Samsung2
Description Special test images developed per customer specifications. The image consists of three
small simulations of Microsoft Windows® screens on a blue background (Samsung1) or
black background (Samsung2). A border and centered cross are formed with repeating
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
685
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
groups of the characters “e” and “m”. The repeating characters are also used to form a
rectangular patch in the upper left hand corner and a circular area in the center of the
image. The secondary version of Samsung2 draws a white background.
Samsung3
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
686
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Samsung4
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
Samsung5
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
Samsung6
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
687
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SamsungB
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
SamsungT
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. There are four versions of this
image. When selected, the following image is displayed.
688
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SlideBox
Description This image displays a 16x9 white crosshatch with a large white patch moving across the
screen.
To change the animation speed:
1. Load the SlideBox image.
3. Enter the following commands:
ISUB 1
IVER 1
IMGU
DELX 10;
IMGU
DELX 20;
IMGU
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
689
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SlideX
Description This image displays a black background with a large white vertical bar moving across the
screen.
After pressing the Step key, the speed of vertical bar movement can be increased by
turning the Image knob (turn clockwise to speed up image).
To change the animation speed using the command-line interface:
2. Load the SlideX image.
3. Enter the following commands:
ISUB 1
IVER 1
IMGU
DELX 10;
IMGU
DELX 20;IMGU
SMPTE133
Description This image is based on a recommended practice (RP-133) test pattern designed by the
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE). The original application was
used in testing and evaluating medical imaging monochrome displays. The image now is
690
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
used in many different display applications. The image is self-scaling as to the number of
active pixels and active lines used. Some of the image’s elements have minor differences
from the original SMPTE specification.
These differences are noted in descriptions of the individual elements.
•
The image is drawn on a reference background having a 50% intensity level. The
background covers the entire active video area.
•
Crosshatch – There are 10 boxes vertically. The number of horizontal boxes is based
currently loaded format. The boxes are perfectly square with any fractional spaces
placed around the outside edges of the image. The vertical lines are two (2) pixels thick
while the horizontal lines are two (2) scan lines thick. Small crosses indicate the
intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines when they are covered by other parts of
the image. All parts of the crosshatch are normally drawn using a 70% intensity level.
A 75% level is used in the secondary version.
•
Resolution patch – The patch is made up of six (6) smaller boxes that are each about
6.25% of the height of the display. The boxes are made of alternating intensity (0 and
100%) stripes. The stripes run vertically and horizontally. The stripes may be one (1),
two (2) or three (3) pixels wide each. Details of the patch are shown in the lower half of
the following illustration. The patches are located in each corner of the main image and
in the center. They are oriented with the highest resolution and contrast boxes closest
to the outside corners. The 48%-53%, 48%-51% and 50%-51% level patches are
omitted in the secondary version.
•
Grayscale boxes – Twelve (12) boxes at eleven (11) intensity levels are clustered
around the center of the main image. They start at 0% and increase in 10% steps to
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
691
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100% with two (2) boxes at a 50% level. All of the grayscale boxes are omitted in the
secondary version.
•
Gamma check dither box – A small box is drawn inside the right-hand 50% grayscale
box. The box is half the width and height of the larger box. The box consists of a
checkerboard of alternate one-on and one-off pixels. The alternate pixels have levels
of 0 and 100%. This smaller box is not part of the original SMPTE specification and is
omitted in the secondary version.
•
•
Contrast boxes – Two (2) boxes are drawn adjacent to the grayscale boxes. They are
at 0 and 100% levels. There are smaller boxes drawn inside each box at 5 and 95%
levels. The contrast boxes are omitted in the secondary version.
Black and white windows – Two (2) horizontal bars are located above and below the
grayscale boxes. Their height equals 8% of the display height. There are half-size bars
centered in the larger bars. In the primary version, the dark portion of the windows is
at a 5% level and the bright portion is at a 95% level. Zero and 100% levels are used
in the secondary version.
•
•
Border – A border line is drawn around the image. It is set in from the edges of
displayed video a distance equal to 1% of the displayed height and has a thickness
equal to 0.5% of the displayed height. The intensity level is the same as that of the
crosshatch lines.
Circle – A large circle is centered in the image. It touches the top and bottom of the
active video area when the aspect ratio is wider than it is high (landscape-type display).
The circle touches the left and right sides of active video when the aspect ratio is taller
than it is wide (portrait-type display). The intensity level is the same as that of the
crosshatch lines. The circle is not part of the original SMPTE specification.
•
Resolution data - The number of active pixels per line and the number of active lines
is shown as text below the lower black and white window. The pixel depth also is shown.
The intensity level of the text is the same as that of the crosshatch lines. The displaying
of the data is not part of the original SMPTE specification.
The secondary version adds a row of six (6) color bars above and below the
black-and-white windows. The order of the colors, from left to right, is red, green, blue,
cyan (g+b), magenta (r+b) and yellow (r+g). The top row is drawn at 100% intensity
levels and the bottom row is drawn at 50% intensity levels. Color bars are not part of
the original SMPTE specification.
Test Deflection linearity
Method If the overall height and width of the display’s active video area match the sizes in the
format, the large circle should be perfectly round. Each box in the crosshatch pattern
should be the same size and shape. For more information on testing linearity, refer to the
692
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test High contrast resolution
Method All the 0 and 100% level stripes in all the resolution patches should be separate and
distinct.
Test Low contrast resolution and noise
Method All the mid-level 2 on - 2 off stripes in all the resolution patches should be visible and
distinct. This is a sensitive test for noise in the display’s video amplifiers.
Test Quick gamma check
Method The average brightness level of the small gamma dither box should match the brightness
of the larger surrounding box. This is a visual check to see if the display’s gamma
correction is producing the correct mid-level response.
Test Video gain linearity and gamma
Method The individual grayscale boxes all should be at their indicated levels. A small aperture
photometer is usually required to get accurate and repeatable readings.
Test Contrast and brightness check
Method On a display with properly adjusted brightness and contrast controls, both the 5% and
95% contrast boxes should be clearly visible inside their larger surrounding 0% and 100%
boxes.
Test Video amplifier stability
Method The two black-and-white windows should show sharp transitions between the smaller box
and the surrounding window. Streaking may be an indication of undershoot or overshoot
while ghost images may indicate a ringing problem.
Test Excessive overscan and off-center alignment
Method The entire border should be clearly visible on the face of the tube and not be hidden by the
edge of the glass or by any bezel.
Test Interlace flicker
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
693
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Method The horizontal 1 on - 1 off stripes in the resolution boxes should not have objectionable
flicker when shown with an interlaced format. Excessive flicker indicates that the
combination of the display’s CRT persistence and frame scan rate is below the persistence
time of the human eye.
SMPTEbar
Description This image is based on an engineering guideline (EG1-1990) test signal specified by the
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE). The SMPTE pattern, in turn,
is derived from an EIA standard test pattern (RS-189-A). The image, is set up to be
generated by an 801GX generator as an encoded TV output. It is designed for adjusting
the color settings of a television monitor by eye. It can also be used with a TV waveform
analyzer and vectorscope for testing video signal processors and color decoders. The
image is available on all models as a component RGB signal. Some of the image’s
elements have some differences from the original SMPTE specification.
These differences are given in descriptions of the individual elements.
•
•
The upper 67% of the image consists of a series of color bars. These bars match the
order of the bars in the SMPTE and EIA patterns. They are similar to the 801GX’s
TVBar_75 image without the last black bar.
The left side of the lower 25% of the image contains isolated -I and Q color difference
signals that match the original EIA and SMPTE patterns. The -I signal appears as a
bluish-gray bar and the Q signal appears as a purple bar on a TV monitor. The bars are
separated by a white (+100 IRE) bar.
•
The right side of the lower 25% of the image contains a narrow 12.5 IRE gray bar. Due
to a hardware limitation on the 801GX, this portion of the pattern does not match the
original EIA and SMPTE patterns. The original patterns had +3.5 (blacker than black)
and +11.5 IRE bars separated by a +7.5 IRE (black) bar.
694
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
The remaining central 8% of the image contains a row of chroma set bars. These bars
are part of the SMPTE pattern but are not in the EIA pattern. The order of the
alternating color and black bars matches those in the SMPTE pattern.
Test Color video performance
Purpose This general purpose pattern can be used to check the video handling capabilities of most
parts of a television system.
Method When viewed on a TV screen, all of the upper color bars should be correct and in the order
shown. The hue and intensity of each bar should be uniform over the entire bar.
The image can be used with a TV waveform analyzer to check the performance of a video
system. The upper color bars, as they would appear on a waveform analyzer, are shown
on a previous page.
Test Color decoder performance
Purpose The image can used with a TV vectorscope to check for proper operation of a video color
decoder. Vectorscope signatures of the upper and lower portions of the image using
NTSC encoding can be found on the previous page.
Method The vectorscope signature for the color bars should hit the target test point for each color
on the vectorscope’s graticule. If you are using PAL encoded video, the signature will be
The three “legs” of the vectorscope signature for the -I and Q color difference signals
should match the Burst, -I and Q reference lines on the vectorscope’s graticule.
The following tests are based on the original SMPTE guideline:
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
695
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test Visual chroma gain adjustment
Method To perform this test, you must have a way of turning off the red and green guns in the
monitor under test. Turning off the red and green video components of the 801GX
generator’s video output will not work for this test.
This test uses the upper and central color bars. Switch off the red and green guns on the
monitor. This will produce four blue bars, separated by black bars. Adjust the chroma gain
so that the brightness of each outer blue bar is uniform over the entire bar. The gain is
correct when the bottom 10% of each bar is the same brightness as the rest of the bar.
Test Visual chroma phase adjustment
Method In order to perform this test, you must have a way of turning off the red and green guns in
the monitor under test. Turning off the red and green video components of the 801GX
generator’s video output will not work for this test.
This test uses the upper and central color bars. Switch off the red and green guns on the
monitor. This will produce four blue bars, separated by black bars. Adjust the chroma
phase so that the brightness of each of the two central blue bars is uniform over the entire
bar. The phase is correct when the bottom 10% of each bar is the same brightness as the
rest of the bar.
Test Visual black level adjustment
Method This test uses the lower right hand portion of the image. Reduce the black level until the
gray bar disappears. Slowly increase the black level until the bar just becomes clearly
visible.
696
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sony6
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
Sony6WLC
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
697
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
sRGBflat
Description For testing color response per Microsoft’s WinColorKit standard. This standard was
developed by Microsoft to standardize methods relating to the matching of colors
appearing on various displays (go to
are 38 different versions of this image to support this feature.
When selected, a flat image appears with a color that is remembered from the last time
the image was set up. The example below shows version 8 (Red1) of the sRGBflat image:
A small label in the upper left corner of the image indicates the Microsoft name for the
color that is currently being displayed (for example, “sRGB-Gray5”). Note that some of the
names that appear conflict with generator color names (for example, “sRGB-Gray5” is not
the same as the generator color “Gray5”).
After pressing the Step key, turn the Image knob to select up to 38 different versions of
this image. Each image displays another WinColorKit color.
Note: For more information of generator support for Microsoft WinColorKit, go to
Staircas, Stairs20
Description The active video area goes from full black at the left edge of the screen to full white at the
right edge. There are six (6) steps (Stairs20) or sixteen (16) steps (Staircas).
698
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Stairs20 image is shown below.
Test Video gain linearity
Method When viewed on a monitor’s screen, a black bar plus five (5) gray bars should be visible.
There should be no color shifts, and each of the bars should be uniform in color.
The image also can be used with an oscilloscope or TV waveform analyzer to check the
gain linearity and gamma correction of a video system.
Strokes0, Strokes1
Description This image may cited by some display manufacturers’ test procedures. The Strokes0
version consists of multiple groups of separated red, green and blue horizontal lines drawn
on a black background. The Strokes1 version consists of multiple groups of separated red,
green and blue diagonal lines drawn on a black background.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
699
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Strokes0 image is shown below.
Purpose These images are special-purpose test patterns used in test and alignment procedures
specified by some display manufacturers.
Text_9, Text_9T, Text_11, Text_12T, Text_16
Description In the primary versions, the screen is filled with random paragraphs of white text on a
black background. The amount of text is determined by the size of the font used and the
horizontal and vertical resolution of the format. The Text_16 image uses a larger font than
the Text_9 image. The secondary versions use black text on a white background.
The primary version of the Text_9 image is shown below.
Test Word processor simulation
700
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Purpose If your monitor is used in word processor workstations or other applications that call for
large amounts of text to be displayed, you can use this image to simulate actual user
conditions.
Method Select a suitable font size and text color. Adjust your monitor’s brightness and contrast
controls to obtain the best image. The characters in all areas of the display should be well
formed and in focus.
TintAlign
Description
Toshiba
Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. There are two sub images, the
secondary image is depicted below. The top half of the image has three small boxes (red,
green, blue) with the upper left half at 92.7% luminence and the upper right half at 50%
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
701
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
luminence. There is a series of 11 small boxes of increasing luminence left to right with the
luminence identified in text. The lower left quarter of the image is 28.5% luminence and
the lower right is magenta at 44.3 IRE.
TVBar100 & TVBar_75 (TV formats only)
Description The image consists of seven vertical bars that fill the entire active video area. The color
and order of the bars is shown in the figure below. The TVBar100 image has a peak video
level of 100 IRE and the TVBar_75 image has a peak video level of 75 IRE.
The TVBar100 image is shown below.
Test Color video performance
702
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Purpose This general purpose pattern can be used to check the video handling capabilities of most
parts of a television system.
Method When viewed on a TV screen, all of the colors should be correct and in the order shown.
The hue and intensity of each bar should be uniform over the entire bar.
The image can be used with a TV waveform analyzer to check the performance of a video
system. Individual scan lines of each image, as they would appear on a waveform
analyzer, are shown on the following page.
The image is quite effective when used with a TV vectorscope to see how a video system
handles an encoded color signal.The image consists of a white crosshatch on a black
background. The lines form square boxes when the display’s active video area has a 4:3
aspect ratio. The vertical lines are made using sine-squared (2 T) pulses (T = 125 nSec for
NTSC and T = 100 nSec for PAL).
Test Convergence adjustment
Purpose To accurately produce an image on a color monitor, the three electron beams in the CRT
must meet (converge) at the same location at the same time. Lines displayed on a
mis-converged monitor will appear as several multi-colored lines, and the transitions
between different colored areas will contain “fringes” of other colors.
Method The convergence adjustments of most color monitors can be divided into two main
categories. The first set of adjustments, usually called “Static Convergence,” calls for
aligning the three beams in the center of the display. This method involves turning on all
three guns and adjusting the various magnets on the convergence assembly to produce
all white lines and dots in the center of the display. The convergence assembly is located
on the neck of the CRT. Different monitors and CRT types may each require their own
magnet adjustment sequence.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
703
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the center of the display is properly converged, the outer areas can be adjusted by
using the monitor’s “Dynamic Convergence” controls. The number of controls, the area of
the screen that they affect and their adjustment procedure is dependent upon the monitor
under test.
Test Sweep linearity adjustment
Purpose al sweeps of the electron beam
Any non-uniformity in the sweep
portions will be compressed.
ay be present across the entire
d in a very small area.
Method s in the crosshatch are identical
iauge made for the monitor
on limits.
Taffeta
Description
TVoutLin
Description Equivalent to Outline1 image but it uses anti-aliasing for vertical bars and double
horizontal lines, which reduces flickering.
704
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
706
Appendix B Image Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System errors
This section discusses system error messages that may be displayed by the generator
from time to time.
Power-on self test messages
The integrity of the data stored in non-volatile memory is checked every time the generator
is turned on. The following tests are performed:
1. The system configuration memory is checked. The memory remembers what the
generator was doing when it was last powered down. The memory also stores all
system wide parameters such as calibration factors and the light meter size. It is also
checked to see if it is compatible with the current version of operating firmware. If
everything is in order, then the generator goes on to step 2.
Otherwise, a “System corrupt!” message is displayed for 2 seconds. This message is
immediately followed by a “Memory blank” message, which is displayed for 2 seconds
while the format memory is re-initialized. Memory initialization involves clearing the
entire non-volatile memory and loading it with factory default data. Any and all data
created or edited by the user will be wiped out. The calibration factors are restored to
the original values used at the factory to test and calibrate the unit. The generator then
continues with step 3.
Note: System corruption is rare, and may be an indication of a bad memory backup
battery or a damaged generator.
Note: If you update the firmware EPROM in your unit, your system will appear to be
corrupt at the next power-on.
2. The remainder of non-volatile memory is checked to see if any data has been corrupted
since the last time the generator was used. This check includes each of the 300 format
storage locations. All user created custom images and test sequences are also
checked. If no problems are found, the generator goes on to step 3.
If one (or more) items have been corrupted, a message containing a tally of the
defective items is displayed for 2 seconds. A message for two corrupted items is shown
here. Please note that the checking routine does not identify the types of items (format,
708
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
custom image or test sequence) that are corrupted. It is up to the user to check the
contents of the individual items. Attempting to load a corrupted item will report and error
for that item.
A corrupted format can be repaired be either editing it or by downloading a new set of
data from a computer.
In most cases, a corrupted custom image or test sequence can not be repaired. This is
due to the variable data structure used. You will need to recreate and save the data
back into memory.
Repeated corruption of the data in non-volatile memory usually indicates a weak
battery. Battery replacement information can be found in the chapter on Maintenance.
3. A power-on message, indicating the current firmware and hardware revision levels, will
appear for 2 seconds at the end of the self test procedure.
If an animated image is displayed at power on, this message will not disappear until a
button is pushed or a knob is turned.
Power fail message
Whenever the AC power line voltage dips below the minimum specified, this message is
displayed and the generator’s microprocessor is halted.
If you see this message during normal operation, it probably indicates that a power sag or
short duration drop-out has occurred. To clear this condition, cycle the power going to the
generator. If the power is good, the generator should resume normal operation. If you still
have a problem, you may also want to check to see that the line voltage selector (next to
the power inlet) is set correctly for the power being fed into the generator.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
709
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format errors
Under normal operating conditions, a properly programmed model 801GX generator
should never report any Format error messages. If you do get an error message while
loading a format it is for one of two reasons. The generator distinguishes between invalid
data, entered in one of the programming modes, and corrupted data caused by a memory
failure. In either case, the generator will shut all of its outputs off. The outputs remain off
until a valid format is loaded.
Invalid data error messages
The example on the left shows a typical invalid data error message. The top line of the
display shows the format’s storage location number and name. The bottom line shows the
error number. Error numbers will be in the range of 2000 through 2999. Different numbers
indicate what type invalid data or combination of data is causing the error.
The following pages explain the cause of each of the error numbers and offers
suggestions on how to correct the problem.
Corrupt data error messages
The example on the left shows a corrupted data error message. The top line of the display
shows the format’s storage location number and name. The bottom line shows the error
number. Error number 9450 identifies the cause of the error as corrupted data. This type
of error either indicates the signs of a failing memory backup battery or a more serious
hardware failure in the generator.
Corrupted formats can corrected by either editing them or by downloading a clean copy of
the format from a computer. The “Programming” chapter explains both methods in detail.
710
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code descriptions
2000-2999 Format errors
2030 Number of fields per frame less than 1
A valid video format must have at least one (1) vertical filed of video per frame.
2040 Number of fields per frame greater than 2
The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced video formats having
more than two (2) vertical fields per frame.
2041 Can not repeat field if progressive
Repeat field operation is only supported in interlaced video formats.
2050 Horizontal total too small
The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan
line is below the minimum number supported by the generator hardware configuration.
2060 Horizontal total too large
The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan
line is greater than the maximum number supported by the generator hardware
configuration.
2071 Pixel rate too high
The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan
line multiplied by the horizontal scan rate exceeds the maximum pixel clock frequency
supported by the generator hardware configuration for the format’s video type.
2072 Pixel clock rate too high for pixel depth
The video format’s pixel depth combined with the total (active + blanked) number of pixel
clock cycles per horizontal scan line and horizontal scan rate exceeds the maximum
internal video data bit rate supported by the generator hardware configuration. The pixel
depth and/or total number of pixels per line need to be reduced in order to keep the current
horizontal scan rate.
2073 Pixel rate justification too high
The target pixel clock rate selected for justification of the video format exceeds the
generator hardware configuration.
2074 Pixel depth not supported
The video format’s pixel depth is not supported by the generator hardware configuration.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
711
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2075 Analog composite sync type not supported
The video format’s analog video composite sync type selection is not supported by the
generator hardware configuration.
2076 Digital sync composite type not supported
The video format’s digital composite sync type selection is not supported by the generator
hardware configuration.
2077 Number of digital links not allowed
The number of serial digital video data links in the video format exceeds the number of
links supported by the current firmware.
2078 Digital sync separate type not allowed for HDTV formats
The generator hardware configuration does not support digital separate sync for the
specific video type selection in the video format
2079 Number of links not supported
The number of serial digital video data links in the video format exceeds the number of
links supported by the generator hardware configuration.
2080 Pixel rate too low
The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan
line multiplied by the horizontal scan rate is less than the minimum pixel clock frequency
supported by the generator hardware configuration for the format video type.
2082 Number of bits not allowed
The generator hardware configuration does not support the number of data bits per color
for the serial digital video type selected in the video format.
2083 Invalid quantizing mode
An invalid value has been specified for the DVQM parameter.
2084 Invalid Pixel Repetition
In digital mode, double clocking is not supported for this specific hardware. This error may
be the result of an older FPGA or hardware.
2085 Invalid Sampling Mode
The value specified for DVSM is not valid and is inconsistent with the setting of DVST.
2090 Horizontal total not even
The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced video formats with a
total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan line that is not
evenly divisible by 2.
712
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-OR-
The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with a total (active
+ blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan line that is not evenly divisible
by 2 for the selected analog or digital composite sync type.
2091 Horizontal total not a multiple of 4
The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with a total (active
+ blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan line that is not evenly divisible
by 4. Mostly applies to video formats using serial digital video.
2092 Horizontal resolution not even
Number of active pixels per line must be evenly divisible by 2 for the given video format
type and generator hardware configuration.
2093 Horizontal sync pulse width not even
Number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse width must be evenly divisible by
2 for the given video format type and generator hardware configuration.
2094 Horizontal sync pulse delay not even
The number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse delay must be evenly
divisible by 2 for the given video format type and generator hardware configuration.
2096 Horizontal resolution not a multiple of 4
The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with a number of
active pixels per horizontal scan line that is not evenly divisible by 4. Mostly applies to
video formats using serial digital video.
2097 Horizontal sync pulse width not a multiple of 4
The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with the number of
pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse width not evenly divisible by 4. Mostly
applies to video formats using serial digital video.
2098 Horizontal sync pulse delay not a multiple of 4
The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with the number of
pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse delay not evenly divisible by 4. Mostly
applies to video formats using serial digital video.
2099 JRAT greater than 200MHz not allowed
The 802BT generator does not support a setting of JRAT greater than 200MHz.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
713
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2130 Horizontal active too small
The number of active pixels per horizontal scan line is less than the minimum supported
by the generator hardware configuration.
2140 Horizontal blanking too small
The video format’s horizontal blanking period expressed in microseconds and/or number
of pixel clock cycles is not supported by the generator hardware configuration.
2141 Horizontal blanking too small
Same as Error number 2140. Found in some firmware releases for different generator
hardware configurations.
2150 Horizontal blanking too small
Same as Error number 2140. Found in some firmware releases for different generator
hardware configurations.
2151 Horizontal total less than horizontal resolution
The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan
line can not be less than the number of active pixels per scan line.
2152 Horizontal resolution too large or Horizontal blanking too small
Same as Error number 2140. Found in some firmware releases for different generator
hardware configurations.
2155 Horizontal blanking too small
Same as Error number 2140. Found in some firmware releases for different generator
hardware configurations.
2180 Horizontal pulse width too small
The generator hardware configuration does not support video formats having horizontal
sync pulse widths less than one pixel clock cycle long.
2181 Horizontal sync pulse width not even
Number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse width must be evenly divisible by
2 at the current pixel clock rate for the video format and generator hardware configuration.
2190 HSPW too small for HDTV sync
The generator hardware configuration does not support video formats having horizontal
sync pulse widths less than two pixel clock cycles long for the current video and HDTV
sync type selections.
714
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2191 HSPW must be even for HDTV sync
The number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse width must be evenly
divisible by 2 for the current video and HDTV sync type selections.
2200 Horizontal pulse width too large
The generator hardware configuration does not support a horizontal sync pulse width that
is greater than the horizontal blanking period.
2201 Horizontal pulse delay not even.
The number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse delay must be evenly
divisible by 2 at the current pixel clock rate for the video format and generator hardware
configuration.
2205 Frame sync pulse width too small
The generator hardware configuration does not support a Frame Sync pulse width less
than horizontal scan period.
2206 Frame sync pulse width too large
The Frame Sync pulse width can not be greater than the total (active + blanked) number of
horizontal scan lines in one frame of video.
2207 Probe sync pulse width too small
The probe sync pulse width is less than minimum supported by the generator hardware
configuration.
2208 Probe sync pulse width too large
The probe sync pulse width is greater than maximum supported by the generator
hardware configuration.
2230 Horizontal pulse delay extends sync beyond blanking
The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s combination of
horizontal sync pulse delay and pulse width that places any portion of the horizontal sync
pulse outside of the horizontal blanking period.
2231 Vertical serration adjustment too big
The video format’s HVSA setting beyond the maximum limit for the video type selected
and generator hardware configuration.
2240 Vertical total too small
The total (active + Blanked) number of horizontal scan lines per frame a progressive scan
(non-interlaced) video format is lees than the minimum supported by the generator
hardware configuration.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
715
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2250 Vertical total too small for interlaced format
The total (active + blanked) number of horizontal scan lines per frame is less than the
minimum number supported by the generator hardware configuration.
2270 Vertical total is even
The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced scan video formats
having an even total (active + blanked) number of horizontal scan lines per frame.
2280 Vertical total too large
The total (active + blanked) number of horizontal scan lines per frame exceeds the
maximum limit for the generator hardware configuration.
2300 Vertical active too small
The active number of horizontal scan lines per frame of a progressive scan
(non-interlaced) video format is less than the minimum supported by the generator
hardware configuration.
2310 Vertical blanking too small
The number of blanked horizontal scan lines per frame for a progressive scan
(non-interlaced) video format is less than the minimum supported by the generator
hardware configuration.
2320 Vertical active too small for interlaced format
The active number of horizontal scan lines per frame of an interlaced video format is less
than the minimum supported by the generator hardware configuration.
2321 Vertical active not even
The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced scan video formats
having an odd active number of horizontal scan lines per frame.
2330 Vertical blanking too small for interlaced format
The number of blanked horizontal scan lines per frame for an -interlaced video format is
less than the minimum supported by the generator hardware configuration.
2350 Vertical pulse too small
The vertical sync pulse width is less than the minimum supported by the generator
hardware configuration.
2370 Vertical pulse too large
The vertical sync pulse width is greater than the maximum supported by the generator
hardware configuration.
716
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2390 Vertical pulse too large for interlaced format
The vertical sync pulse width combined with the number of pre and post-equalization
pulses for an interlaced format is greater than the maximum supported by the generator
hardware configuration.
2391 Incompatible analog composite sync & digital composite sync types
The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format outputting both
analog composite sync and digital composite sync type selections at the same time.
2392 Incompatible analog composite sync & digital separate sync types
The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format outputting both
analog composite sync and digital separate sync type selections at the same time.
2393 Analog composite sync type not compatible with analog video type
The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s analog
composite sync type being added to the current analog video type.
2394 ACS available on green only
The generator hardware configuration supports adding analog composite sync to only the
green analog video output
2395 Sync type selection incompatible with analog video type selection
The video format’s analog video type selection requires the use of analog composite sync.
2396 Invalid analog composite sync type
The current firmware does not support the format’s analog composite sync type parameter
value (ASCT setting) or the generator hardware configuration does not support a video
format’s analog composite sync type for non-interlaced operation.
2397 Invalid digital composite sync type
The current firmware does not support the format’s digital composite sync type parameter
value (DSCT setting) or the generator hardware configuration does not support a video
format’s digital composite sync type for non-interlaced operation.
2398 Invalid digital separate sync type
The current firmware or generator hardware configuration does not support the format’s
digital separate sync type parameter value (DSST setting)
2399 Invalid sync type selection
The current firmware does not support the format’s active sync type selection (SSST
setting).
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
717
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2400 Analog composite sync type and digital separate sync type incompatible
The generator hardware configuration does not support analog composite sync and digital
separate sync being active at he same time for the given analog composite sync type
parameter value (ASCT setting) and digital separate sync type parameter value (DSST
setting).
2401 Invalid horizontal sync pulse delay
The generator hardware configuration does not support the format’s current horizontal
sync pulse delay setting
2405 Frame sync pulse delay negative
The video format’s frame sync pulse delay setting must be zero or a positive number.
2406 Frame sync pulse delay too large
The video format’s frame sync pulse delay setting exceeds the maximum limit supported
by the generator hardware configuration.
2407 Negative probe sync pulse vertical delay
The video format’s probe pulse vertical delay setting must be zero or a positive number.
2408 Probe sync pulse vertical delay too large
The video format’s probe pulse vertical delay setting exceeds the maximum limit
supported by the generator hardware configuration.
2409 Negative probe sync pulse horizontal delay
The video format’s probe pulse horizontal delay setting must be zero or a positive number.
2410 Probe sync pulse horizontal delay too large
The video format’s probe pulse horizontal delay setting exceeds the maximum limit
supported by the generator hardware configuration.
2425 Sync type selection not supported
The current firmware does not support the video format’s active sync type selection (SSST
setting) or the active sync type selection is not supported by the current analog video type
selection (AVST setting).
2430 Vertical pulse delay extends sync beyond blanking
The generator hardware configuration does not support non-interlaced video formats
having a vertical sync pulse period greater that the vertical blanking period
2450 Vertical pulse delay extends sync beyond blanking
The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced video formats having a
vertical sync pulse period greater that the individual blanking periods between the fields.
718
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2465 Pixel clock pulse gate = 1 and pixel depth = 8
The generator hardware configuration does not support outputting a pixel clock output
when the video format’s pixel depth is eight bits-per-pixel.
2466 Pixel clock pulse gate = 1 not allowed
The generator hardware configuration does not support a pixel clock output.
2490 EQ before too large
The video format’s number of lines of pre-equalization for analog or digital composite sync
must not exceed the number of lines of vertical sync pulse delay.
2495 EQ after too large for interlaced format
The interlaced video format’s number of lines of post-equalization for analog or digital
composite sync must not exceed the number of scan lines from the end of the vertical
sync pulse to the start of video for either field.
2496 EQ after too large
The non-interlaced video format’s number of lines of post-equalization for analog or digital
composite sync must not exceed the number of scan lines from the end of the vertical
sync pulse to the start of video.
2550 Not enough video memory
The generator hardware configuration does not have enough video memory to support the
video format’s combination of active pixels per line (HRES setting) and active lines per
frame (VRES setting).
2551 Insufficient memory
Not implemented at the time this document was created.
2553 No PCMCIA card found in drive
When attempting to download a bitmap no PCMCIA card was detected in the generator’s
PCM slot.
2554 PCMCIA card is write-protected
When attempting to download a bitmap to a PCMCIA card, the PCM card was
write-protected.
2555 PCMCIA card is bad
When attempting to download a bitmap to a PCMCIA card, the PCM card was found to be
bad.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
719
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2704 Invalid horizontal physical size
The video format’s horizontal physical size value can not be negative.
2705 Invalid physical size units
The current firmware does not support the type number used for the video format’s units of
measure for physical size (USIZ setting).
2706 Invalid vertical physical size
The video format’s vertical physical size value can not be negative.
2714 Pedestal swing out of range
The video format’s blanking pedestal level (AVPS setting) can not be less that 0.0% of the
peak video level or more than 100.0% of the peak video level.
2715 Gamma correction out of range
The current firmware does not support a video format’s gamma correction factor (GAMA
setting) of less than 0.1 or greater than 10.
2716 Analog video swing out of range
The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s analog video
swing value (AVSS setting) for the given analog video type selection.
2717 Sync swing out of range
The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s analog video
composite sync swing value (ASSS setting) for the given analog video type selection.
2719 Video swing calibration out of range
The generator hardware configuration does not support the current user defined analog
video swing calibration factors (AVSC settings) for one or more of the red, green or blue
channels. The valid factory default setting is 1.00 for all three channels.
2720 Sync swing calibration out of range
The generator hardware configuration does not support the current user defined analog
video composite sync swing calibration factors (ASSC settings) for one or more of the red,
green or blue channels. The valid factory default setting is 1.00 for all three channels.
2721 NTSC TV signals require blanking pedestal
The generator hardware configuration does not support producing NTSC TV video outputs
that do not use a blanking pedestal (AVPG setting of 0) as required by the NTSC
specifications.
720
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2722 Blanking pedestal out of range for NTSC TV signal
The generator hardware configuration does not support producing NTSC TV video outputs
that do not use a nominal blanking pedestal level (AVPS setting) of 7.5 IRE as required by
the NTSC specifications.
2741 Digital video signal type not supported
The generator hardware configuration does not support any type of digital video outputs.
2742 Invalid digital video signal type
The current firmware does not support the format’s digital video type selection (DVST
setting).
2743 Digital video polarity not positive
The generator hardware configuration and/or the firmware does not support digital video
formats having a logic low level for the active (lit) pixels.
2745 Can not have analog AND digital video
The generator hardware configuration does not support the simultaneous generation of
analog and digital video signals.
2747 Invalid analog video signal type
The current firmware for a given model generator does not support the video format’s
analog video type selection.
2748 Analog video signal type not supported
The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s analog video
type selection.
2760 Digital video not supported
The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s digital video
type selection.
2761 Digital video signal swing out of range
The value specified for the digital video signal swing is out of range.
2762 Digital video swing calibration out of range
The value specified for the digital video swing calibration is out of range.
2800 Pseudo-random noise seed value exceeds limit
The seed value for the pseudo-random noise analysis exceeds its maximum value.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
721
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2801 Pseudo-random noise sequence exceeds limit
The length of the pseudo-random noise sequence exeeds maximum value.
2802 Pseudo-random noise type is not supported
The pseudo-random noise type is not supported.
2803 No signal input to analyzer
There is no signal input to the receive interface of the analyzer.
2804 X coordinate for delta patch out-of-range
The value specified for the X coordinate of the delta patch test is out-of-range.
2805 Y coordinate for delta patch out-of-range
The value specified for the Y coordinate of the delta patch test is out-of-range.
2806 Patch height must be greater than one
The patch height specified for a delta error test must be greater than one.
3000-3999 Image errors
3000 Invalid color name
The current firmware does not support a named color used by one or more primitives in
the user defined custom image
3001 Invalid pattern name
The current firmware does not support a named fill patterns used by one or more
primitives in the user defined custom image
3002 No image memory
There is not enough unused edit buffer memory space available to start a new custom
image editing session.
3004 Invalid font name
The current firmware does not support a named font used by one or more primitives in the
user defined custom image
3005 Image editor running
The current firmware does not allow a new custom image editing session to be started
while the current custom image editing session is still running.
722
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3006 Nothing to save
An attempt was made to save the contents of a custom image editing buffer when there
was no open custom image editing session to save.
3007 Overwrite ROM Image
A user defined test image can not be saved using the same name as that of a built-in test
image (case insensitive).
3008 Image save failed
Saving the contents of the custom image editing buffer failed for a reason other than those
reported by error codes 3005 or 3006.
3010 R, G or B 8-Bit video DAC setting out of range
A combination of system calibration factors, user calibration multiplier settings and video
output level settings have resulted in one or more calculated input values to go below zero
or above the analog video Digital-to-Analog Converter’s maximum limit of 255.
3011 R, G or B 6-Bit video DAC setting out of range
A combination of system calibration factors, user calibration multiplier settings and video
output level settings have resulted in one or more calculated input values to go below zero
or above the analog video Digital-to-Analog Converter’s maximum limit of 63.
3015 R, G or B 10-Bit video DAC setting out of range
A combination of system calibration factors, user calibration multiplier settings and video
output level settings have resulted in one or more calculated input values to go below zero
or above the analog video Digital-to-Analog Converter’s maximum limit of 1023.
3020 Kill EPROM image
Built in test images can not be removed from the firmware.
3025 Image not found
A test image of a given name could not be found as either a built-in test image in the
firmware or as a user defined custom image.
3050 Grayscale video DAC setting out of range
One or more internal calculations have resulted in an analog video DAC input grayscale
setting below zero or greater than 100% video level.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
723
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4000-4999 Test sequence errors
4000 Invalid format name
The test sequence contains one or more steps that have an invalid format name
parameter.
4001 Invalid image name
The test sequence contains one or more steps that have an invalid image name
parameter.
4002 No sequence memory
There is not enough unused edit buffer memory space available to start a new test
sequence editing session.
4003 Sequence memory full
There is not enough free battery backed user storage memory to save the sequence that
is in the edit buffer.
4004 Sequence not found
A test sequence of the given name could not be found in the user storage memory area.
4005 Sequence editor running
The current firmware does not allow a new test sequence editing session to be started
while the current test sequence editing session is still running.
4006 No sequence to save
An attempt was made to save the contents of a test sequence editing buffer when there
was no open test sequence editing session to save.
4007 Sequence buffer full
No more steps can be added to the current sequence being edited because no more edit
buffer space is available.
4008 Invalid delay setting in sequence
The test sequence contains one or more steps that have a negative number for the step
delay time.
4010 Font index out of range
An attempt was made to use a font at an index location that is less than zero (0) or greater
than the highest index number in use.
724
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4020 No font present at given index
Attempt to access a font at a valid index but the specified index is empty because of a
previous delete.
4030 Invalid font location
Can not install a font that has not first been transferred to memory.
4040 Sequence is running
A sequence editing session can not be started while a sequence is running.
4045 No sequence buffer
An attempt was made to change a parameter in a sequence step when there were no
sequence steps in the current sequence being edited.
4100 Pattern index out of range
The selected index number for a drawing primitive’s fill pattern is less than zero or greater
than the highest number used by the current firmware.
4576 Can not convert to inches, not valid units
The format’s current physical units of measure (inches or millimeters) is unknown and the
firmware is unable to convert a dimension to inches.
4579 Can not convert to mm, not valid units
The format’s current physical units of measure (inches or millimeters) is unknown and the
firmware is unable to convert a dimension to millimeters.
5000-5999 Directory errors
5002 No directory memory
The DIRN or NAMI command failed because there is an insufficient amount of managed
memory for the buffer request.
5003 Directory memory full
The DIRA or DIRS command failed because there is insufficient room in the directory
memory pool for the requested save.
5006 No directory to save
An attempt was made to save the contents of a directory editing buffer when there was no
open directory editing session to save.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
725
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5009 Directory list full
This occurs during DIRA and DIRS commands when attempting to save more directories
than supported by the current firmware.
5010 Invalid name index
The value of the <index> parameter used for a NAMQ? query is can not be zero(0).
6000-6999 Bitmap errors
6006 No map to save
An attempt was made to save the contents of a bit map editing buffer when there was no
open bit map editing session to save.
6020 Map not found
An attempt was made to access a bit map whose name can not be found in the
generator’s list of currently stored bitmaps
6030 Invalid map dimensions
A bit map can not have a horizontal or vertical dimension of less than one (1) pixel.
6035 Invalid map depth
The current firmware and/or generator hardware configuration does not support pixel
depth setting of the selected bit map.
6036 Map data index
An attempt was made to recall a bit map at an index location that is less than zero (0) or
greater than the highest index number in use for bit maps.
7000-7999 LUT errors
7006 No LUT to save
An attempt was made to save the contents of a color lookup table editing buffer when
there was no open color lookup table editing session to save.
7010 No LUT buffer
An attempt was made to modify the contents of a color lookup table editing buffer when
there was no open color lookup table buffer available.
726
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7011 Invalid LUT Index
An attempt was made to recall a color lookup table at an index location that is less than
zero (0) or greater than the highest index number in use for color lookup tables.
7020 LUT not found
8000-8999 Font errors
8450 Cannot remove font. Font not found.
Attempt to use FNTK command to delete a nonexistent font by name.
8455 Cannot remove built-in font
Attempt to use FNTK command to delete a built-in font.
8460 Font already exists in memory
Attempt made to transmit a font to the generator which already contained a font with the
same name.
9000-9999 System errors
9450 Corrupted format
Checksum error in data for a particular video format
9451 Bad location for format, failed verify
This occurs during FMTV command and FMTV? query when you attempt to verify data
integrity at an invalid location.
9452 Bad location for format verify
This occurs during a FMTZ? query when you try to determine if an invalid location has
been erased.
9453 Kill EPROM format
Can not delete factory default formats stored in EPROM
9453 Can not change EPROM contents
This occurs during FMTW or FMTZ commands when you try to overwrite or zero out an
EPROM format.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
727
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9454 Bad location for format erase
This occurs during FMTE command when you try to access an invalid format memory
location.
9456 Bad location for format read/write
This occurs during FMTR or FMTW commands when you try to read or write to an invalid
format memory location.
9457 Bad location for format name read
This occurs during FMTR? query when you try to read or write to an invalid format
memory location.
9458 Bad location for format copy
This occurs during FMTD command when you try during copying to access an invalid
format memory location.
9459 Can not change EPROM contents
This occurs during FMTD command when you try during copying to overwrite an EPROM
format.
9460 Bad location for format duplicate
This occurs during FMTD and FMTI commands when you try to use one or more invalid
format memory locations as the command arguments.
9467 Bad location for format erase
This occurs during FMTZ command when you try to make one or more invalid format
memory locations as the command arguments.
9470 Can not change EPROM contents
An attempt was made to insert a format using the FMTI command into an EPROM format
memory location.
9471 Bad location for format yank
This occurs when you try to remove (yank) one or more formats from invalid format
memory locations using the FMTY command.
9472 Can not change EPROM contents
This occurs when you try to remove (yank) one or more formats from EPROM format
memory locations using the FMTY command.
9475 Can not change EPROM contents
One or more EPROM format locations was given as the destination location for the FMTD
command.
728
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9477 Error duplicating formats
The <first> memory location parameter used with the FMTD command is greater than the
<last> memory location parameter.
9480 Format not found / Format data missing
The FMTR command tried to read a format from an empty format storage location.
9490 DDC mod not present
The generator hardware configuration does not support DDC communications.
9491 DDC not available
The generator hardware configuration does not support DDC communications.
9492 DDC2B no ACK from receiver
Low level DDC communications failed with Unit Under Test (UUT). No DDC
acknowledgment bit was received from the UUT.
9493 DDC2B arbitration lost
Low level DDC communications failed with Unit Under Test (UUT). DDC bus arbitration
lost with the UUT.
9494 DDC2B timeout on bus
Low level DDC communications failed with Unit Under Test (UUT). DDC communications
timed out with the UUT.
9496 EDID header not found
A valid block of header data could not be found in the EDID data read back from Unit
Under Test (UUT).
9497 DDC old monitor
A DDC compliant Unit Under Test (UUT) could not be found connected to the generator.
9498 I2C address missing
There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because
the device address was missing.
9499 I2C count missing
There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because
the data count was missing.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
729
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9500 I2C stream too big
There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because
the data stream size exceeded the size supported by the device.
9500 Sequence data not found
An attempt was made to use the SEQR command to read a sequence from an empty
sequence storage location.
9501 I2C data missing
There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because
the device data stream was missing.
9502 I2C register missing
There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture.
9503 I2C data byte missing
There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because
the device data stream had missing data.
9504 Serial digital video PLL not locked
There is an internal problem with the generator’s serial digital video hardware’s Phase
Lock Loop circuit.
9505 TV output hardware not ready
The generator’s serial digital video generating hardware is not yet ready to output video
9506 Serial digital video hardware not ready
The generator’s TV signal generating hardware reports it is not yet ready to output valid
video
9507 I2C offset missing
There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture
9508 Invalid HDCP receiver KSV
The HDCP Key Selection Vector returned from the HDCP receiver in the Unit Under Test
(UUT) is not valid.
9520 HDCP key combination not supported
The HDCP key combination between the Tx and the Rx is invalid. The Tx may have
production keys and the Rx public keys.
9521 HDCP failed after a while
The HDCP authentication started but failed after a while.
730
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9522 HDCP key combination not supported
The HDCP authentication did not start.
9523 HDCP production keys not supported
HDCP test initiated and specified production keys where are not supported in generator
option.
9524 Invalid transmitter KSV
HDCP video transmitter KSV sent by the generator is invalid.
9525 HDCP Ri value not ready
HDCP authentication cannot start because HDCP Ri value (link verification response) at
the transmitter is not ready.
9527 HDCP Ri do not match
HDCP authentication cannot start because HDCP Ri (link verification response) values at
the transmitter and receiver do not match.
9528 HDCP was interrupted
HDCP authentication was interrupted possibly by disconnecting the cable.
9529 HDCP receiver not detected
HDCP authentication failed to start because the hot plug was not detected.
9530 HDCP invalid for animation
HDCP test will not run when an animated image is loaded.
9531 I2C segment number missing
The segment number of the enhanced DDC bus is missing.
9532 I2C address 1 missing
The first address of the enhanced DDC bus is missing.
9533 I2C address 2 missing
The second address of the enhanced DDC bus is missing.
9600 Can not save format to EPROM
An attempt was made to save a format edit buffer’s contents to a location in the firmware
EPROM.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
731
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10000-10999 System errors
10000 Out of memory
There is not enough unused battery backed user memory space to store the contents of
the given edit buffer
10010 Invalid file check sum
The data object file that has been recalled from the generator’s memory contains an
invalid checksum. Data may be corrupted.
10020 Invalid file version
The data object file that has been recalled from memory contains a file version number
that does not match the current firmware. Data may not be properly interpreted by the
firmware
10025 File type
The data object file that has been recalled from memory contains a file type identification
that is not supported by the current firmware.
10026 File size
The size of the data object file that has been recalled from memory does not match the
size information stored in the file’s header data.
10030 Feature not implemented
The generator hardware configuration does not support one or more settings in the video
format
10035 Video board not detected
An attempt was made to reprogram the firmware Flash EPROMs in a Model 822 series
generator without a video board installed. The video board’s memory is used as a buffer
for the initial uploading of the firmware data.
10100 Filename alias not found
An attempt was made to delete a filename alias that does not exist.
10200 Font not overwriteable
An attempt was made to save the contents of a font editing buffer to a location in the
firmware EPROM.
10205 Font save failed
There is not enough unused battery backed user memory space to store the contents of
the font editing buffer.
732
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10210 Font table range
The recalled font data object contains a reference to a nonexistent table in the data object.
10215 Font table Index range
The recalled font data object contains a reference to a nonexistent location in one of the
tables in the data object.
10220 Font not found
An attempt was made to recall a font by name that is not stored in the generator.
10225 Can not delete font in EPROM
Ann attempt was made to delete a font stored in the firmware EPROM.
10230 Invalid font check mode
The current firmware does not support the selected test method on the contents of the font
edit buffer.
10235 No font definition
The recalled font does not contain valid font definition data need to determine the size
needed by the edit buffer.
10240 Font character high range
The character height setting of the font in the edit buffer is less than one or greater than
the maximum supported by the current firmware.
10241 Font ascent descent sum
The character height setting of the font in the edit buffer is does not match the sum of the
character ascent and descent settings
10242 Invalid font character range
The first or last character number setting of the font in the edit buffer is greater than the
maximum supported by the current firmware or the number of the first character is greater
than the number of the first character.
802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide
733
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
734
Appendix C Error Messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
QSC Audio Stereo Amplifier PL218A User Guide
Q See Home Security System QR4074 411 User Guide
Radica Games Video Game Console 74021 User Guide
Regency Universal Remote 995703605 User Guide
Roberts Gorden Gas Heater Linear Heater User Guide
RuggedCom Switch RS900G User Guide
Ryobi Chainsaw RY10518 User Guide
Samsung Car Video System HTTHX22 User Guide
Samsung Computer Accessories S3 C6410 User Guide
Samsung TV DVD Combo CSN2077DV User Guide